AC AC/DC V A - ProElektro DISTRIBUTION

TECHNICAL CATALOGUE
www.elkoep.com
Presentation of ELKO EP Company
ELKO EP, which is based in Holešov, has been with you on the electrical market for the past 20
years, covering a wide range of domestic equipments in the field of electrical installations. In the
last few years there has been dynamic development of smart wiring, in which our company has
been seven years developing and launching iNELS smart home system solutions. In modular
devices, as well as in smart wiring, we have become market leaders. We‘re developing products
that bring comfort to customers and safety for the environment.
The Parent ELKO EP company has gradually grown in 7 branches - Slovakia, Hungary, Poland,
Russia, Ukraine, Romania and most recently Germany. At the same time we export to 60
countries around the world, and our products can be found under the world famous brand
names (Schneider Electric, Eaton, HAGER, Siemens, MORS SMITT).
Our work is based on the development and modern technology. In practice, we appreciate you
as our customers, because you‘re receiving good products and smart solutions, which meet
your requirements. Our development facilities and precise production and distribution, all this
gives you the opportunity to use solutions which are both innovative and practical. There are our
modern manufacturing facilities to produce all our products. It was extended over the newest
and fastest SMD line, which means for you guaranteed quality and flexibility of supply.
We have and supervise 80% share of the Czech market and the fourth position in Europe.
Current-year sales growth: 20%
Number of employees in Holešov: 170
Number of employees of ELKO EP Holding: 236
Awards and Recognition:
In 2011, the experts awarded the top products developed in ELKO EP: RF Touch - wireless touch control unit won a Golden Amper, Moravian Electrical and Electronic
Association Award, Innovation Award of the year and PwC Special Award for Innovation. Also iNELS Multimedia - Multimedia control through television, won an award
- honorable mention Grand Prix.
Providing the possibility for students in technical fields to do their thesis. In 2012, the company ELKO EP became THE Number ONE company in Zlín Region and in the
national finals, we won second place.
Our range of products is divided into three product lines - relay (classical modular devices), RF Control (wireless), iNELS BUS system (Bus System). Each product line
has its own technical catalogue, where you can find complete information on individual products.
Product Lines
RELAYS - Modular electronic devices
www.elkoep.com
A wide range of electronic modular devices, which bring new possibilities to home and office control, monitoring
and security, as well as to industrial process control: time relays, installation contactors, staircase automatic
switches, time switches clocks, dimmers, thermostats, power supplies units, control and signalling devices,
GSM gates, etc.
www.inels.com
iNELS - Intelligent electro-installation System
iNELS will transform your house into a timeless intelligent household. It will take charge of heating and air-conditioning
regulation, lighting control and home appliance switching, while also providing perfect security for your home. Enjoy
controlling your entire house via a TV screen thanks to iNELS Multimedia (iMM) or use the elegant iNELS Touch Panel (iTP).
www.elkoep.com
iNELS RF Control - Wireless control
A unique wireless control system providing you perfect control over your home! The RF Control system enables you to
control functions such as heating, lighting, electrical appliances and window shutters, all with a single touch. No wall
cutting, fast and easy installation, exclusive design of wireless wall switch buttons and other components.
LOGUS90 – Home switches and sockets
www.logus90.com
We offer you exclusive switches, sockets and accessories in a standard plastic or metallic design. However, there
are also charming luxury frames from purely natural materials such as genuine wood, metal, granite or hardened
glass. Be especial!
2
iNELS system advantages
Advantages to classical electrical installation:
Comfort
- dimming function (gradual dim-up/dim-down, soft start, light scenes)
- control via touch-screen (built-in a wall) = complete information
- control via any remote controller (e.g. of your TV or stereo)
- control by voice (Sophy unit, listens to your voice commands)
- temperature regulation according to pre-set programs – in each
room individually
- possibility to control by mobile phone, computer and Internet
Automatization
- function is executed automatically on the basis of set value (time, temperature,
light intensity, movement of people, wind strength...)
- it is possible to execute several functions on the basis of one command or
event (e.g. when it is dark - INELS rolls shutters down, switches lights on,
increases room temperature and switches TV on, and many others ...)
- arrival/departure functions: after a code is entered (or a card read) to a
keyboard, system automatically sets electrical appliances according to the
identifi ed user.
Information
- system informs you about selected event/events by SMS text message
- anywhere you are and if you have an access to Internet, you can connect
to your house and supervise or change its state
- integrated security system can be connected to a security agency
Security
- alarm with extended functions is a part of the system
- system is equipped by a keyboard which can be controlled by a code
or by an access card
- all settings and accesses are subjects of passwords in several levels
- protection of a house in case of bad weather (shutters in strong winds or
storm), unexpected events (irregularities in power supply, overload), natural
disasters (sensor for flooding, smoke sensor)
- bio-installation: deconnection of unused electric circuit (e.g. socket
outlets in bedroom while sleeping)
- setting ideal conditions for your children’s sleep (gradual dimming off ,
pleasant temperature, motion monitoring = baby-sitting)
- touchable parts of sensors are supplied by a safe voltage 24V DC
Savings
- regulation of heating / cooling
- time or time-limited switching
- light regulation (possible energy savings up to 10% )
- dependant switching (e.g. when it is dark, for desired temperature etc...)
- blocking of selected appliances in case of high meter readings
- elimination of unwillingly switched appliances (e.g. when there is no
motion – light switches off )
Design
- modern design of the switches and sockets, thermostat, voice activity
detectors – optional designes of Elegant or LOGUS90
- variety to combine diff erent colours also in multiframe versions
- touch panel screen – unique solution of elegant wireless home
automation
Time for installation
- considerably lower thanks to bus installation (only 2 control wires)
- units are installed and later programmed
Flexibility of changes and extensions
- in future it is possible to add or change units easily
- functions can be changed by PC, also remotely through Internet
Available features for disabled people
- voice and remote control
- sound messages for blind (unit Sophy speaks pre-recorded messages)
- several actions can be done by one command
- control by computer from one spot
Choose the right one!
PRICE
OF INSTALLATION
Control using the TV
Tablet / SmartPhone
PC / Laptop
Music playback
Video cameras
Weather station
Door communicator
Controlling home appliances
Touch panel
Control via GSM telephone
Detectors
Group controller
Heating regulation
Controlling blinds
Dimming lights
Controlling appliances
-
Classic electro -installation
Electricity is a necessary companion to our everyday life and follows us almost wherever we go. Not only
does it provide us with light or a means of cooking, but it also gets us around from point A to point B.
Everybody knows where to find the home electric control panel and what to do when the power goes out.
We make all the devices that go into such control panels and switchboards, and have been selling them
for almost 20 years.
Our assortment includes all modular electronic devices (time relays, installation contactors, staircase
switches, timers, dimmers, thermostats, power sources, control and signaling devices).
Thanks to experience, we stand on solid foundations, and we are responsibly developing wide-ranging
additions in the form of higher levels of electrical installations - either wireless or intelligent (bus-based).
Energy savings:
Controlling
appliances
Dimming
lights
Controlling
blinds
Heating
regulation
Group
controller
Detectors
Control via GSM
telephone
Touch
panel
Controlling household appliances
Door
communicator
Weather
station
Video cameras
Audio Zone
PC/Laptop
(outdoor/indoor)
(music playback)
Tablet
SmartPhone
(controlling via TV)
Video Zone
Choose the right one!
PRICE
OF INSTALLATION
Control using the TV
-
Wireless electrical installations
Tablet
PC / Laptop
Music playback
-
Video cameras
-
Weather station
-
Door communicator
-
Controlling home appliances
-
Touch panel
Control via Smartphone
Detectors
Wireless switch
Most of you have already built a house or furnished an apartment. If you want to bring life
into your home, we have an elegant wireless solution. As the name implies, the wireless
communication is working with a range of up to 200 m (it depends on the internal structure
of the house/apartment, and the used building materials.
The central brain is in this case the touch RF Touch unit, which can be placed anywhere
within the range. It‘s possible not only to program entire system from this unit, but also
to control it. Brightly replaces several thermostats and controllers. Within the system, you
have an unlimited opportunity to add any drivers and placing them at the suitable places.
Heating regulation
Controlling blinds
Dimming lights
Energy savings:
Controlling appliances
Controlli
Contro
lling
ng
appliances
Dimming
Dimmin
Dim
ming
g
lights
Controlli
Contro
lling
ng
blinds
Heatin
Hea
ting
g
regulation
Controlling household appl
pp iances
Door
communicator
Weather
station
PRICE
OF INSTALLATIONONE
Wireless
Wirele
ss
switch
Detect
Det
ectors
ors
Contro
Con
C
ttroll via
viia
Smartphone
Video cameras
Audio Zone
PC /Laptop
Tablet
(outdoor/indoor)
(music playback)
Touch
Touch
panel
Video Zone
(controlling via TV)
Bus electrical installations
Control using the TV
Tablet
Are you building a new home? Then you should consider a bus-based solution. A bus in this
sense is a data conductor that is distributed in the walls across the entire home. As opposed
to a wireless solution, its advantage is range, because up to 6 x 550 m buses can be distributed in a single building.
PC / Laptop
Music playback
Video cameras
Weather station
Door communicator
Controlling home appliances
Touch panel
Control via smartphone
Detectors
Connection to a computer expands the scope of its available functions. This system may be
expanded to include multimedia extensions and can connect third party devices (household
appliances, A/C, etc.). Control and monitoring the system can be performed via PC, the
Internet, telephone, tablet, etc.
The system offers a wider range of functions that can be applied. A computer is used to set
the parameters.
Group controller
Heating regulation
Controlling blinds
Dimming lights
Energy savings:
Controlling appliances
Controlli
Contro
lling
ng
appliances
Dimming
Stmívání
lights
osvětlení
Controlli
Contro
lling
ng
blinds
Regulace
Heating
regulation
vytápění
Controlli
Contro
lling
ng hou
housese
hold appliances
Doorr
Doo
communicator
Weatherr
Weathe
station
Group
Gro
up
controller
Detectors
Detektory
Contro
Con
C
troll via
viia
Smartphone
Video
Vid
eo cam
camera
erass
Audio
Aud
io Zon
Zone
e
PC /Lap
Laptop
top
Tablet
Tab
let
(outdoor/indoor)
(music playback)
Touch
Dotykový
panel
Video
Vid
eo Zon
Zone
e
(controlling via TV)
iNELS smart home solutions
10 reasons to choose bus system
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Ideal solution for new buildings
Two-wire bus
Bus once stretched you can always expand
Security system, combined with detectors
Remote control (PC, mobile phone applications)
Imitation of presence
Regulation depending on the weather
Ecology and energy saving
Modern trends in controling
Media under control (can also be controlled via TV)
10 reasons to choose wireless system
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
Do you know that heating regulations save up to 30% from the energy costs
Without any reconstruction work
The fast duration for electrical installations‘s implementation
Convenient and affordable prices for everyone
The possibility of upgrading your system - gradually upgrade your installations
Battery - powered transmitters - no electrical injury
The variability of the features that you can change
The design, which inspires you
Professional assembly and service of our partners
We are the Czech company, which top priority is customer‘s satisfaction
House switches and sockets
BASE
AQUARELLA
ANIMATO
CRYSTAL
METALLO
ARBORE
PETRA
Plastic
Metallic design
Plastic
Crystal
Metal
Wood
Stone
Design ranges
BASE – Simplicity is the sign of beauty. Precise and
convenient shapes, distinctive colours embodied
in switches.
BR - White
GE - Ice
DG - Green/Ice
CG - Crystal/Ice
TP - Titanium/Pearl
FP - Beech Wood/Pearl
GG - Granite/Ice
AQUARELLA – Spacetime without limits. Metallic
design will draw you into the world of exclusive
design.
Animato – Wide range of colors, modern design
and nice price.
MF - Ivory
PE - Pearl
ZG - Blue/Ice
CP - CRYSTAL/Pearl
IA - Inox/Aluminium
JP - Cherry Tree/Pearl
GP - Granite/Pearl
CRYSTAL – Endless elegance of glass. Switches
underlining the dynamics of your interior.
METALLO – Be exceptional! Nobility of metal will
inspire you with unforgettable moments.
AL - Aluminium
JG - Orange/Ice
CA - Crystal/Aluminium
OP - Gold/Pearl
MS - Mahogany/Grey
GA - Granite/Aluminium
ARBORE – The Nature at your fingertips. Warm tones
of wood create an atmosphere of absolute bliss.
PETRA – Feel free to experiment. Stone is a symbol
IS - Grey
VG - Red/Ice
CS - Crystal/Grey
QS - Nickel/Grey
NA - Walnut Tree/Aluminium
GS - Granite/Grey
of stability, strength and power. Enjoy the switches
you can lean on.
www.logus90.com
Catalogue content
Modular electronic devices
Time relays
Time relays review
Single-function time relay CRM-81J, CRM-83J
Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO
Doublestage delay unit SJR-2
Delay ON star/delta CRM-2T
Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H
Multifunction time relays
CRM-61
CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S
CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE - with external potentiometer
PLUG-IN - PRM-91H/11, PRM-91H/8, PRM-92H, PRM-2H
Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B
Digital time switch SHT
Timer with an astronomical program SHT-4
Time switch SHT-6 with DCF managing
DCFR-1 receiver DCF 77
Super-multifunction relay SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B
Staircase switch CRM-4
Staircase switch CRM-42 with signalling before switching off, CRM-42F
Power and auxiliary relays
Power and auxiliary relays review
Modular VS116K, VS308K, VS316/24,VS316/230, VS116U, VS308U
Plug-in
782L,750L
Dimmers
Overview of dimmers
Staircase switch with dimming DIM-2
Controlled dimmer
DIM-5
DIM-14
DIM-6
DIM-6-3M-P
DIM-15, SMR-M
SMR-S, SMR-U
LIC-1
Power supplies
Power supplies review
Line DR
Line PS
Power supplies ZSR-30, ZNP-10
Bell transformer ZTR
Other modular devices
Twilight switch SOU-1
Twilight switch with digital time switch SOU-2 innovation!
Twilight and light switch SOU-3
Memory relay MR-41, MR-42
Controlling and signalling units USS
Monitoring relays
Monitoring relays review
HRN-41/42
HRN-3x, HRN-6x
Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-55, HRN-55N
Relay for monitoring over/undervoltage and phase failure HRN-57, HRN-57N
Relay for monitoring over/under voltage, phase sequence and failure HRN-54, HRN-54N
Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-56 (120, 208, 240, 400, 480, 575)
Relay monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N
Optical signaling of three-phase network MPS-1
8–9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16–17
18
19
20–21
22
23
24
25
26–27
28
29
31
32–33
34–35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42–43
44
45
46–47
48–49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59–60
61
62–63
64
65
66
67
68–69
70
Modular electronic devices
Monitoring relays
Monitoring current relays
PRI-32
PRI-51
PRI-52
PRI-53
PRI-41, PRI-42
Current transformer SR for monitoring current relays PRI (accessories)
Level monitoring level
Level monitoring relays HRH-1
Level monitoring relays HRH-5
Level monitoring relays HRH-4
Level monitoring relays HRH-6
Level sensors to level switches SHR-1M, SHR-1N, SHR-2, SHR-3 (accessories)
Relay monitoring
COS-1
HRF-10
Thermostats
Thermostats review
Analog and digital thermostats
Modular thermostat TER-3 (A, B, C, D, G, H)
Modular thermostat TER-3 (E, F)
Modular 2-stage thermostat TER-4
Modular thermostat for controlling temperature of motor winding TER-7
Modular multifunction digital thermostat TER-9
Thermo - ATR, ATF, ATC
Thermo - DTR, DTF, DTC
Energy-saving digital radiator thermostat ATV-1
Single-level thermostat with IP65 TEV-2, TEV-3
Two-level thermostat with IP65 TEV-1
Outdoor thermostat TEV-4
Humidistat RHT-1
Outdoor humidistat RHV-1
Accessories
Thermal sensors to thermostats TC, TZ, PT-100
Installation contactors
Installation contactors review
Installation contactors and installation contactors with manual control
VS120, VS220, VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463
VSM220, VSM425
Loadability of installation contactors
EAN codes
Technical information
Main instructions (for correct use of products)
Product loadability
Electromagnetic compatibility of products
EMC chart
Overview of tested types of light sources and the loads
Products packing
Dimensions
Examples of usage
Support of project design
Production technology
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78–79
80–81
82
83
84
85
86–87
88
89
90
91
92–93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104–105
106
107
108
109
110
111–112
113
114
115
116
117–121
122–129
133
134–135
Time relays
Single-function
CRM-81J
CRM-83J
3 functions and 6 time
ranges, multivoltage or
230V supply, output 16A
changeover/SPDT.
as CRM-81J but with 3x8A
changeover output/SPDT.
CRM-82TO
“true OFF” relay - delay
off without supply, for
back-up circuits.
SJR-2
two-state delay unit
(2x delay on), gradual
switching of high loads.
CRM-2T
CRM-2H
CRM-2HE
delay start-up of motors
star/delta.
asymmetric cycler,
independent time setting
ON/OFF.
as CRM-2H , but time setting by external
potentiometers (for frequent setting).
Potentiometer
Multifunction
Analog
CRM-91H
CRM-93H
CRM-9S
CRM-61
CRM-91HE
10 functions, 10 time ranges,
1x output 16A changeover/
SPDT, multivoltage or 230V
supply.
as CRM-91 but output
3x8A chageover/SPDT.
as CRM-91 but contactless
output (triac 0.7A).
cost effective version of
CRM-91H, 6 functions,
6 time ranges. Output 8A
changeover/SPDT, supply
AC 24-240 V, DC 24V .
as CRM-91H but with
time setting by external
potentiometer
(for frequent setting).
potentiometer - external
control unit for CRM-91HE
and CRM-2HE, mounting
into a switchboard, max
connection length 10 m.
Digital
PDR-2A
4 digit display, 16 functions,
2 independent times 0.01s-100 hrs
2 outputs 16A changeover/SPDT
START/STOP inputs.
PDR-2B
SHT-1, SHT-1/2
as PDR-2A but 10 functions
for each output and time meaning two relays in one
device.
SHT1: time switch with daily,
weekly programming. 1-channel,
output 16 A changeover/SPDT.
SHT1/2: as SHT-1, but 2-channel.
SHT-3, SHT-3/2
SHT-4
as SHT-1 but with daily, weekly,
monthly, and annual programming up to 2095.
SHT3/2: as SHT-3, but 2-channel.
Timer with an astronomical
program to control the lighting
without using a light sensor.
2-channel.
PRM-2H
socket to DIN rail
PLUG-IN
PRM-91H/11
as CRM-91H but into 11-pin
socket, multivoltage supply,
output contact 16 A.
PRM-91H/8
as PRM-91H/11 but with
8-pin socket,
output contact 16A.
PRM-92H
as PRM-91H but with 2x changeover/SPDT 8A contacts,
into 11-pin socket.
as CRM-2H but with 11-pin
socket,
2x changeover, 8A contact.
MINI
Staircase
switch
SMR-K
SMR-T
SMR-H
super multifunction relay for installation into a wiring box, 3 wire
connection (without neutral).
Input: can be connected in parallel
with LED energy saving light bulb
or fluorescent lamp.
super multifunction relay
for installation into a wiring box, 3 wire connection
(without neutral).
as SMR-T but 4 wire connection, output - triac 0-200 VA,
9 functions including function
of memory relay.
CRM-4
basic version , time
0.5-10 min
output contact 16 A ,
anti-blocking function.
8
CRM-42
programmable staircase switch with
warning before switching off, time
setting by number of button
pressings.
CRM-42F
programmable staircase switch
without warning before switching off,
time setting by number of button
pressings.
SMR-B
as SMR-H but output relay
contact 16 A
(possibility to switch also
fluorescent lights).
DIM-2
with dimming, setting:
dim-up/shining/dim-down
brightness only for el. bulbs
output up to 500VA.
ES-11 (11 pin)
ES-8 (8 pin).
SHT-6
Time switch with DCF managing.
Daily, weekly and annual program,
output 16 A.
1-channel.
Chart 1. Version - DIN rail mounting
Functions
SMR-B
SMR-K, SMR-T,
SMR-H
CRM-81J/ZR
CRM-81J/ZN
CRM-81J/BL
CRM-83J/ZR
CRM-83J/ZN
CRM-83J/BL
CRM-82TO
CRM-91H
CRM-93H
CRM-91HE
CRM-2HE
CRM-9S
CRM-2H
CRM-2T/230
CRM-4
CRM-42(CRM-42F)
CRM-61
SJR-2
PDR-2/A
PDR-2/B
SHT-1 (SHT-1/2)
SHT-3 (3/2), SHT-6
SHT-4
SOU-2
PRM-91H
PRM-92H
PRM-2H
See chart 2 Version - mounting into installation box (KU68)
A -delay off on entering
edge
B - delay off on downward edge
C - delay off on downward edge
D - cycler - flasher by
impuls
E - puls shift
F - delay on
G - pulse relay
H - impulse relay with
delay
I - cycler starting
with gap
j - delay on after
switched off
0.1 - 1 s
1 - 10 s
0.1 - 1 min
1 - 10 min
0.1 - 1 h
1 - 10 h
0.1 - 1 day
1 - 10 days
Number of Supply voltage
contacts
1-MODULE
2-MODULE
3-MODULE
PLUG-IN
Under the switch
Rotary switch
Button
Sliding switch
External potentiometer
Delay OFF after switch off
the Input supply
Delay ON
Delay OFF
Symmetrical cycler starting
with delay
Delay OFF
after impulse OFF
Symmetrical cycler
starting with impulse
Staircase switch
Impulse shift
Memory (impulse) relay
Impulse generator
Delay ON at switch on
controlling contact
Asymmetric cycler starting
with delay
Asymmetric cycler starting
with impulse
Delay ON
star / delta
Switching in real time
Impuls relay in delay ON
0.1 - 1 s
1 - 10 s
0.1 - 1 min
1 - 10 min
0.1 - 1 hrs
1 - 10 hrs
0.1 - 1 day
1 - 10 days
3 - 30 days
10 - 100 days
30 s - 10 min
99 h 59 min 59 s
Day
Week
Month
Year
230 V AC
12 - 240 V AC/DC
12 - 240 V AC
1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A
1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A
2x changeover 8 A
2x changeover 16 A
3x changeover/ 3PDT 8 A
Static output (triac)
1x NO 16 A
Type
AC 230 V
1x triac
1x NO AgSnO2
( )
( )
OUTPUT
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
TIME
FUNCTIONS
ADJUSTING
Type
Chart 2. Version - mounting into installation box (KU68)
9
Single-function time relay CRM-81J, CRM-83J
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Single-function and single-time relay with possibility of fine time setting by a potentiometer
(within the frames of a particular time range)
Suitable for applications where function and time requirements are known
Time switch, possible to be used for pump decay time after switching heating off, switching of fans
Choice of 3 functions:
1) ZR - Delay ON
2) ZN -Delay OFF
3) BL - Repeat Cycle
Functions can be controlled by supply voltage or time scale control input.:
(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 6 s - 60 s / 1 min - 10 min / 6 min - 60 min / 1 h - 10 hrs)
Universal voltage range AC/DC 12 - 240 V
Output contact: CRM-81J: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A
CRM-83J: 3x changeover/ 3PDT 8 A
Red LED output indicator
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
CRM-81J by type
CRM-83J by type
Technical parameters
UNI
230
Functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Consumption (apparent/loss):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Control
Consumption of input:
Load between S-A2:
Control terminals:
Glow tubes connetions:
Max. amount of glow lamps
connected to controlling input:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Power of control input:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Operating position:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size(mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
CRM-81J
CRM-83J
ZR - delay ON / ZN - delay OFF/ BL- cycler 1:1
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.3 W
AC max. 12 VA / 1.9 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 h (in 6 alternate)
potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01% / 0C, at =20 0C
Symbol
Connection
CRM-81J
Un
16
A1
18
A1
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI), AC 0.53 VA (AC 230 V)
Yes (UNI), Yes (AC 230 V)
A1-S
Yes
UNI - glow lamps cannot connected/NO
230 V - max.10 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230 AC)
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
max. 150 ms
26
15
A2
S A2
15
36
25
Un
-
+
38
-
+
S A2
A1
S A2
35
25 26 28
16
+
15 16 18
18
15 16 18
A1
Un
S A2
15
Example of an order
CRM-81J/230, ZR10s
1x changeover contact, voltage AC 230 V, function: delay ON, time 1 - 10 s
CRM-83J/UNI, BL1h
3x changeover contact, voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V, function: cycler begin with impulse,
time 6 - 60 min
Functions
ZR - Delay ON
BL - Cycler 1:1
ZN - Delay OFF
Note: the function ZR and ZN is controlled by supply voltage and control input ie. when it comes to
failure and refreshing the supply voltage, the relay automatically makes one cycle.
Time range
10 s
1 min
10 min
1 hr
10 hrs
min
0.1 s
1s
6s
1 min
6 min
1 hr
max
1s
10 s
60 s
10 min
60 min
10 hrs
Description
Supply terminals
A1
S A2
Control input “S”
Output indication
Supply indication
Time setting
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
15
10
28
35 36 38
S 1s
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output)
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP20 terminals
any
III.
2
solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
(UNI) - 86 g, (230) - 82 g
(UNI) - 62 g, (230) - 60 g
18
A1
load
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 3x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
8 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
10 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
16
16
18
Output contact
Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO
!
„True OFF“ relay - relay timing without supply voltage
!
Sample of use: back-up source for Delay OFF in case of voltage failure (e.g. emergency lighting,
emergency respirator, or protection of el. controlled doors - in case of fire)
!
2 time functions adjustable by rotary switch:
a - Delayed return after disconnecting of supply
e - Delayed start
!
Time range (adjustable by rotary switch and fine setting by potentiometer): 0.1 s - 10 min
!
Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V
!
Output contact: 2x changeover/DPDT 8 A
!
Output status indicated by red LED (only in case of supply voltage connection)
!
Clamp terminals
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
CRM-82TO /UNI: 8595188137614
Symbol
Technical parameters
CRM-82TO
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Operating position:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
a - On Delay (Power On)/ e - Off Delay (S Break)
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 min
potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
2x changeover/SPDT (AgNi/ Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC
10 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
Connection
Un
A1
A2
16
18
26
15
28
A1
A2
16
26
18
28
15
25
25
Description
Supply terminals
A1
Output contact
A2
16
26
Output indication
CRM- 82TO
Supply indication
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output)
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
any
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 ( AWG 12 )
with sleeve max. 2x1.5 or 1x2.5 ( AWG 12 )
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
93 g (3.3 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Rough time setting
Fine time setting
FUNC
e
28
18
15
25
Function setting
a
Output contact
Output contact
Function
a - Delay OFF (S break) the power supply
is switched off (min. time is 0.5 s)
e - Off Delay (S break)
U
t
U
t
t
11
Doublestage delay unit SJR-2
! For gradual switching of heavy powers (e.g. el.heating), prevents current strokes in the main
! Function:
2x Delay ON (2 time relays in one)
! Time scale 0.1s - 10 days divided into 10 time ranges:
0.1s - 1s / 1s - 10s / 0.1min - 1min / 1min - 10min / 0.1h - 1h / 1h - 10hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day / 1 day - 10 days / ON / OFF
! Times t1 and t2 are independantly adjustable
! t1 and t2 are switched on after supply voltage connection
! Rought time setting via rotary switch
! Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 - 240 V
! Output contact: 2 x changeover /DPDT 16 A
! Output indication: multifunction red LED, flashing at certain states
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
SJR-2 /230V: 8595188116015
SJR-2 /UNI: 8595188117401
Symbol
SJR-2
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Power input (apparent/loss):
Supplyvoltagetolerance:
Supplyindication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
2x delay ON
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.3 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 days
rotaty switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
230
UNI
Technical parameters
Connection
Function
Un
A1
A1
16
18
26
A2
28
U
t1
15-18
t2
25-28
25 26 28
A2
15
25
15 16 18
Description
2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
multifunction red LED
3x107
0.7x105
max. 150 ms
Supply voltage terminals
A1
A2
Output indication
Supply voltage indication
U
Rought time setting t1
t1
Fine time setting t1
15-18
25-28
Rought time setting t2
t2
LED
Fine time setting t2
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
UNI - 88 g (3.1 oz.), 230 - 83 g (2.9 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
25
15
16
26
28
Output contact
18
Output contact
Time ranges
m
10
1
h
1 10
10
S1
m
10
1
10
S1
12
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
m
0.1 - 1 s
10
1
1 - 10 hrs
h
1 10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
ON
OFF
10
1
10
S1
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
m
1 - 10 s
10
1
0.1 - 1 day
h
1 10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
ON
OFF
10
1
10
S1
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
m
0.1 - 1 min
1 - 10 days
h
1 10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
ON
OFF
10
1
10
1
10
S1
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
m
1 - 10 min
only ON
h
1 10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
ON
OFF
10
1
10
1
10
S1
1 d
10
0.1 - 1 h
ON
OFF
h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
only OFF
Delay ON star/delta CRM-2T
!
It serves for delay ON of motors star/delta
!
Time t1 (star) - time scale 0.1 s - 100 days devided into 10 time ranges
- rough time setting by rotary switch
!
Time t2 (delay) between / :
- time scale 0.1 s - 1 s
- fine time setting by potentiometer
EAN code
CRM-2T /230V: 8595188112291
CRM-2T /UNI: 8595188112437
Technical parameters
Voltage range: AC 230 V, AC/DC 12 - 240 V
!
Output contact: 2x changeover/ DPDT 16A
!
Output indication: multifunction red LED
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol
CRM-2T
UNI
2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
multifunction red LED
3x107
0.7x105
max. 150 ms
A2
28
25
Connection CRM-2T
Start up of motor( - )
start of a motor
S1
S3
auxiliary voltage
( )
( )
(motor)
S2
A1
A2
L1
CRM-2T
L2
25 26 28
15 16 18
( )
( )
L3
S1
(motor)
S2
S3
Description
Supply terminals
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
max.1x 2.5, 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
84 g (3 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Function
26
15
A1
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
18
16
A1
1
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V/AC 50 - 60 Hz
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.9 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
t1: 0.1 s - 100 days, t2: 0.1 s-1 s
potentiometer
5% - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
230
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Supply indication:
Time scale:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (resistive):
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Terminal wire capacity:
!
A2
Output indication
multifunction red
Supply indication
Rought time setting t1
Fine time setting t1
U
15-18
25-28
LED
t1
t2
230 V
LED
Fine time setting t2
24-480V
25
15
16
26
28
Output contact
18
Output contact
Time ranges t1:
m
Delay ON star / delta
10
1
10
S1
U
15-18
25-28
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
0.1 - 1 s
t1
t2
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
1 - 10 s
1 d
10
30
100
1 - 10 hrs
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
0.1 - 1 min
1 d
10
30
100
0.1 - 1 day
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
1 - 10 days
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
1 - 10 min
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
3 - 30 days
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
0.1 - 1 h
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
10 - 100 days
13
Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H
Cycler with independent adjustable switch ON/OFF
Used for regular room ventilation, cyclic dehumidification, light control, circulating pumps, noon signs, etc.
! 2 time functions:
1) Cycler beginning with pulse
2) Cycler beginning with pause
! Function choice is done by an external jumper of terminals S-A1
! Time scale 0.1 s - 100 days devided into 10 time ranges:
(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 h / 1 hrs - 10 hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day /1 day - 10 days /
3 days - 30 days / 10 days - 100 days)
! Rough time setting via rotary switch
! Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 - 240 V
! Output contact: 1x changeover/SPDT 16 A
! Output indication: multifunction red LED
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
!
EAN code
CRM-2H /230V: 8595188124201
CRM-2H /UNI: 8595188113007
Symbol
CRM-2H
Technical parameters
2 (function is chosen by connecting S-A1)
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.3 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 100 days
rotary switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
230
UNI
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Power input (apparent input/loss input):
Operating range:
Supply indication:
Time scale:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (resistive):
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Terminal wire capacity:
Dimensions:
Weight
Standards:
Connection
Cycler beginning with pulse
Cycler beginning with pause
(jumper S-A1)
Un
16
A1
Un
18
-
+
S 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
multifunction red LED
3x107
0.7x105
max. 150 ms
-
+
A1 S A2
A1 S A2
15 16 18
15 16 18
15
A2
Function
Cycler beginning with pulse
Cycler beginning with pause
U
U
S
15-18
t1
t2
t1
t2
15-18
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t2
Description
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
UNI - 65 g (2.3 oz.), 230 - 61 g (2.2 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Supply terminals
A1
S A2
Terminal for function selection
Supply indication
Output indication
multifunction LED
Rought time setting -IMPULSE
U
15-18
Fine time setting-IMPULSE
t1
t2
t1
LED
Rough time setting -PAUSE
Fine time setting -PAUSE
Time ranges
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
0.1 - 1 s
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
1 - 10 s
1 d
10
1 - 10 hrs
14
h
1 10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
m
10
1
10
S1
0.1 - 1 min
1 d
10
30
100
0.1 - 1 day
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
1 - 10 days
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
10
1
10
S1
1 - 10 min
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
3 - 30 days
h
1 10
m
1 d
10
30
100
0.1 - 1 h
m
10
1
10
S1
h
1 10
1 d
10
30
100
10 - 100 days
15
16
18
Output contact
Multifunction time relay CRM-61
!
Multifunction time relay (6 functions and 6 time ranges), economic version of CRM-91H
!
To be used for electrical appliances, control of lights, heating, motors, pumps, fans, etc.
!
6 functions: - 3 time functions controlled by supply voltage
- 3 time functions controlled by control input
!
Easy to use function and time-range setting by rotary switches
!
Time scale 0.1 s - 10 hrs divided into 6 range:
(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 h rs/ 1 hrs - 10 hrs )
EAN code
CRM-61 /UNI: 8595188120210
!
Universal Voltage range: AC 24-240 V, DC 24 V
!
Output contact: 1x changeover 8 A/ SPDT
!
Multifunction red LED output indicator flashes or shines depending of status
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Technical parameters
CRM-61
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Supply voltage :
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Controlling
Control. voltage:
Control power input:
Load between S-A2:
Glow-tubes:
Control. terminals:
Max. capacity of cable control:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
6
A1 - A2
AC 24 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) a DC 24 V
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 h
rotary switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % /°C, at = 20°C
Symbol
Connection
Un
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A/ AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
multifunction red LED 8 A / AC1
1x107
1x105
UNI
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W
Yes
No
A1-S
0.1μF
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
max. 120 ms
18
A2
A1
S S 15
A2
16
15
18
Function
a
b
d
e
k
i
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
max. 2x 2.5, max. 1x4 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5, 2x1.5 mm2 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
69 g (2.4 oz. )
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
16
A1
U
t
Delay ON after energization
t
U
t
Delay OFF after energization
t
U
t
t
t
t
t
Cycler beginning with impulse after energization
t
S
t
Delay OFF after de-energization, instant make of output
t
Impulse relay with delay, press its delay ON and
next press its delay OFF output if it happens before
expiration time
<t
S
t
S
t
Delay ON after make of the switch till break
t
Description
Supply terminals
Control input „S“
A2
A1
S
Supply indication
Output indication
CRM-61
Rought time setting
Fine time setting
Function setting
16
15
18
Output contact
15
Multifunction time relay CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S
Multifunction time relay can be used for electrical appliances, control of lights, heating, motors, pumps and fans (10
functions, 10 time ranges, multi-voltage, 16Amps or 3x8Amps contacts)
! Fulfills all requirements for time relays
! 10 functions: - 5 time functions controlled by supply voltage
- 4 time functions controlled by control input
- 1 function of latching relay
! Comfortable and well-arranged function and time-range setting by rotary switches
! Time scale 0.1 s - 10 days divided into 10 ranges: (0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 hrs /
1 hrs - 10 hrs /0.1 day - 1 day/ 1 day - 10 days / only ON / only OFF)
! CRM-91H, CRM-93H: Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V or AC 230 V,
Output contact: CRM-91H: 1x changeover/SPDT 16 A; CRM-93H: 3 x changeover/SPDT 8 A
! CRM-9S: Universal supply voltage AC 12 - 240 V AC 12 - 240 V, absolutely noise-less switching
1x static contactless output (triac) 01.7 A (60A/<10 ms), switches potential A1
! Multifunction red LED output indicator flashes or shines depending of status
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
EAN code
CRM-91 /230V:
CRM-91 /UNI:
CRM-93H /230V:
CRM-93H /UNI:
CRM-9S /UNI:
8595188112444
8595188112420
8595188112789
8595188112468
8595188116008
CCA
CRM-91H
Technical parameters
16
CRM-93H
CRM-9S
UNI
10
A1 - A2
230
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Consumption (apparent/loss):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Voltage drop on switch:
Load on B1 terminal:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Controlling
Power on control input:
Load between S-A2:
Control. terminals:
Glow tubes connections:
Max. amount of glow lamps
connected to controlling input:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Symbol
Connection
CRM-91H
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12VA / 1.9W
AC max. 12VA / 1.3W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 days
rotary switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
AC 12-240V (50-60Hz)
AC max. 0.35VA
x
x
Un
-
+
16
A1
S A1
18
S A2
15
A2
15 16 18
Un
CRM-93H
-
+
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 3x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8A / AC1
16A / AC1
2000VA / AC1, 192W / DC
4000VA / AC1, 384W / DC
10A / <3s
30A / <3s
250V AC1 / 24V DC
500mA
x
x
multifunction red LED
3x107
0.7x105
1x static contactless output (triac)
0.7A
x
60A / <10ms
x
x
max. 0.9 V at I max.
Yes / I max. 0.7 A
> 108
>108
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI), AC 0.53 VA (AC 230 V), AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA (AC 12 - 240 V)
YES
A1-S
NO
YES
UNI - glow lamps cannot connected/NO
230 V - max.20 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
max. 150 ms
glow lamps cannot connected/NO
x
max. 250 ms
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4kV(supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
(UNI) - 64 g (2.26 oz.); (230) - 62 g (2.2 oz.) (UNI) - 89 g (3.1 oz.); (230) - 87 g (3 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
A1
16
A1
18 26
28 36
S A2
38
35 36 38
25 26 28
S 15
A2
35
25
15 16 18
Possibility to connect load onto controlling input
It is possible to connect the load (e.g.: contactor) between terminals
S-A2, without any interruption of correct relay function.
16
+
Un
18
A1
S A2
load
15
Un
x
51 g (1.8 oz.)
CRM-9S
A1 /B1
S 18
18
A1 S A2
A2
B1 18 18
Multifunction time relay CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S
Function
On Delay (Power On)
Single Shot
When the input voltage U is applied, timing delay t begins. Relay contacts R change state after time delay is complete. Contacts R return to
their shelf state when input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not
used in this function.
a
Upon application of input voltage U, the relay is ready to accept trigger signal
S. Upon application of the trigger signal S, the relay contacts R transfer and
the preset time t begins. During time-out, the trigger signal S is ignored. The
relay resets by applying the trigger switch S when the relay is not energized.
U
t
t
S
f
t
t
Single Shot Trailing Edge (Non-Retriggerable)
Interval (Power On)
When input voltage U is applied, relay contacts R change state immediately
and timing cycle begins. When time delay is complete, contacts return to
shelf state. When input voltage U is removed, contacts will also return to
their shelfstate. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
b
Upon application of input voltage U, the relay is ready to accept trigger signal
S. Upon application of the trigger signal S, the relay contacts R transfer and the
preset time t begins. At the end of the preset time t, the relay contacts R return to
their normal condition unless the trigger switch S is opened and closed prior to
time out t (before preset time elapses). Continuous cycling of the trigger switch
S at a rate faster than the preset time will cause the relay contacts R to remain
closed. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state
U
t
t
Repeat Cycle (Starting Off )
When input voltage U is applied, time delay t begins. When time delay
t is complete, relay contacts R change state for time delay t. This cycle
will repeat until input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used
in this function.
c
On/Off Delay
U
t
t
t
t
t
Input voltage U must be applied continuously. When trigger switch S is
closed, time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, relay contacts
R change state and remain transferred until trigger switch S is opened.
If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state.
t
Repeat Cycle (Starting On)
When input voltage U is applied, relay contacts R change state immediately and time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, contacts
return to their shelf state for time delay t. This cycle will repeat until input
voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
d
g
h
Latching relay
U
t
t
t
t
t
Input voltage U must be applied continuously. Output changes state
with every trigger switch S closure. If input voltage U is removed, relay
contacts R return to their shelf state.
t
Off Delay (S Break)
S
t
t
S
t
i
S
j
U
t
t
t
Pulse generator
Input voltage U must be applied continuously. When trigger switch S is closed, relay contacts R change state. When trigger switch S is opened, delay
t begins. When delay t is complete, contacts R return to their shelf state.
If trigger switch S is closed before time delay t is complete, then time is
reset. When trigger switch S is opened, the delay begins again, and relay
contacts R remain in their energized state. If input voltage U is removed,
relay contacts R return to their shelf state.
e
Upon application of input voltage U, a single output pulse of 0.5 seconds
is delivered to relay after time delay t. Power must be removed and reapplied to repeat pulse. Trigger switch is not used in this function.
S
t
t
t
t
PULSE
PULSE
PULSE=0.5 s
PULSE=0.5
Time ranges
m
10
1
h
1 10
10
S1
m
10
1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
0.1 - 1s
ON
OFF
10
1
1 - 10 hrs
ON
OFF
h
1 10
m
1 d
10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
h
1 10
10
1
1 - 10 s
10
S1
ON
OFF
10
1
0.1 - 1 min
ON
OFF
10
1
0.1 - 1 day
m
1 d
10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
h
1 10
h
1 10
10
S1
10
1
1 - 10 days
ON
OFF
m
1 d
10
10
S1
m
1 d
10
h
1 10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
10
1
1 - 10 min
10
S1
ON
OFF
10
S1
m
1 d
10
10
1
only ON
h
1 10
10
S1
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
0.1 - 1 h
1 d
10
ON
OFF
only OFF
Description
Supply terminals
A1
S A2
Control input “S”
Supply indication
Output indication-multifunction LED
Examples of signaling
Rought time setting
Function: a U
15-18
LED
Fine time setting
Function setting
Function:e U
S
15-18
LED
15
16
t
t
18
Output contact
Notes
1) CRM-93H doesn’t allow switching of different phases or 3-phase voltages.
2) When mounting into steal-plated switchboards, it is necessary keep safety distance of min. 3 mm from terminal’s screws 35-36-38 and 25-26-28 towards the shutter of a switchboard.
17
Time relay with external potentiometer CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE
! Control by external control unit - potentiometer (can be for example on switch board doors or in panel)
! CRM-91HE: multifunction time relays
10 functions - 5 time functions controlled by supply voltage
- 4 time functions controlled by control input
- 1 function of latching relay
time scale 0.1 s - 10 days divided into 10 ranges
(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 hrs / 1 hrs - 10 hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day /
1 day - 10 days / only ON / only OFF)
! CRM-2HE: asymmetric cycler
2 time functions - cycler beginning with pulse
- cycler beginning with gap
function selected via external wired link on control input S-A1
! CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE :
! Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V
! Output contact: 1x changeover 16 A/SPDT
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
! Possible to connect external potentiometer - max. distance 10m (32.8 ft.) from relay
EAN code
CRM-91HE /UNI + potentiometr: 8595188142052
CRM-2HE /UNI + potetiometr: 8595188142069
Potentiometr for CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE : 8595188125215
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Controlling
Control. voltage:
Consumption of input:
Load between S-A2:
Glow-tubes:
Control. terminals:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
CRM-91HE
CRM-2HE
10
2
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 days
0.1 s - 100 days
rotary switch, external potentiometer
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % /°C, at = 20°C
Symbol
Potentiometer to CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE
CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE
A1
16
18
B1
B1
B2
B3
B4*
external control unit
A2
15
B2 B3
(B4)*
*B4 only for CRM-2HE
Connection
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
multifunction red LED
3x107
0.7x105
UNI
AC 0.025-0.2VA / DC 0.1-0.7W
Yes
No
A1-S
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
max. 150 ms
Description
CRM-91HE
Control input “S”
Supply voltage indication
Rought time setting
A1
S A2
A1
Supply terminals
Intup for external time control
Output indication
-multifunction LED
A2
B1
B2
B3
Example of signaling
U
15-18
LED
Function setting
U
S
15-18
LED
B1 B3 B2
h
t
t
Free position
16
15
18
Output contact
15 16 18
Supply terminals
Input for external
time contol - IMPULSE
CRM-2HE
A1
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
77 g (2.7 oz.)
78 g (2.8 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
S Setting of
IMPULSE
A1
S A2
B1 B3 B2
Control input “S”
Supply voltage indication
Rought time
setting-IMPULSE
Rought time
setting-PAUSE
S A2
B1
B2
B4
B1 B4 B2
Setting of
PAUSE
15 16 18
Output indication-multifunction LED
CRM-2HE
B1
15
16
B4
B2
Input for external
control time-PAUSE
18
Output contact
Potentiometer
Function
Functions of CRM-91HE are identical with CRM-91H.
Functions of CRM-2HE are identical with CRM-2H.
18
Potentiometer:
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Weight:
Dimensions:
47 kΩ, linear
IP 65 from front side/ IP 20 from back side
1.5 mm2 with sleeve / without sleeve max.2.5 (AWG 12)
15 g (0.5 oz.)
see page Accessories
Plug-in time relay PRM-91H, PRM-92H, PRM-2H
!
!
EAN code
PRM-91H-8 /UNI
PRM-91H-11 /UNI
PRM-92H /UNI
PRM-2H /UNI
8595188135511
8595188111638
8595188111096
8595188111645
Technical Parameters
Number of functions:
Supply:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Control
Control. voltage:
Control power input:
Load between 5-10:
Glow-tubes:
Control terminals:
Max. capacity of cable control:
-without connected glow-lamps:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
Multifunction time relay PRM-91H
11 and 8 pin type
10 time functions, time scale from 0.1 s to 10 days is divided into 10 ranges
output contact 1x 16 A / 4000VA, 250V AC1
!
Multifunction time relay PRM-92H
11 pin type
10 time functions, time scale from 0,1 s to 10 days is divided into 10 ranges
output contact 2x 8 A / 2000VA, 250V AC1
!
Asymmetric cycler PRM-2H
11 pin type
2 time functions, time scale from 0,1 s to 100 days is divided into 10 ranges
output contact 2x 8 A / 2000VA, 250V AC1
!
Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V
Output indication: multif. red LED, flashing at certain states
PLUG-IN relays
!
!
PRM-91H/8
pins 2 and 7
PRM-91H/11
PRM-92H
Multifunction time relays are equivalents by module types of relay, designed to standardized plump 11 or 8pin socket
Pin type enables easy changing, replacement older type of relays (pin-compatible) or easy changing auxiliary relay for time relays
PRM-2H
10
2
pins 2 and 10
pins 2 and 10
pins 2 and 10
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.1 s - 10 days
0.1 s - 100 days
rotaty switch and potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
Symbol
LEGEND TO DESCRIPTION
polarity- outputs/number on module/on socket
PRM-91H
PRM-92H, PRM-2H
11 pin
8 pin
4
A1/2/+
3
A1/2/+
1
5 A2/10/-
5
A1/2/+
3
4
1
A2/7/-
5 A2/10/-
3
4
1
8
9
11
Recommended socket for DIN rail
Connection
PRM-92H/11
PRM-91H/8
ES-11A
ES-8
5
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
8A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC
30 A / <3 s 10 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
multifunction red LED
3x107
0.7x105
6
5
7
4
4
8
3
9
2
10
Un
-A2
7
2
11
1
+ A1
6
3
1
+ A1
8
Un
-A2
8 pin
11 pin
Description / Connection
Supply indication
Output indication
in the supply voltage range
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI)
Yes
No
2-5
d
Rought time setting
Fine time setting
Function setting
0.1μF
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
max. 150 ms
Supply indication
Functions PRM-2H
57 g (2.01 oz.)
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
2.5 kV
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
50 x 38 x 53 mm (2˝ x 1.5˝ x 2.1˝)
57 g (2.01 oz.)
58 g (2.05 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Time ranges of PRM-91H, PRM-92H are identical with CRM-91H.
Time ranges of PRM-2H are identical with CRM-2H. See page 17.
Choice Function in PRM-2H is done
by connecting terminals 2 and 5
Cycler beginning with pulse
U
2
5
Output indication
Rought time setting IMPULSe
Fine time setting IMPULSe
t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2
Rought time setting PAUSE
Cycler beginning with pause
Fine time setting PAUSE
R
U
58 g (2.05 oz.)
2
5
S
R
t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1
Functions of PRM-91H, PRM-92H are identical with CRM-91H. See page 17.
19
Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B
!
Multifunction programmable digital relay with 4 digit red LED display
!
Control and setting is done by 3 buttons, user-friendly menu, absolute accuracy in timer setting, time countdown on a
display galvanically separated START and STOP control inputs with UNI supply
EAN code
PDR-2A /230V:
PDR-2A /UNI:
PDR-2B /230V:
PDR-2B /UNI:
8594030333037
8594030333044
8594030333051
8594030333068
PDR-2/A
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Consumption (apparent/loss):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Time ranges:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical strength (AC1):
Control
Control input Burden:
Glow lamps:
Control. impulse length:
Reset time:
Display - colour:
Number and height of digits:
Luminace:
Light wavelength:
Brightness setting:
Memory - memory locations:
Data stored for:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
16
20
230
UNI
Technical parameters
!
Thanks to its complexity it is possible to program also more demanding time functions by using 2 independent times
!
2 independent times, with combination of 2 inputs and 2 outputs
!
PDR-2/A: 16 functions, choice of functions of the other relay, 30 memory places for most frequently used times
!
PDR-2/B: 10 functions, 1 output of 10 functions can be assigned to each relay = 2 relays in one device
!
2 independent times in range: 0.01 s - 100 hrs
!
Supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V or AC 230 V
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
PDR-2/B
10
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.5 - 2.5 VA / DC 0.4 - 2.5 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 16 VA / 2.5 W
-15 %; +10 %
0.01 s - 100 h
0.2 % - set value stability
0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
AC 0.01 - 0.25 VA (UNI), AC 0.25 VA (AC 230 V)
No
min. 1 ms / max. unlimited
max. 200 ms
red
4 positions with separating colon, height 10 mm (0.39˝)
2200 - 3800 ucd
635 nm
range 20 - 100 % in 10 steps adjustable
30 (PDR-2/A) / 20 (PDR-2/B) for times ranges + service function
min. 10 years
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
(UNI) - 143 g( 5 oz. ), (230) - 134 g( 4.7 oz. )
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Symbol
16
A1
PDR-2
18
26
28
IN1
IN1
IN2
IN2
15
A2
25
Description
Control inputs
Supply terminals
Indication of
operating times
(t1, t2)
Indication of time
(h, m, s)
Indication of
output status
Controlling buttons
26
25
28
18
15
16
Output 2
Output 1
Time data
Time range:
Minimal time step:
Time deviation:
Setting error:
Setting, reset accuracy:
Digital places:
0.01 s - 99 h 59 min 59 sec 99 ss
0.01 s
0.01 % of set value
0%
100 %
selected via program
Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B
Connection
PDR-2/A
START input
for output 1
(t1)
PDR-2/B
START
input
Un
Un
STOP
input
A1 A2 IN1 IN1 IN2 IN2
A1 A2 IN1 IN1 IN2 IN2
PDR-2
t1
PDR-2
h
t2
m
s
t1
out 1
mode
START input
for output 2 (t2)
stop
h
t2
m
s
out 1
out 2
start
mode
16 15 18 28 25 26
stop
start
out 2
16 15 18 28 25 26
output 1
output 2
16A AC1/250V 16A AC1/250V
output 1
output 2
16A AC1/250V 16A AC1/250V
Function
Functions for PDR-2/A and PDR-2/B
1. Delay ON
2. Delay OFF
3. Delay ON
after break of control. contact
4. Delay ON
at make of control. contact
5. Delay OFF
after break of output contact
6. Delay OFF
at make of output contact
Functions for PDR-2/A
A1-A2
15-18
11. Cycler beginning with impulse with A1-A2
variable interval
15-18
t1
A1-A2
15-18
12. Cycler beginning with pause with A1-A2
variable interval
15-18
t1
A1-A2
START
15-18
13. Generator of impulse
t1
14. Changeover star/delta
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
15A. Shift of pulse by 2 times
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
15B. Shift of impulse by 2 times
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
7. Delay OFF at break
A1-A2
of control. contact with instant output
START
15-18
8. Delay OFF at make
of control. contact with delayed
output
9. Cycler beginning with impulse
10. Cycler beginning with pause
16A. Extended impulse by 2 times
t1
16B. Extended impulse by 2 times
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
A1-A2
15-18
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
A1-A2
15-18
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
A1-A2
START
15-18
t2
t1
A1-A2
15-18
25-28
t1
t2
t1
t2
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
t2
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
t2
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
t2
A1-A2
START
15-18
t1
t2
Recommendation:
PDR-2/B is replacing by 2 simple time relays = 2 in one.
21
Digital time switch clock SHT
Output
Time programm
This time switch clock SHT is used to control various appliances in
1 channel 2 channel day week month
real time; daily, weekly, monthly and annual mode
! Switching: according the program (AUTO)/constantly manually,
manually to next program change/random (CUBE)
! „Holiday program” option to choose an interval when the device
doesn´t switch according to the standard program, but will be block during that time
! Automatic conversion summer / winter time
! Sealable cover of front panel, easy controlling via 4 buttons
! 100 memory places, clear LCD display, min. interval 1 s
! Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12-240 V
! Cyclic output
! Pulse output
! SHT-1, SHT-3: one channel version, 2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamp terminals
! SHT-1/2, SHT-3/2: two channel version, 2-MODULE, an individual program can be run on each channel
!
EAN code
SHT-1 /230V:
SHT-1 /UNI:
SHT-1/2 /230V:
SHT-1/2 /UNI:
SHT-3 /230V:
SHT-3 /UNI:
SHT-3/2 /230V:
SHT-3/2 /UNI:
8595188130424
8595188130431
8595188130400
8595188130417
8595188136761
8595188136754
8595188129015
8595188129046
Technical parameters
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
UNI
230
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Back-up supply:
Summer/winter time:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time circuit
Power back-up:
Accuracy:
Minimum interval:
Data stored for:
Cyclic output:
Pulse output:
Program circuit
Number of memory places:
Program (SHT-1; SHT-1/2):
Program (SHT-3; SHT-3/2):
Data readout:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Polution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
SHT-1, SHT- 3
SHT-1/2, SHT-3/2
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.5 - 2 VA / DC 0.4 - 2 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 14 VA / 2 W
-15 %; +10 %
yes
automatic
Symbol
SHT-1
SHT-3
16
A1
SHT-1/2
SHT-3/2
18
16
A1
18
15
A2
15
A2
26
28
25
Connection
SHT-1
SHT-3
SHT-1/2
SHT-3/2
A1 16 15 18
A1 16 15 18
1x changeover/SPDT (AgSnO2) 2x changeover/DPDT (AgSnO2)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
3x107
0.7x105
up to 3 years
max. ±1s/ day at 23 °C (73.4 °F)
1 min
min. 10 years
1-99s
1-99s
100
daily, weekly
daily, weekly, monthly, yearly (up to year 2095)
LCD display, with back light
Un
Un
A2
A2 26 25 28
Description of displayed elements on the screen
mode choice output switching
indication (1st channel)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Auto Prog Man
shows the day in the week
indication of the pulse/ cyclic output
indication (2nd channel)
AM/PM
shows summer / winter mode
indication of closed output
7
output ON/OFF
random switching mode
0
6
12
18
24
manual switching mode
channel 1(bargraph)
channel 2 (bargraph)
Description
Channel 1
(16-15-18)
Supply terminals (A1)
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 10 clips, IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x1.4˝ x 2.5˝)
A1
18
15
16
7
Auto
Transparent cover
Display
12
6
0
SHT-3
Reset
MAN2
OK
MAN 1
ESC
PRG
+
RESET
Controlling buttons
Sealing spot
A2
26
25
28
(UNI) - 130 g (4.6 oz.), (230) - 110 g(3.9 oz.) (UNI)- 143 g 143 g (5 oz.), (230) - 125 g (4.4 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Supply terminals (A2)
22
year
Channel 2(26-25-28)
only for SHT-1/2, SHT-3 /2
Digital time switch with an astronomical program SHT-4
Used for controlling the lighting (billboards, advertisements, shop windows, etc.) with no light sensor required
Function:
- by entering the geographic coordinates, the lighting can be switched on/off by sunrise and sunset
! the preset coordinates for European cities, with optional manual adjustment of the geographical coordinates
! during programming, 120 minutes may be added to the time of sunrise and sunset
! selection of ON/OFF functions at sunrise or sunset
- astro-clock with adjustable interruption
- operating hours counter for each channel
- timer - switching on the basis of real-time
! Two-channel design, where each channel is programmable independently of the other
! Automatic switching between winter and summer time
! Sealable transparent cover on the front panel
! Data and time backup using the battery
! Battery life - up to 3 years
! Easy replacement of the backup battery through the plug-in module, no disassembling is required
! Supply voltage: AC 230 V
! 2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
!
EAN code
SHT-4 8595188144759
Technical parameters
Power supply terminals:
Supply voltage:
Input power:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Real time back-up:
Transition to summer / winter time:
Output
Number of contacts:
Rated current:
Switching power:
Peak current:
Switching voltage:
Min. DC switching power:
Mechanical service life:
Electrical service life (AC1):
Timing circuit
Real time reserve:
Accuracy of operation:
Minimum triggering interval:
Program data storage period:
Programming circuit
Number of memory locations:
Program:
Data display:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Polution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
SHT-4
Symbol
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 14 VA / 2 W
-15 %; +10 %
yes
automatic
2 x changeover (AgSnO2)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
> 3x107
> 0.7x105
up to 3 years
max. ±1 s per day, at 23°C
1 minute
10 years at minimum
100
daily, yearly (until 2099)
LCD display, backlight
Wiring
A1
16
18
26
A1 16 15 18
28
Un
A2
15
25
A2 26 25 28
Description of items displayed on the screen
Displaying the day in week
Status indication (1st channel)
Status indication (2nd channel)
Auto + t
Prog
Operation mode indication
Man
Displays 12/24 hour mode
Indication of the switching
program
Date display of setup menu
Time display
Control button PRG+
Reset
Control button MAN2 / ESC
SHT-4
Control button OK
Control button MAN1 / -
-20.. +55°C
-30.. +70 °C
4 kV (power supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 10 terminals, IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
max. 2x2.5, max. 1x4
with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 mm2
90 x 35.6 x 64 mm
133 g
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Device description
Output - Channel 1 (16-15-18)
Supply voltage terminal (A1)
A1
18
15
16
Auto
Backlight display
SHT-4
MAN 2
OK
MAN
Control buttons
ESC
PRG +
RESET
_
Lead-sealing point
Plug-in module
A2
26
25
28
Plug-in module for replacement
of the backup battery
With battery
Type of backup battery:
Without battery
Supply voltage terminal (A2)
Output - Channel 2 (26-25-28)
CR 2032 (3V)
23
The SHT-6 time switch with DCF managing
!
NEW
!
!
!
!
!
!
DCFR-1
!
!
!
!
!
Used for controlling appliances depending on real time, that is synchronized by a DCF 77 signal, thanks to the
automatic time settings (with DCF 77 signal) it eliminates inaccuracies and errors by time running
1 channel design with external DCF receiver
Automatic switching between winter/summer time
Sealable cover of the front panel
100 memory locations
Backlit LCD display
Switching according to the program: auto / manual / random / holiday program
Backing up data and time using the battery
Reserve battery for up to 3 years
Easy replacement for the backup battery with plugging module without detaching the device
Power supply: AC 230V
2-MODULE, mounting on DIN rail
Symbol
N
EAN code
SHT-6 8595188148382
DCFR-1 8595188148412
Technical parameters
Terminals Supply
Voltage Supply:
Tolerance of voltage supply:
Output
Number of contacts:
Rated current:
Switching capacity:
Peak current:
Max. switching voltage:
Minimum switching capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time circuit
Backup real. time:
Running accuracy:
Without DCF receiver
Minimum switching interval:
Data retention programs:
Program circuit
Number of memory locations:
Program:
Displayed data:
Other information
Working temperature:
Storage temperature:
Dielectric strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection:
Over voltage category:
Degree of pollution:
Cable size (mm2)
Dimension:
Weight:
Related standards
Connection
DCF
SHT-6
B1 B2 A1
16
A1 G B1 B2
18
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
-15 %; +10 %
DCFR-1
A2
1 x changeover (AgSnO2)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
> 3x107
> 0.7x105
15
A2 16 15 18
L
Description of the displayed elements on the screen
Displaying the day of the week
up to 3 years
max. ±1 s a day with 23°C
1 min
min. 10 years
100
daily, yearly ( till year 2099 )
LCD display with backlight
-10.. +55°C
-30.. +70 °C
4 kV (output supply)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP10 terminals, IP40 from the front panel
III.
2
max. 2x2.5, max. 1x4
with max. ferrule 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 mm2
90 x 35.6 x 64 mm
140 g
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Status indication ( 1st channel )
Status indication ( 2nd channel )
Auto + t
Prog
Indication of operating mode
Man
Displaying 12/24 h
Indication of the switching
Diplaying the set-up menu data
Displaying the time
Control button PRG / +
Reset
Control button MAN2 / ESC
SHT-6
Control button OK
Control button MAN1 / -
Description
Connecting the receiver DCFR-1
Terminal N
Backlit display
SHT-6
MAN 2
OK
MAN
RESET
Plug-in module
Control buttons
ESC
PRG +
_
Sealing place
Plug module for replacement
battery backup
With battery
Type of backup battery:
24
Without battery
CR 2032 (3V)
Terminal L
Output - channel (16-15-18)
DCFR-1 receiver DCF 77
Universal DCF module, which is designed for controlling the SHT-6 timer, and other devices.
Outdoor applications (IP65)
! Two-wire connection - not polarity sensitive!
! Length of connecting cable is up to 100 m
! Visual indication of proper function module
!
!
Technical parameters
DCFR-1
Connection:
Max. cross-connection conductors:
Max voltage on the wires:
Indication Function:
Other information
Storage temperature:
Protection:
Dimension:
Weight:
Operating position:
The reception area:
Connected to SHT-6
Working position - options
2 conductors
2.5 mm2
10 V
red LED
Income (input) direction
-30.. +70 °C
IP65
98 x 62 x 34 mm
110 g
perpendicular to the direction of reception
about 1500 km from Frankfurt / Main
LED
max. 100 m
25
Super-multifunction relay SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B
Multifunction relay designed for installation into a wiring box or under wall-switch in an existing electrical installation
Advantageous and fast solution for exchanging standard wall-switch for a switch controlled by time or for an impulse relay
controlled by a button
! More information about type and size of load for these products can be found on page 111
! SMR-K
! SMR-H
- 3-conductor connection, works without the connection
- 4-wire connection
of a neutral conductor.
- power output: 0 - 200 VA
- power output: 10-160 VA
- it can not be used for fluorescent lamp and energy saving
- for flawless function of the product is necessary the presence
bulb (capacitive load)
of a load R, L or C between input S and neutral wire
! SMR-B
- 4-wire connection
! SMR-T
- 10 functions
- 3-wire connection, works without the connection
- output contact 1x16A / 4000 VA, 250V AC1
of a neutral conductor
- enables switching of fluorescent lights and also energy
- power output: 10 - 160 VA
saving lights
- between input S and neutral wire is possible connect any
- suitable for switching loads greater than SMR-K, SMR-T,
load R, L, or C – that is not necessary (unlike SMR-K)
SMR-H, for example pulse relay, stair automatic switch,
switching of ladder radiators in bathrooms
- independent galvanically separated input AC/DC 5-250 V,
for example for control from a security system
!
!
SMR-K
SMR-T
SMR-H
EAN code
SMR-K /230V
SMR-T /230V
SMR-H /230V
SMR-B /230V
8595188145176
8595188129107
8595188129114
8595188135566
Technical parameters
SMR-K
SMR-T
SMR-H
SMR-B
Description
SMR-H
Exchangeable
fuse
Output indication
FUSE
5x20
Number of functions:
9
10
Connection:
3-wire, without neutral
4-wire, with neutral
Voltage range:
AC 230V / 50-60Hz
Power input (no operation/make):
0.8 / 3VA
max 1 / 1VA
Supply voltage tolerance:
-15%; +10%
Time ranges:
0.1 s - 10 days
Time setting:
via rotaty switch
Time deviation:
10 % - mechanical setting
Repeat accuracy:
2 % - set value stability
Temperature coefficient:
0.1 % / °C, at = 20 °C
Output
Number of contacts:
1 x triac
1x NO(AgSnO2)
Resistive load:
10 - 160 VA
0 - 200 VA
16A 125/250 V AC1
Inductive load:
10 - 100 VA
0 - 100 VA
8A 250 V AC (cos φ > 0.4)
Control
Control voltage:
AC 230 V
AC230V, UNI-5-250VAC/DC
Control current:
25μA
3 mA
Impulse length:
min. 50ms / max. unlimited
Glow tubes connetions:
x
Yes
Max. amount of glow lamps
230V - max. amount 50 pcs
connected to controlling input:
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
Other information
Operating temperature:
0..+50°C
Operating position:
any
Mounting:
free at connecting wires
Protection degree:
IP30 in standard conditions
Overvoltage cathegory:
III.
Pollution degree:
2
Fuse:
F 1A / 250V
x
Connection:
3x CY, Ø 0.75 mm2 (AWG 18)
4x sol. wir., Ø 0.75 mm2 (AWG 18)
2 x CY, Ø 0.75mm2 (AWG 18)
lenght 90mm (3.5˝)
lenght 90mm (3.5˝)
2 x CY, Ø 2.5 mm2 (AWG 10)
Glow-lamps in control button:
x
max.10
max.20
Dimensions:
49 x 49 x 13 mm (1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝)
49 x 49 x 21 mm (1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝)
Weight:
26 g (0.92 oz. )
26 g (0.92 oz. )
27 g (0.95 oz. )
53 g ( 1.9 oz.)
Standards:
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Rought time setting
Fine time setting
FUSE
5x20
SMR-B
Function setting
Output
Neutral (only in SMR-H)
Phase
Switch (button)
SMR-B
Galvanically separated control
input 5-250 V AC/DC
Rought
time setting
Function
setting
Fine time setting
Output indication
Neutral
Output
Phase
Switch (button)
Time ranges
m
10
1
h
1 10
10
S1
m
10
1
10
S1
26
0.1 - 1 s
m
1 d
10
10
1
10
S1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
1 - 10 hrs
m
10
1
10
S1
1 - 10 s
m
1 d
10
10
1
10
S1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
0.1 - 1 day
m
10
1
10
S1
0.1 - 1 min
m
1 d
10
10
1
10
S1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
1 - 10 days
m
10
1
10
S1
1 - 10 min
m
1 d
10
10
1
10
S1
ON
OFF
h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
only ON
m
10
1
10
S1
0.1 - 1 hrs
1 d
10
ON
OFF
h
1 10
1 d
10
ON
OFF
only OFF
Super-multifunction relay SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B
Function
Function a - delay OFF on entrering edge
output times when it is switched. Each following pressing (max. 5x)
increases time. Long pressing swithes output off
S
V tt
Function b - delay OFF on downward edge
output times after button is swithed off, switches immediately
S
V
Function c - delay OFF on downward edge
after switching off output switches on and times.
S
V
Function d - cycler - flasher impulsem
output cycles in regular interval, cycler starts with an impulse
Function e - puls shift
delay on after the switch is switched on and delay on after it is
switched off
Function f - delay ON
delay on after switch is switched on until it is switched off
S
V t
Function g - impulse relay
switches on by a press, another pressing switches the output off. The
length of pressing doesn’t matter, it is possible to set reaction delay by a
potentiometer and thus eliminate rebound of a button
S
V t
t
Function h - impulse relay with delay
one press switches on, another one switches the output off in case it is
done before the end of timing
S
V
t
S
V t t t t tt
Function i - cycler starting with pause
output cycles in regular intervals, cycler starts with a pause
S
V t t t t t t
S
V t
Function j* - cycler starting with gap
delay ON until switched off until it is de-energized or a switch is
pressed again.
Note.: *- Function j is valid only for SMR-B
S
V t
>2 s
t2xt t
t
t
t
tt t
t
t
Connection SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B
N
L
V
L
V
S
SMR-K
Typical wiring of SMR-K, SMR-T
- timer for lamp unit
L
S
V
L
S
N
SMR-T
SMR-H
Fan control depending on
the SMR-K , SMR-T lighting
Typical wiring of SMR-H
- timer for lamp unit
V
L
S
N
N
S
L
V
SMR-
SMR-H
Fan control depending on
the lighting
Input for external
control voltage AC/
DC 5-250 V
Note: The products of the SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H are not intended for switching capacity load (energy saving light bulbs and LED lights with capacity power etc.), these products are only intended for switching
resistive and inductive loads (incandescent bulbs, fans, etc.). For other types of traffic is determined by the SMR-B with relays output. This output is possible to switch the load character of R, L or C-values listed in the
load table. Between inputs S and neutral wire is possible to connect any load of R, L or C, however this is not (unlike the SMR-K) condition.
Example of connection SMR-T
Original connection
neutral wire
N
AC 230 V
AC 230 V
N
Control of an appliance by button
Output to an appliance
incoming phase wire
L
neutral wire
incoming phase wire
L
Button
Button
(switch)
N
neutral wire
L
incoming phase wire
Output to an appliance
AC 230 V
After the light bulb switch is switched off, fan starts operating and after set time switches off .
Switch
27
Staircase switch CRM-4
! Used for delayed switching of lights in the corridors, entrances, stairways, halls or for delayed finish of fans (WC, bathro-
om, etc.)
! It is controlled by a button or by several buttons from more places (connected in parallel)
buttons can be equipped by
glow lamps (max. 20 pcs of glow lamps)
! Output relay contact 16 A/AC1 with surge current up to 80 A enables switching of el. bulbs and fluorescent lamps
! Operating system switch:
AUTO - normal Function according to set time
OFF – permanently OFF (e.g. when changing bulbs)
ON – permanently ON (e.g. while cleaning, servicing)
! Time range: 0.5 - 10 min
! Time setting by potentiometer
! Supply voltage : AC 230 V
! Protection against button blocking ( e.g. a match inserted in a button)
! 1- MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
CRM-4 /230V: 8595188115605
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Control
Control voltage:
Power on input:
Load between S-A2:
Control terminals:
Glow tubes connetions:
Max. amount of glow lamps
connected to controlling input:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
CRM-4
delay off reacting to control contact switching
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0.5 - 10 min
potentiometer
10 % - mechanical setting
5 % - set value stability
0.05 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.05 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
1x changeover/SPDT (AgSnO2)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
AC 230 V
AC 0.53 VA
Yes
A1-S
Yes
AC 230V - max. amount 35 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
max. 150 ms
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
62 g (2.2 oz.)
EN 60669-2-3, EN 61010-1
Function
Connection
A1
16
It is possible to connect load between S-A2 (e.g.
contactor, control of light or any other device), without
disturbing a correct function of relay (load is energized
while the switch is ON).
18
16
18
A1
S A2
15
Un
S load
A2
15
Circuit connection
3-wire connection
4- wire connection
L
L
N
N
A1 S A2
A1 S A2
250V AC1
16A/4000VA
250V AC1
16A/4000VA
15 16 18
15 16 18
Description
Supply terminals
A1
S A2
Controlling contact
Output indication
Supply indication
Operating system swich
Time setting
15
16
18
Output contact
U
AUTO
switch
S
t
28
Symbol
t
t
OFF
ON
Programmable staircase switch with signalling before switch off CRM-42, CRM-42F
Intelligent staircase switch, the same use as CRM-4, but with enlarged possibility of control in mode „PROG“, it is possible
to select time of delayed OFF by number of button pressing. Each pressing multiplies time set by potentiometer, it
means that in case you set time to 5 min and press the button 3 times, then the output is automatically prolonged to 15
min. Output can be also switched off before time (reset) by long pressing of button (longer than 2 sec)
! Output relay contact 16A/AC1 with inrush current up to 80 A enables switching of el. bulbs and also fluorescent lights
! Operating system switch:
ON - output is constantly ON (service mode)
AUTO - timing according to adjusting by potentiometer in range 30 s - 10 min
PROG - timing with time prolongation option by number button pressing
! Timing (in mode AUTO and PROG) is possible to be stopped by long pressing of the button (> 2 s)
! Voltage range: AC 230 V, clamp terminals
! Output indication: multif. red LED, flashing at certain states
! Possibility to connect up to 100 buttons equipped with glow lamps (in total 100mA)
! 3-wire or 4-wire connection (it is possible to control input S by potential A1 or A2)
! Warning before switch OFF- output doubleflash 40 and 30 sec before switch OFF
! CRM-42F: Staircase switch without warning flashes especially suited for use with energy-saving lamps, where frequent
flashing may cause damage to the light source
! 1- MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
EAN code
CRM-42 /230V: 8595188136693
CRM-42F /230V: 8595188146883
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time ranges:
Time setting:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Electrical life (AC5b):
Control
Control voltage:
Input Burden:
Glow tubes connetions:
Max. amount of glow lamps
connected to controlling input:
Control. terminals:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
CRM-42 / CRM-42F
delay OFF responsive to control contact switch on
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
Mode AUTO: 0.5 - 10 min, Mode PROG
potentiometer
5 % - mechanical setting
5 % - set value stability
0.05 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.05 % / °F, at = 68 °F)
Connection
3- wire connection
A2
S A1
18
4- wire connection
A2
S A1
18
N
L
N
L
Description
1x NO - SPST(AgSnO2), switches potencial A1
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
8x104 (bulbs 1000 W) *
AC 230 V
AC 0.53 VA
Yes
230V - max. amount 50 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
A1-S or A2-S
min. 50 ms / max. unlimited
max. 150 ms
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4, (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5, (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
65 g (2.3 oz.)
EN 60669-2-3, EN 61010-1
Controlling input
Supply terminal A2
S
A2
Supply indication
Output indication
multifunction red LED
Operating system switch
Time setting
A1
Supply terminal A1
18
Output contact
Function
MODE AUTO
MODE ON
U
S
U
S
400ms
t
2s
18
18
red LED
t
red LED
MODE PROG (the illumination time is defined by number of button pressing)
U
>2s
S
t
t
t
t
t
t
18
red LED
Symbol
A1
* For bigger bulb loads and frequent
switching is recommended to intensify
the contact relay with power contactor
e.g. VSXXX
S A2
18
29
Notes
30
Auxiliary and Power relays
VS(B,K)
VS116B/230
VS116K
VS308K
VS316/24
VS316/230
Supply voltage :
AC 230 V
Output contact:
1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A.
Supply voltage :
AC 230 V and AC/DC 24 V
Output contact:
1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A.
Supply voltage :
AC 230 V and AC/DC 24 V
Output contacts:
3x changeover/ SPDT 8A.
Supply voltage :
AC/DC 24 V
Output contacts:
3x changeover/SPDT 16 A,
possibility to be connected
into 3-phase circuit.
Supply voltage :
AC 230 V
Output contacts:
3x changeover/ SPDT 16 A,
possibility to be connected
into 3-phase circuit.
VS(U)
VS116U
VS308U
Supply voltage :
AC/DC 12-240 V
Output contact:
1x changeover/SPDT 16 A.
Supply voltage :
AC/DC 12-240 V
Output contacts:
3x changeover/ SPDT 8 A.
750L
782L
ES-15/4NA - socket
782L
Max. voltage: 12 A
Weight: 59 g
Mounting to DIN rail
Designated for 4-contact relay.
Power relays plug-in
Output contacts: 4 x
changeover contact/
SPDT 6 A
Plug-in type.
750L
ES-11A- socket
Power relays plug-in
Output contacts:
3 x changeover contact /
SPDT 10 A
Plug-in type.
Max. current: 10 A
Weight: 60 g
Monting to DIN rail
Designated for 3-contact relay.
VS116B/230
MINI
VS116K
1M-DIN
VS116U
1M-DIN
VS308K
1M-DIN
VS308U
1M-DIN
VS316/24
1M-DIN
VS316/230
1M-DIN
782L
750L
PLUG-IN
PLUG-IN
1x16 A changeover/
SPDT
1x16 A changeover/
AC 230 and AC/DC 24 V
SPDT
1x16 A changeover/
AC/DC 12..240 V
SPDT
3x8 A changeover/
AC 230 and AC/DC 24 V
3PDT
3x8 A changeover/
AC/DC 12..240 V
3PDT
3x16 A changeover/
AC/DC 24 V
3PDT
3x16 A changeover/
AC 230 V
3PDT
4x8
A
changeover/
AC 6-230 V,
4PDT
DC 6-110 V
3x16
A
changeover/
AC 6-230 V,
3PDT
DC 6-110V
AC 230 V/50-60 Hz
#
page of catalogue
Designation
Paralel diode
RC unit
LED signal light
Output contact
Coil voltage
Design
Type
Other features
VS116/B230 MINI, with installation into junction box or ceiling that allows control of
lights, shades or awnings drives
32-33
#
#
#
as a separation relay (4kV), direct switching of appliances up to 4000VA
(e.g. heaters), well visible signalization, noiseless
32-33
#
#
#
as VS116K, but multivoltage supply coil
32-33
#
#
#
a “multiplication” of contacts, 3x changeover contact/ 3PDT only in 1-MODULE,
well visible signalization, noiseless
32-33
#
#
#
as VS308K, but multivoltage supply coil
32-33
#
#
#
3x changeover contact in 1-MODULE, possibility of “multiplication” of contacts and
in the same time possibility of switching high output, possibility of 3 phase switching
32-33
#
#
#
as VS316/24, but AC 230V
32-33
#
compact small relay for installation into plug relay, basic version
equipped by LED indication, detent and testing lever
34-35
#
as 782, but into 11-pin round socket,
3x changeover contact / 3PDT 16A/250V
34-35
More about contact loadability on page 111
31
Power relays modular type VS
!
Power relay used for switching larger load output, strengthen or „multiplying“ contacts of the existing device
Current
rating
16 A
VS116K
16 A
VS116U
16 A
VS116/B230
8A
VS308K
8A
VS308U
16 A
VS316/24
16 A
VS316/230
Type
Number of
contacts
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
Design
Supply terminals
DIN (1M)
DIN (1M)
BOX (MINI)
DIN (1M)
DIN (1M)
DIN (1M)
DIN (1M)
A1 - A2 230V AC/ A1 - A3 24V AC/DC
A1 - A2 12- 240V AC
L-N 230V AC
A1 - A2 230V AC/ A1 - A3 24 V AC/DC
A1 - A2 12-240V AC/DC
A1 - A2 24V AC/DC
A1 - A2 230V AC
!
Relays VS316/24, VS316/230 enable connection to a 3-phase circuit
!
In the design 1-MODULE , DIN rail mounting, output status indicated by high intensity LED with choice of LED color
(red, green, yellow, blue or white LED*)
EAN code
see page 33
Technical parameters
VS116B/230
VS116K
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time between switching:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
L-N
AC 230 V/50-60 Hz
AC max. 7.5 VA/ 1W
x
x
x
AC 230 V/50-60 Hz
AC max. 7.5 VA/ 1W
A1-A3
AC/DC 24 V (50-60 Hz)
AC 1 VA/ DC 1W
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
VS116/B230 MINI, mounting in installation box or ceilings, enabling switching of lights, motors for blinds or awnings
!
For VS116/B230 status of output indicated by LED on front panel of device
VS116U
VS308K
A1 - A2
AC 230 V/ 50-60 Hz
AC/DC 12-240 V/ 50-60 Hz
AC/DC 12-240 V/ 50-60 Hz
AC 0.7 - 3 VA/ DC 0.5 - 1.7 W AC max. 10.3 VA/ 1.1 W AC 0.7 - 3 VA/ DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
x
A1-A3
AC/DC 24 V (50-60 Hz)
x
AC 1 VA/ DC 1W
x
-15%; +10%
3 x changeover/3PDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)
8 A/ AC1
2000VA/ AC1, 192W/ DC
10 A/ <3s
250 V AC1/ 24 V DC
500 mW
high intensity of LED
3x107
0.7x105
min. 2s
1 x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO2)
16 A/ AC1
4000VA/ AC1, 384W/ DC
30 A/ <3s
red LED
min. 2s
free at connecting wire
IP 30
2x 0.75 mm2,
3x 2.5 mm2
49 x 49 x 21 mm
48 g
EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1
VS308U
54 g (1.9 oz.)
58 g (2.05 oz.)
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply-output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5
max. 1x2.5
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
52 g (1.83 oz.)
83g (2.9 oz.)
EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1
VS316/24
VS316/230
AC/DC 24 V/ 50-60 Hz
1.6 VA/ 1.2 W
x
x
x
AC 230 V/ 50-60 Hz
2.5 VA
3 x changeover/ 3PDT (AgSnO2)
16A/ AC1
4000VA/ AC1, 384W/ DC
30 A/ <3s
20 ms
1x107
1x105
50 ms
90 g (3.17 oz.)
92 g (3.25 oz.)
Symbol
VS116B/230
L
N
A1
14
A2 A3
11
VS316/24
A1
A2
32
VS116U
VS116K
12
12
A1
14
A2
11
14 22
11
24 32 34
21
31
A1
A2
14
A1
11
A2 A3
VS308U
12
14 22
11
24 32
21
34
31
A1
A2
12
14 22
11
24 32
21
Notes:
VS316/230
12
VS308K
12
12
14 22
11
24 32
21
34
31
Max. time of changeover of contact is 10ms.
VS316/24 or VS316/230 enables switching of different phases or 3 phase voltage.
* possibility to choose blue, white and yellow color of LED for power relays line VS in case of
minimal order quantity 100 pcs.
34
31
Power relays modular type VS
Description
VS116K, VS116U
VS308K, VS308U
Supply terminals
A2
A3
A1
A1
Supply terminals
2nd output
changeover contact
A2
A3
21
22
24
Indication LED
Indication LED
Red/čevená
Red/piros
11
12
11
14
31
Output changeover contact
34
3rd output
changeover contact
2nd output changeover contact
Supply terminals
24
A1
1st output
changeover contact
VS116B/230
VS316/24, VS316/230
22
14
terminal A3 only for VS308K
terminal A3 only for VS116K
21
32
12
A2
Indication LED
Output indication
31
11
12
32
34
14
Output changeover
contact
3rd output changeover
contact
Neutral wire
Output changeover contact
Phase wire
EAN codes
VS116U /red
VS116U /green
VS116U /yellow
VS116U /white
VS116U /blue
VS116K /red
VS116K /green
VS116K /yellow
VS116K /white
VS116K /blue
8595188124607
8595188136433
8595188138499
8595188138482
8595188138475
8595188122597
8595188122610
8595188122580
8595188122573
8595188122603
VS116B/230
8595188147543
VS308U /red
VS308U /green
VS308U /yellow
VS308U /white
VS308U / blue
VS308K /red
VS308K /green
VS308K /yellow
VS308K /white
VS308K /blue
8595188130103
8595188136440
8595188138529
8595188138512
8595188138505
8595188122696
8595188122719
8595188122689
8595188122672
8595188122702
VS316 /230 red
VS316 /230 green
VS316 /230 yellow
VS316 /230 white
VS316 /230 blue
VS316 /24 red
VS316 /24 green
VS316 /24 yellow
VS316 /24 white
VS316 /24 blue
8595188135559
8595188136075
8595188136082
8595188136051
8595188136068
8595188135771
8595188136105
8595188136129
8595188136099
8595188136112
33
Power relays plug-in type 750L, 782L
! Used for switching a higher power (load) than that of the switched element amplifier
! For auxiliary lighting control, signalization, the relay interlockings, boilers, HDO, heaters
! 3x changeover contacts of 10A(AgNi) for 750L
! 4x changeover contacts of 6A(AgNi) for 782L
! Recommended bases - ES-11A base for 750L, ES-15/4NA base for 782L
750L
Technical parameters
Contacts
Number of switching contacts
Contact material:
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
peak current
Switching capacity
Switching capacity
Switching capacity
Switching capacity
Minimum switching voltage / current:
Coil
Rated Voltage (DC):
Rated voltage (AC, 50-60Hz):
Rated power (AC / DC)
Tolerance of supply voltage:
Isolating data
Rated insulation voltage (AC):
Dielectric strength (AC)
coil - contact:
contact - contact:
Isolating resistance at 500 V DC:
Distance contact - coil
air:
surface:
General information
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Max. switching frequency
at rated load:
Without load:
Pick-up time / returning contact:
Working temperature:
Storage temperature:
Protection:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
34
782L
750L
782L
3
AgNi
AC 250 V/440 V (50 - 60 Hz)
10 A
20 A
10A/250A
3A/120V/1.5A/240V
10 A / 24 V DC
0.22 A / 120V 0.1 A/250 V
5mA/5V
1.5W/DC
6, 12, 24, 48, 110 V
6, 12, 24, 120, 230 V
AC 2.8 VA (50Hz) /2.5 VA (60Hz)/ DC 1.5 W
-20 / +10 %
4
AgNi
AC 250 V/250 V (50 - 60 Hz)
6A
12 A
6A/250A
1.5A/120V/0.75A/240V
6 A / 24 V DC
0.22 A / 120V 0.1 A/250 V
5mA/5V
1.5W/DC
6, 12, 24, 48, 110 V
6, 12, 24, 120, 230 V
AC 1.6 VA/ DC 0.9 W
-20 / +10 %
2500 V
2500 V
2500 V
1500 V
10 7 Ω
2500 V
1500 V
10 7 Ω
≥ 3 mm
≥ 4.2 mm
≥ 1.6 mm
≥ 3.2 mm
≥ 2x107
≥ 2x105 10A/250V AC
1x107
5
≥ 10 6A/250V AC
1200 cycles / hrs
12000 cycles / hrs
max. 12/10 ms
-40.. +55 °C (AC)
-40 .. +85 °C
IP40 from the front panel
35 x 35 x 54.4 mm
83 g
EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1
1200 cycles / hrs
18000 cycles / hrs
max. 10/8 ms
-40.. +55 °C
-40.. +85 °C
IP40 from the front panel
27.5 x 21.2 x 35.6 mm
35 g
EN 61810-1,
EN 60255-1-00, EN 61810-7
Coil data for 750L
Product Type
AC voltage
5006
5012
5024
5048
5060
5115
5120
5220
5230
5240
DC voltage
1006
1048
1060
1110
1120
1012
1024
1220
Voltage[V]
Resistance [Ω]
AC 6
AC 12
AC 24
AC 48
AC 60
AC 115
AC 120
AC 220
AC 230
AC 240
4.3
18.5
75
305
475
1 840
1 910
6 980
7 080
7 760
DC 6
DC 48
DC 60
DC 110
DC 120
DC 12
DC 24
DC 220
28
1 750
2 700
9 200
11 000
110
430
37 000
Coil data for 782L
Product Type
AC voltage
5006
5012
5024
5042
5048
5060
5080
5110
5115
5120
5127
5220
5230
5240
DC voltage
1005
1006
1012
1024
1048
1060
1080
1110
1125
1220
Voltage [V]
Resistance[Ω]
AC 6
AC 12
AC 24
AC 42
AC 48
AC 60
AC 80
AC 110
AC 115
AC 120
AC 127
AC 220
AC 230
AC 240
9.8
39.5
158
470
740
930
1 720
3 450
3 610
3 770
4 000
15 400
16 100
16 800
DC 5
DC 6
DC 12
DC 24
DC 48
DC 60
DC 80
DC 110
DC 125
DC 220
28
40
160
640
2 600
4 000
7 100
13 600
16 000
15 400
Power relays plug-in type 750L, 782L
Connection
The 750L connection
The 782L connection
Socket ES-11A - for 750L
Socket ES-15/4N - for 782L
ES-11A
Max. Current: 10A
Weight: 60 g
Mounting on DIN rail
Designed for 3- relay contacts
Max. Current: 12A
Weight: 59 g
Mounting on DIN rail
Designed for 4- relay contacts
Accessories to ES-11A - for 750L
Accessories to ES-15/4NA - for 782L
Clip to relay 750L: 16-1351
swivel label - TR1
ES-15/4NA
The LED module, the protective diode and
R/C member can be assigned into the slot.
EAN code
750L/110V DC
750L/120V AC
750L/12V AC
750L/12V DC
750L/230V AC
750L/24V AC
750L/24V DC
750L/48V DC
750L/6V AC
750L/6V DC
782L/110V DC
782L/120V AC
782L/12V AC
782L/12V DC
782L/230V AC
782L/24V AC
782L/24V DC
782L/48V AC
782L/48V DC
782L/6V AC
782L/6V DC
8595188129992
8595188130028
8595188130011
8595188129978
8595188119221
8595188119207
8595188125147
8595188129985
8595188130004
8595188129961
8595188129923
8595188129947
8595188119085
8595188119030
8595188119115
8595188119092
8595188119047
8595188129954
8595188129916
8595188129930
8595188129909
ES-15/4NA
ES-11A
ES8
Clip to relay 750L
Clip to relay 782L
8595188119245
8595188129879
8595188136167
8595188119283
8595188119276
35
Dimmers
R, L
R, L, C
R, L, C
MODULAR
DIM-2
DIM-5
staircase switch with
gradual dimming up/
down, level and time of
illumination, all values are
adjustable.
R = 10 -500 VA
L = 10 -250 VA
DIM-15
DIM-14
as DIM-5 but dims
all types of loads,
in-built protection against
temperature and current
overload, electronic fuse.
R = 500 VA
L = 500 VA
C = 500 VA
control by a button/
buttons ( connected in
parallel), short pressing
ON/OFF, long pressing
regulates brightness,
memory storing.
R = 10 -500 VA
L = 10 -250 VA
MODULAR
LIC-1
designated for dimming of
1) LED lamps and LED
lighting sources
2) dimmable energy
saving fluorescent lamps
intensity controller for
maintaining the constant
illumination level.
Dimmable energy saving
fluorescent lamps, LED
lamps.
R,L,C, - resistive, inductive
and capacitive loads
MINI
DIM-6
SMR-S
DIM6-3M-P
power dimming to 2kW.
Can be controlled by button,
external potentiometer, 0-10
V (1-10 V) system iNELS.
R = 2000VA
L = 2000 VA
C = 2000VA
as DIM-5, but for mounting under a
wall-switch into an installation box
KU-68 (or the similar),
3 wire connection (without neutral).
R = 10-300VA
L = 10-150 VA
DIM6-3M-P is a power
module expansion unit for
DIM-6. It cannot be
operated independently.
R = 1000VA
L = 1000 VA
C = 1000VA
SMR-U
SMR-M
as DIM-14, but for mounting under
a wall-switch into an installation box
KU-68 (or the similar).
R = 1000VA
L = 1000 VA
C = 1000VA
for mounting under a wallswitch into an installation
box KU-68 (or similar).
Dimmable energy saving
fluorescent lamps, LED
lamps.
Recommendation for mounting:
Recommendation for mounting modular dimmers: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module ( approx. 9 mm/ 0.4” ) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device.
Output
#
x
x
triac 10-500VA* 10-250VA
-
#
x
DIM-5
1M-DIN
AC 230V
#
#
x
x
triac 10-500VA* 10-250VA
-
#
x
#
#
Type
DIM-14
1M-DIN
AC 230V
#
#
#
R
ESL LED
x
L
C
2x
x MOSFET 500 VA* 500 VA* 500 VA*
2x
x
x
is expanding power modul for controlled dimmer DIM-6
41
-
#
x
as DIM-5, but for mounting under a wall-switch, into
a wiring box, 3 wire connection (without neutral)
is expanding power modul for controlled diммer DIM-6
44
500VA*
500VA*
#
#
as DIM-14, but for mounting under a wall-switch,
into an installation box
44
-
#
#
#
42
300 VA*
300 VA*
#
#
designated for dimming of:
1) LED bulbs and LED lighting sources
2) dimmable saving fluorescent lamps
for maintaining the constant illumination level.
ESL dimmable compact fluorescent lamps, LED lamps,
R,L,C, - resistive, inductive and capacitive loads
-
-
#
#
DIM-6
6M-DIN
AC 230V
#
#
#
x
x MOSFET 2 000 VA* 2 000 VA* 2 000 VA*
DIM-6-3MP 3M-DIN
AC 230V
#
#
#
x
x
SMR-S
BOX
AC 230V
#
#
x
x
SMR-U
BOX
AC 230V
#
#
#
x
x
SMR-M
BOX
AC 230V
-
-
-
#
#
2x
MOSFET
1M-DIN
AC 230V
#
#
#
#
#
2x
300 VA*
MOSFET
LIC-1
-
#
4x
1 000 VA* 1 000 VA* 1 000 VA*
MOSFET
triac 10-300VA* 10-150VA
#
39
#
-
2x
500VA*
MOSFET
designated for dimming of:
1) LED bulbs and LED lighting sources
2) dimmable saving fluorescent lamps
for controlled dimming of lights up to 2kW, with a possibility
of module extention up to 20kW (el.bulbs and hallogen lights,
also with ballast type C or L)
38
#
AC 230V
2x
as DIM-5, but dims all types of load, inbuilt protections
against thermo and current overload, electronic fuse
37
x
1M-DIN
#
staircase switch with gradual dim-up/dim-down,
level and length of illumination, all values are adjustable
control by button/buttons (connected in parallel),
short pressing ON/OFF, long pressing regulated brightness,
memory recording
x
DIM-15
MOSFET
Catalogue page
#
C
Rated load
Designation
AC 230V
L
output unit
1M-DIN
R
LED lamps
DIM-2
Design
OFF-DIMMER
Dimming principal
ON-DIMMER
resistive
(el. bulbs,
halogen lights)
inductive (wound
transformers)
capacitive
(electronic
transformers)
energy saving
fluorescent
lamps
Supply voltage
Type of dimmed load
42
40
45
Note: * - with load over 300 VA is necessary to ensure sufficient cooling
Expandatory:
R, L, C
Dimmer with designatedload:
R - RESISTIVE
L - INDUCTIVE
C - CAPACITIVE
type of load
bulbs,
halogen lamps
low-voltage el.bulbs 12/24V
WIth wound transformers
R
L
LED lamps
(symbols)
ESL - energy saving fluorescent lamps
LED - LED lamps
Demonstrated symbols are informative
36
low-voltage el.bulbs 12/24V ESL dimmable compact fluorescent
WIth electronic transformers
lamps
C
ESL
LED
Staircase switch with dimming DIM-2
Designated for dimming el. bulbs, halogen lights and halogen lights with winding transformers
Intelligent control of halogen lights, function of gradual switching on and dimming
! Controlling inputs for push button and switch
! Values are set by potentiometers on front panel of the product, adjustable:
- maximum dim-up
- speed (fluency) of dim-up
- speed (fluency) of dim-down
- time for which a light is on with maximum dim-up
! All time intervals can be adapted according to a request
! Output without contact: 1x triac
! Load AC 5b (el. bulbs) 500 W
! Clamp terminals
! Parallel connection of controlling pushbuttons is possible
! Protection against over-temperature inside the product - switches output off + signalizes overheating by LED flashing
! Note: possibility of start and finish adjustment up on 1 hour, device has description DIM-2 1h
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
!
EAN code
DIM-2 /230V: 8595188112475
DIM-2-1h /230V: 8595188135740
Symbol
Technical parameters:
DIM-2
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time setting by:
Time deviation:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature coefficient:
Recovery time:
Controlling T1 (button)
Terminals:
Voltage:
Power on control input:
Impulse length:
Glow-lamps:
Max. amount of glow lamps
connected to controlling input:
Controlling T2 (switch)
Terminals:
Voltage:
Power on control input:
Impulse length:
Output
Current rating:
Resistance load:
Inductive load:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 Hz
max. 5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
potentiometers
10 % - mechanical setting
5 % - set value stability
0.01 % /°C, at = 20°C
max.80ms
Connection
L
A1
A1
V
T2
T1
T2
T 2.5 A
recomended
fuse
V A2
A2
T1 - A1
AC 230 V
max. 1.5 VA
min.100 ms /max. unlimited
Yes
230V - max. amount 50 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
T1
R, L
N
Description
Output
Supply terminal A1
Controlling input for switch
V
A1
T2
Supply indication
T2 - A1
AC 230 V
0.1 VA
min.100 ms /max. unlimited
Output indication
- brightness setting
t1 - dim-up time settting
t3 - dim-down time setting
2A
10 - 500 VA
10 - 250 VA
t2 - time delay setting
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.2x 2.5 or 1x4/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
65 g (2.3 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1
A2
Supply terminal A2
T1
Controlling input for push button
Recommendation for mounting: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module (approx. 9 mm) on side of the device to
ensure better cooling of the device.
Function
Legend:
Controlled via input T1(button)
Brightness: 10-100%
t1 Dim-up time: 1-40 s
t2 Time delay: 0s-20min
t3 Dim-down time: 1-40s
t3
t1
t2
T1
Controlled via input T2 (switch)
Dim-up delay-down is started
by a button. Cycle extensionanother button pressing (during cycle).
t3
t1
t2
The switch starts the cycle and
it stops on max.set brightness.
After the switch is off, the cycle
will continue until completed.
T2
37
Controlled dimmer DIM-5
EAN code
DIM-5 /230V: 8595188115612
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Controlling
Control terminals:
Control voltage:
Power control input:
Impulse length:
Glow-lamps:
Max. amount of glow lamps
connected to controlling input:
Output
Current rating:
Resistance load:
Inductive load:
Output indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Operating position
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
!
Designated for dimming el. bulbs, halogen lights and halogen lights with winding transformers
!
For switching and dimming lights in corridors, stairways... control input for push-buttons (parallel connection possible)
!
Short press turns light on/off, longer press (> 0.5 s) provides dim up / dim down
!
When switched off , brightness level is stored in a memory and when On again it restores last brightness level
!
Voltage range: AC 230 V
!
Contactless output, triac 2A/ 500 VA
!
LED output indication (with any level of brightness)
!
Possibility to connect control buttons in parallel
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
Clamp terminals
!
Protection against over-heating inside the product - switches output off + signalizes overheating by LED flashing
Symbol
DIM-5
Connection
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 Hz
max. 5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
L
A1
A1
V T - A1
AC 230 V
max. 1.5 VA
min. 80 ms / max. unlimited
Yes
230V - max. amount 50 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
T 2.5 A
recomended
fuse
T A2
A2
T
R, L
N
Description
2A
10 - 500 VA
10 - 250 VA
red LED
Output
Supply terminal A1
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
58 g (2 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
A1
V Output indication
Supply indication
Function
A2
Supply
V Supply terminal A2
A1-A2
T
Controlling input for push button
Output
Brightness
Controlling contact
LED
38
Recommendation for mounting: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module ( approx. 9 mm/ 0.4”) on side
of the device to ensure better cooling of the device.
T
<0.5s
<0.5s >0.5s
<0.5s >0.5s
<0.5s
Controlled dimmer DIM-14
! Designed for dimming of incandescent bulbs and halogen lights with wound or electronic transformer
! For switching and dimming of lights, control inputs for a button
! Short impulse switches ON/OFF, longer impulse (>0.5s) enables gradual light intensity setting
! Last intensity level is stored in memory when switched off
! Voltage range: AC 230 V
! Output without contacts: 2x MOSFET
! LED output indicator with any level of brightness possibility of parallel connection of control buttons
! Resistive, inductive or capacitive load,
up to 300 W, for a short term up to 500 W
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
! Electronic overvoltage protection
! Protection against over-heating inside
the device - output off
EAN code
DIM-14 /230V: 8595188135955
Technical parameters
Symbol
DIM-14
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Dissipated power:
Indication output:
Controlling
Control terminals:
Control voltage:
Power control input:
Impulse length:
Glow-lamps:
Max. amount of glow lamps
connected to controlling input:
Output
Contactless:
Current rating:
Resistance load:
Inductive load:
Capacitive load:
Output state indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
A1-A2
AC 230 V / 50 Hz
1.3 W
-15 %; +10 %
6 VA
green LED
Connection
L
A1
A1- T
AC 230 V
AC 0.3-0.6 VA
min. 80 ms / max. unlimited
Yes
230V - max. amount 20 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
A1
V T 2.5 A
V DIM-14
T A2
A2
T
R, L, C
N
2 x MOSFET
2A
500 VA*
500 VA*
500 VA*
red LED
Description
Supply terminal A1
A1
V Output
Supply indication
-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)
-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
58 g (2 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
DIM - 14
A2
Output indication
T
Supply terminal A2
Function
Supply A1-A2
Button output
* When load is above 300 VA it is necessary to ensure sufficient cooling.
Output
Brightness
Controlling input T
recomended
front-end
protection
Recommendation for mounting: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module ( approx. 9 mm/ 0.4”) on side of the
device to ensure better cooling of the device.
<0.5s <0.5s
>0.5s
>0.5s
<0.5s
Warning for DIM-14: it is not allowed to connect together loads of inductive and capacitive type in the
same time.
39
Controlled dimmer DIM-6
Designed for RLC dimming lights, also available for appliance switching
!
DIM-6 can be controlled by: button (parallel button connection), external potentiometer, analog signal 0-10 V
(1-10 V), iNELS system bus
2
2
2
2
EAN code
DIM-6 /230V: 8595188136914
Technical parameters
!
DIM-6
!
Actuator manages output 230 V AC, controlled by 1 semi-conductor. Maximum output power is 2000 VA
!
Power range can be increased up to 10 000 VA by module DIM6-3M-P
!
Electronic overcurrent protection, overvoltage and short-circuit protection
!
Protection against over-heating inside device - switch off output+signalize overheat by flashing red LED
!
6-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting
Symbol
L
Supply terminals:
L, N
Supply voltageí:
AC 230 V / 50 Hz
(x) - according to control type setting
Input:
10 VA
Tolerance of Voltage range:
-15 %; +10 %
Max. output power:
max. 2 000 VA
Dissipated power:
2.5 % from load
Types of indication LED
Module extendable:
to 10 000 VA
- Yellow-indicates configuration of load RL
Galvanic separation of bus and power output:
yes
- Yellow-indicates configuration of load RC
Isul. volt. between outputs and inner circuits:
3.75kV, SELV according to EN 60950
Control - button type
- Green-button control mode selected
Control voltage:
AC 12-240V
- Green - 0-10 V signal control mode selected
Control terminals:
S - S, galvanically separated
- Green – 1-10 V signal control mode selected
Power of control input:
AC 0.53VA (AC 230V), AC 0.025-0.2VA (AC 12-240V)
- Green – CIB conductor bar-INELS control mode selected
Length of control impulse:
min. 25ms / max. unlimited
- Yellow – indicates CIB conductor bar data transfer comunication
max. 150ms
Recovery time:
- Red – indicates overload, flashing LED signalizes over-heating inside the device, shinnig LED
Connection of glow lamps:
NO (AC 230V); NO (AC 12-240V)
Control 0(1)-10V:
signalizes current overload
0(1)-10V, GND
Control terminals:
0-10V or 1-10V
Control voltage:
Device description
1mA
Min. current of control input:
14
13
CIB control:
1
12
CIB+, CIBControl terminals:
Bus voltage:
27V DC
5mA
Current of control input:
11
2
Indication of data transmission:
yellow LED
Output
3
Contactless:
4 x MOSFET
10 A
Current rating:
Resistive load:
2 000 VA*
4
10
5
Inductive load:
2 000 VA*
Capacitive load:
2 000 VA*
yellow LED, according to load type
Indication of output state:
Other information
Operating temperature:
-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
Storing temperature:
vertical
Operating position:
Mounting:
DIN rail EN 60715
9
6
Protection degree:
IP 40 from front panel
8
Purpose of control device:
operative control device
7
Construction of control device:
individual control device
1 Terminals for CIB bus
6 Terminals for connecting
11 Button for output control
Char. of automatic operation:
1.B.E
connection
control button
Heat and fire resistance cat.:
FR-0
2 Load type indication
7 Terminals of neutral wire
12 Terminal for additional modul
Anti-stroke category (immunity):
class 2
conductor bar
Rated impulse voltage:
2.5 kV
3 Control type indication
8 Terminal for phase conductor 13 Terminals for control by signal
Overvoltage category:
III.
connection
0(1)-10V, or by potentiometer
Pollution level:
2
Profile of connecting wires :
4 CIB data transfer indication
9 Output terminals
14 Terminal for regulation load of
- output part:
max.1x2.5, max2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
wire jumper
- control part:
max.1x2.5, max2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
5 Overload indication
10 Button for output control
Dimensions:
90 x 105 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 4.1˝ x 2.6˝)
Weight:
410 g (14.5 oz.)
* Warning : it is not allowed to connect inductive and capacitive loads at the same time.
Standards:
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010. EN 55014
V
R,L,C
(x)
40
N
Expanding power module DIM6-3M-P
!
Expanding power module only for use in combination with DIM-6
!
DIM6-3M-P provides power increasement (of about 1000VA) of load connected to DIM-6
(it means: 2 000VA (DIM-6) + 1 000VA (DIM6-3M-P) = 3 000VA)
!
DIM-6 can be connected with up to 8 DIM6-3M-P to expand power up to 10 000 VA
!
Attention-device has to be protected by circuit breaker accordant to the load connected to device
!
DIM-6 in installation is cooled by natural air flow. If the natural air flow access is reduced, cooling has to be provided
by ventilator. Rated operating temperature is 35°C/ 95 °F
EAN code
DIM-6-3M-P: 8595188139106
Technical parameters
DIM6-3M-P
Load
Dissipated power:
Output
Contactless:
Current rating:
Resistive load:
Inductive load:
Load capacity:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Controlling device purpose:
Controlling device construction:
Automatic operating char.:
Heat and fire resistance category:
Imunity category:
Rated impuls voltage:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution level:
Profile of connecting wires (mm2)
- output part:
- control part:
Size:
Weight:
Standards:
max. 1 000VA
2.5 % from load
!
If there are several DIM6-3M-P connected to DIM-6, the distance between them has to be min. 2 cm/ 0.8”
!
Max. lenght of bus EB is 1 m/ 39.4” and the connection has to be realized by schielded cable
Device description
Terminal for additional modul
conductor bar
2 x MOSFET
5A
1 000 VA*
1 000 VA*
1 000 VA*
-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
vertical
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel
operating control device
additional control device
1.B.E
FR-0
class 2
2.5 kV
III.
2
max.1x2.5, max2x1.5 / with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
max.1x2.5, max2x1.5 /with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
134 g (4.7 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010. EN 55014
EB1
L
EB2
L
EB4
EB3
L
EB5
V V V
Output terminals
Phase connection term
*Warning: it is not allowed to connect loads of inductive and capacitive character at the same time
Connection
0(1)-10V
CIB+
CIB -
50k
F max.15A*
L
N
2
2
2
2
R, L, C
*Potencial L on device terminal, has to be protected by circuit breaker
accordant to the load connected to device.
41
Dimmer for LED bulbs and dimmable fluorescent lamps DIM-15 and SMR-M
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
SMR-M
DIM-15
EAN code
DIM-15/230V: 8595188140690
SMR-M:
8595188143776
Technical parameters
DIM-15
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Operating range:
Apparent power:
Loss power:
Dissipated power:
Supply indication:
Control
Control terminals:
Control wire:
Control voltage:
Control input power:
Control impulse lenght:
Glow tubes connection:
Max. amount of glow lamps
connected to controlling input:
Output
Contactless:
Load:*
Output status indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
A1-A2
x
Overvoltage category:
Pollution level:
Terminal wire capacity:
Connection:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Designated for dimming of: a) LED bulbs and LED light sources
b) dimmable saving fluorescent lamps
Enables gradual setting of luminance by push-button (non-detent) or parallel buttons
Returns to last state upon re-energization
Type of light source (LED or saving fluorescent lamp) is set by switch-over on the front panel of device
Minimal luminance, set by potentiometer on the front panel, eliminates flashing of some types of saving
fluorescent lamps
DIM-15
Supply voltage 230V AC
Output status is indicated by red LED:
- shines when output is active
-flashes while heating overload, at the same time output is disconnected
1-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting, saddle terminals
SMR-M
!
button-controlled dimmer intended to be installed in an installation box (e.g. KU-68) into the existing electrical wiring
!
protection against excessive temperature inside the device - switches off the output
SMR-M
x
4-wire, with neutral
AC 230 V / 50 Hz
-15 %; +10 %
max. 1.5VA
max. 0.7W
green LED
A1 - T
x
x
L-S
AC 230 V
AC 0.3-0.6 VA
min. 80 ms / unlimited
Yes
230V - max. amount 15 pcs
230V - max. amount 10 pcs
Symbol
Light source type setting
A1 (L)
DIM-15
(SMR-M)
dimmable saving fluorescent lamps
V T(S) A2(N)
DIM-15
SMR-M
L
L
N
A1
V T 2.5 A
recomended fuse
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
T 1.6 A
recomended fuse
2 x MOSFET
300 W (at cos φ =1)
red LED
LED bulbs
160 W (at cos φ =1)
x
V
A2
L
N
S
T
-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)
N
-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
any
Functions and controlling
DIN rail EN 60715
free at connecting wires
IP 40 from front panel /
IP30 in standard
IP 10 clips
conditions
Supplying Un
>0.5s
<0.5s
III.
T
2
V
max. 2x2.5, with sleeve max. 1x2.5,
min
max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
x
solid w. CY, Ø 0.75 mm2(AWG 18),
V
x
lenght 90mm (3.5˝)
min
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 49 x 49 x 21 mm (1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝)
57 g (1.98 oz.)
38 g (1.3 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1
<0.5s
>0.5s
max
max
<0.5s
Controlling:
!short button press (<0.5s)
turns the light off or on
!long press (>0.5s) enables
slight regulation of light intensity
!setting of minimal luminance
is possible only during
decreasing of luminance by long
button press
Minimal luminance setting:
„LED bulb“ :
! if the light is turned off, short press (<0.5s) switches the light onto last set luminance level
* Due to a large number of light source types, the maximum load depends on the internal
construction of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs and their power factor cos φ.
The power factor of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs ranges from cos φ = 0.95 to 0.4.
An approximate value of maximum load may be obtained by multiplying the load capacity
of the dimmer by the power factor of the connected light source.
42
„Energy saving lamp“
:
!when light is off, short impulse turns lamp on and then luminance is decreased to set level
! setting of minimal luminance by saving fluorescent lamps serves for harmonizing of lowest light
intensity prior its unprompted switching off
Dimmer for LED bulbs and dimmable fluorescent lamps DIM-15 and SMR-M
Device describtion
Supply voltage L
Supply voltage
indication
Light source
type selection
Output
A1
V Output indication
DIM - 15
Minimal luminance setting
Minimal luminance
setting
Light source
type selection
Supply voltage
indication
Output to an appliance
Switch (button)
A2
T
Supply voltage N
Controlling input
Phase
Neutral
Connection example
N
L
Additional information
! it is possible to dim only LED bulbs equipped with capacitator supplying
! it is not possible to dim saving fluorescent lamps without marking: dimmable
!an incorrect setting of light source has effect only on dimming range, it means neither dimmer or
load get demaged
! maximal load is counting with usage of LC filter
! actual list of tested light sources is constantly refreshing, further information on www.elkoep.com/products/
43
Controlled dimmer SMR-S, SMR-U
Button-controlled dimmers designated for flush mounting into a wiring box, into an existing electroinstallation
(SMR-S doesn´t need neutral for correct function)
! Used to control lamp brightness, dimming, possible to control from more places (parallel connections)
! Protection against temperature overrun inside the device – output off
! By changing wall-switch for a switch with SMR-S/SMR-U installed below you can reach effective brightness control
! SMR-S enables dimming of electric bulbs 12 V, halogen lights with wound transformers (inductive load)
! SMR-U enables also dimming 12 V halogen lights with electronic transformers (capacitive load)
! It can not be used for dimming of fluorescent lamps and energy saving lamps
!
SMR-S - 3-wire connection, functional without neutral
- max. load: 300 VA (el. bulbs or halogen lights with wound transformer)
- contactless output -1x triac
- with exchangeable fuse
! SMR-U - 4-wire connection
- max. load: 500 VA (el. bulbs or halogen lights with electronic or wound transformer)
- contactless output - 2 xMOSFET
- electronic over-heating protection - output off in case of short-circuit or overload
!
EAN code
SMR-S /230V: 8595188123518
SMR-U /230V: 8595188130738
Technical parameters
SMR-S
Connection:
Voltage range:
Power input (no operation/make):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Output
Resistive load:
Inductive load:
Capacitive load:
Control
Control voltage:
Current:
Impulse lenght:
Glow tubes connection:
Max. amount of glow lamps
connected to controlling input:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Fuse:
Connection:
Glow lamps in a button:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
SMR-U
Connection SMR-S, SMR-U
3-wire con., without neutral
4-wire con., with neutral
230 V AC / 50Hz
max. 3 VA
-15 %; +10 %
10 - 300 VA
10 - 150 VA
x
N
L
500 VA*
500 VA*
500 VA*
AC 230 V
max. 3 mA
min. 50 ms / max. unlimited
Yes
230V - max. amount 50 pcs
230V - max. amount 10 pcs
V
S
SMR-S
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
0 °C to +50 °C (32 °F to 122 °F)
any
free at connecting wires
IP 30 in standard conditions
III.
2
F 1.6A / 250V
x
solid wires 0.75 mm2 (AWG 18), lenght: 90 mm (3.5” )
max. number 10
49 x 49 x 13 mm (1.9” x 1.9” x 0.5”)
32 g (1.1 oz.)
32 g (1.1 oz.)
EN 61010-1, EN 60669-2-1
L
Typical connection of SMR-S
- dimmer of lights
V
R, L
L
S
N
SMR- U
R, L, C
Typical connection of SMR-U
- dimmer of lights
Warning: it cannot be used for fluorescent lights and energy saving lights!
SMR-U: It is not allowed to connect together loads of inductive and capacitive type in the same time.
Note:
* - with load over 300 VA is necessary to ensure sufficient cooling.
Function SMR-S, SMR-U
Description of SMR-S
Supply
Output
Brightness
Controlling
contact
Indication
<0.5s <0.5s
>0.5s
>0.5s
Short press (<0.5s) turns a light on, another short press turns it off. A longer
press (>0.5s) causes a gradual regulation of light intensity min-max-min
round until the button is released. After releasing a set intensity is kept in
memory, further short presses turn the light on/off keeping the set intensity.
The intensity can be changed by further long press. After de-energising the
relay remembers the set value.
Button control input
Phase
44
Exchangeable fuse
<0.5s
Output
Lighting intensity controller LIC-1
Mounting of SKS photosensor
on the wall
Automatically regulates the intensity of light in a room
External sensor scans the intensity and based on the preset value it decreases or increases the brightness of light
! Designed for dimming the LED lights, ESL - dimmable energy saving lamps, R - inductive, L - resistive and C - capacitive load
! Operating status:
1 - Off
2 - Automatic regulation
3 - Cleaning (maximum level of illumination)
4 - Setting the minimum lighting brightness
5 -Setting the desired level of illumination
! Optional connection of buttons with 50 neon lamps
! Blocking the automatic control via external signal, power supply 230V AC
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamping terminals
!
!
EAN code
LIC-1 8595188144933
SKS photosensor: 8594030337288
Technical parameters
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply voltage:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Apparent/loss power input:
Power supply indication:
Control
Button - control terminals:
Control voltage:
Control input power:
Duration of control pulse:
Glow tubes connection (terminals L-T):
Max. amount of glow lamps
connected to controlling input:
Blocking input - terminals:
Control voltage:
Input power:
Glow tubes connection (terminals L-B):
Duration of control pulse:
Output:
Output status indication:
Load capacity:*
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Ingress protection:
Overvoltage category:
Contamination degree:
Connecting conductor
cross-section (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Mounting of SKS photosensor
into the panel
LIC-1
L-N
AC 230 V / 50-60 Hz
±15 %
max. 1.6VA / 0.8W
green LED
L-T
AC 230 V
max. 0.6 VA
min. 80 ms / max. unlimited
Yes
230V - max. amount 50 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
L-B
AC 230V
max. 0.1VA
No
min. 80 ms / max. unlimited
2x MOSFET
red LED
300 W (at cos φ =1)
-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)
-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
57 g (1.98 oz.)
EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1
* Due to a large number of light source types, the maximum load depends on the internal
construction of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs and their power factor cos φ.
The power factor of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs ranges from cos φ = 0.95 to 0.4.
An approximate value of maximum load may be obtained by multiplying the load capacity
of the dimmer by the power factor of the connected light source.
Function
Control (external button):
! Pressing the button shortly (<0.5 s ) - always switches the light off
! Medium-long press (0.5 - 3s) - automatic control
! Long press (> 3s) - cleaning
! 3 x short presses from "off" - setting the desired level of illumination
! 5 x short presses from „off“ - setting the minimum brightness
In mode 4 and 5, the lamp brightness changes periodically from minimum to
maximum. At a required level of brightness, the value is stored into memory by
pressing the button shortly.
Connection
Symbol
L
B L
IN
L
V IN
V T 2.5 A
recomended
front-end
protection
B
IN
IN
N
T
T
N
glow-lamp
N
Sensor SKS
Description
Output
Supply voltage L
Blocking input
L
Supply voltage
indication
Selection of light source
type
V B
Output indication
Lighting-up speed setting*
Dimming speed setting*
IN
IN
Terminals for the connection
of the SKS sensor
N
T
Control input
Supply voltage N
*by automatic regulation
Selection of light source type
energy saving
lights
halogen lamp with
electronic transformer
LED lamp, 230 V
230 V bulb
halogen lamp with
ferromagnetic transformer
45
Power supplies
Voltage
Stabilized
DC- switching
Stabilized
DC- linear
Nonstabilized
AC+DC
12V
PSB-10-12
PS-10-12
PS-30-12
DR-60-12
PS-100-12
ZNP-10-12V
IN: AC 100-250 V
OUT: DC 12V stabil
LOAD: 0.84 A / 10 W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
-MINI, into an installation
box (such as KU-68).
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 0.84 A / 10 W
- galvanically separated
- fusion safety
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 1 MODULE.
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 2.5A / 30 W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 3 MODULE.
IN: AC 100-240 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 4.5A / 54 W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- range of incoming voltage
- 4.5 MODULE .
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 8,4A / 100 W
- galvanically separated
- fusion safety
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 6 MODULE.
IN: AC 230V
OUT: AC/DC 12V nostabil
LOAD: 0.4A / 10VA
- galvanically separated
- fuse
- 3 MODULE.
PSB-10-24
PS-10-24
PS-30-24
DR-60-24
PS-100-24
ZNP-10-24V
IN: AC 100-250 V
OUT: DC 24 V stabil
LOAD: 0.42A / 10W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
-MINI, into an installation
box (such as KU-68).
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 24 V stabil
LOAD: 0.42A / 10W
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 1 MODULE.
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 24 V stabil
LOAD: 1.25A / 30W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 3 MODULE.
IN: AC 100-240 V
OUT: DC 24 V stabil
LOAD: 2.5A / 60W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- 4.5 MODULE .
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 12 V stabil
LOAD: 4,2A / 100 W
- fusion safety
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 6 MODULE.
IN: AC 230V
OUT: AC/DC 24V nostabil
LOAD: 0.4A / 10VA
- galvanically separated
- fuse
- 3 MODULE.
24V
Regulated
PS-30-R
ZSR-30
IN: AC 230 V
OUT: DC 12-24 V regul., stab.
LOAD: 2.5-1.25A / 30W
- galvanically separated
- electronic fuse
- thermo protection
- 3 MODULE.
IN: AC 230V
OUT: DC 5-24 V reg., stab.
OUT: AC 24V, DC24V
LOAD: 1.6-0.3A/10VA
- range of incoming voltage
-current restrictor
- electronic fuse
- 3 MODULE.
Nonstabilized AC
Bell
transformer
46
ZTR-8-8
ZTR-8-12
ZTR-15-12
output voltage 8 V.
Power: 8W.
output voltage12 V.
Power: 8W.
output voltage 4-8-12 V.
Power: 4V5V - 8V 10V- 12V 15V.
Power supplies
-
#
S
#
Page in catalogue
#
Designation
-
Short-circuit-proof
Safety fuse
#
AC 12V
0.8 A
DC 12 V
AC 24V
0.4 A
#
DC 24V
DC 5-24V
# # AC 24 V 1.6 A- 0.3 A
Switching (S) /
Linear (L)
#
Output current
3M-DIN
#
Output voltage
ZSR-30
#
Stabilized
3M-DIN
DC
ZNP-10-24
AC 230 V,
-15/+10%
AC 230 V,
-15/+10%
AC 230 V,
-15/+10%
AC
Design
3M-DIN
Input voltage
Type
ZNP-10-12
Electronic fuse
Protection against
overload
Output
DC and AC nonstabilized, output voltage 12 V – where it is not required or
51
where there is stabilized differently/later
DC and AC nonstabilized output voltage 24 V – where it is not required or
51
is stabilized later
regulated output voltage in a wide range DC 5-24 V: possibility to adjust
output voltage with load according to request
#
51
PSB-10-12
MINI-BOX AC 100-250V
# # DC 12 V
0.84 A
S
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 12 V / 10 W,
box
48-49
PSB-10-24
MINI-BOX AC 100-250V
# # DC 24V
0.42 A
S
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 24 V / 10 W,
box
48-49
# # DC 12 V
0.84 A
S
#
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 12 V / 10 W,
1 module
48-49
# # DC 24V
0.42 A
S
#
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 24 V / 10 W,
1 module
48-49
# # DC 12 V
2.5 A
S
#
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 12 V / 30 W,
3 module
48-49
# # DC 24V
1.25 A
S
#
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 24 V / 30 W,
3 module
48-49
# # DC 12-24V 2.5 A-1.25 A
S
#
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 12-24 V / 30 W,
3 module
48-49
# # DC 12 V
8.4A
S
#
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 12 V / 100 W,
6 module
48-49
# # DC 24V
4.2 A
S
#
#
#
stabilized switching power supply with fixed output voltage 24V / 100W,
6 module
48-49
#
DC 12 V
4.5 A
S
#
DC 24V
2.5 A
S
8V
1A
12 V
4-8-12 V
PS-10-12
PS-10-24
PS-30-12
PS-30-24
PS-30-R
PS-100-12
PS-100-24
DR-60-12
DR-60-24
ZTR-8-8
ZTR-8-12
ZTR-15-12
AC 230 V,
-20/+10%
AC 230 V,
1M-DIN -20/+10%
AC 230 V,
3M-DIN
-20/+10%
AC 230 V,
3M-DIN
-20/+10%
AC 230 V,
3M-DIN
-15/+10%
AC 230 V,
6M-DIN
-20/+10%
AC 230 V,
6M-DIN
-20/+10%
4.5M-DIN AC 100-240V
DC 124-370 V
4.5M-DIN AC 100-240V
DC 124-370 V
AC 230 V,
2M-DIN -15/+10% #
AC 230 V, #
2M-DIN
-15/+10%
AC 230 V, #
3M-DIN
+/- 10%
1M-DIN
efficient switching power supply of DC voltage 12V / 54 W, wide range of 50
input voltage (AC 100-240 and DC 124-370V)
efficient switching power supply of DC voltage 24V / 60 W, wide range of
50
input voltage (AC 100-240 and DC 124-370V)
-
#
0.66A
-
#
2-1.5-1A
-
#
52
bell transformer (short-circuit-proof) for supplying of bells,
door openers, home call-boxes
52
52
47
Power supplies PS
!
!
!
!
PS-10-24
!
PSB-10-24
EAN code
PSB-10-12 8595188145022
PSB-10-24 8595188143783
PS-10-12V 8595188139052
PS-10-24V 8595188139069
Technical parameters:
Input
Voltage range:
Burden without load (max):
Burden with full load (max):
Protection:
Output
Output voltage DC / max. current:
PS-30-12V
PS-30-24V
PS-30-R
PS-100-12V
PS-100-24V
PSB-10-12
PSB-10-24
!
PS-10-12
PS-30-12
PS-10-24
12.2V/0.84A
24V/0.42A
4VA / 1,7W
70VA / 37W
9VA / 1W
10VA/1,5W
70VA / 37W
fuse T2A
24.2V/0.42A
12.2V/2.5A
Tolerance of output voltage:
Output indication:
Wave of off-load output voltage:
Wave of output voltage with max
load:
Time delay after connection:
Time delay after over-load
Overload capacity:
Efficiency:
Electronic fuse:
Other information
Working humidity:
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength input- output:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Polutioon degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Outlets:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
PS-30-R
PS-30-24
AC 100-250V / 50 - 60Hz
AC 184 - 253V/50-60Hz
5VA / 2W
25VA / 13W
fuse T1A
AC 110 - 250V / 50-60Hz
3VA / 0.5W
26VA / 13W
x
12V/0.84A
!
8595188137966
8595188139045
8595188136655
8595188137195
8595188139021
PSB-10: switching stabilized power supplies with fixed output voltage, for mounting into an installation box (such as KU-68)
PSB-10-12 - stabilized power supply 12V/10W
PSB-10-24 - stabilized power supply 24V/10W
PS-10: switching stabilized power supplies with fixed output voltage, version 1-module
PS-10-12 - stabilized power supply 12 V/10 W
PS-10-24 - stabilized power supply 24 V/10 W
PS-30: switching stabilized power supplies, version 3-module
PS-30-12 - stabilized power supply with fixed output voltage 12 V/30 W
PS-30-24 - stabilized power supply with fixed output voltage 24 V/30 W
PS-30-R – stabilized regulated power supply 12-24 V/30 W
PS-100: stabilized power supply with fixed output voltage, version 6-module
PS-100-12 - stabilized power supply 12 V/100 W
PS-100-24 - stabilized power supply 24 V/100 W
Output current is limited by electronic fuse, in case maximal current is exceeded, the device switches off and after a
shot time interval it again switches on.
Indication of output voltage by green LED on front panel (except PSB-10)
Temperature protection – if temperature is exceeded, the device switches off and after cooled down, it switches
on again
12.2V/2.5A
24.2V/1.25A
24.2V/1.25A
PS-100-24
PS-100-12
AC 184-253V/50-60Hz
6VA / 2W
195VA / 118W
fuse T 3.15A
12.2V/8.4A
24.2V/4.2A
± 2%
green LED
40mV
80mV
30mV
40mV
55mV
380mV
20mV
80mV
max. 1s
max. 1s
max. 120% of rated output
500mV
5mV
> 75%
> 75%
>82%
>81%
>82%
electronic protections short-circuit, over load, over voltage
20 .. 90% RH
-20 °C to +40 °C (-4 °F to 104°F)
-40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to 185 °F)
4kV
IP40 device/ IP20 in-built in distribution board
II.
1
solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x1.5
x
90 x 52 x 65 mm
90 x 52 x 65 mm
158 g
158 g
158 g
EN 61558-1, EN 61010-1, EN 61558-2-17
IP30
x
solid wire CY, Ø 4x0.75mm2, 90mm
48 x 48 x 21 mm
70 g
70 g
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm
62 g
62 g
90 x 105 x 65 mm
375 g 363 g
Connection
PSB-10-12
(PSB-10-24)
AC 110-250 V
50 Hz/ 60 Hz
N
L
PS-10-12
(PS-10-24)
AC 184-253 V
50 Hz/ 60 Hz
N
L
PS-30-12
(PS-30-24)
AC 100 - 250 V
50 Hz/ 60 Hz
N
L
T 1A
AC
AC
DC
+
-
DC 12 V / 0.84A
(DC 24 V / 0.42A)
48
AC
-
DC 12 V / 0.84A
(DC 24 V / 0.42A)
AC 100 - 250 V
50 Hz/ 60 Hz
N
L
T 2A
DC
+
PS-30-R
DC
+
-
AC 184-253 V
50 Hz/ 60 Hz
N
L
T 3.15A
T 2A
AC
AC
DC 12 V / 2.5A
(DC 24 V / 1.25A)
PS-100-12
(PS-100-24)
DC
DC
+
-
DC 12 V - 24 V /
2.5 -1.25A
+
-
DC 12 V / 8.4A
(DC 24 V / 4.2A)
Power supplies PS
Connection
PSB-10-12
NOVINKA
PSB-10-12 / PSB-10-24
designated for installation into
an installation box. Suitable for
controlling of lighting sources,
thermo valves, shutter engines, etc.
Neutral
Output voltage
Phase
Output voltage
PS-10-12
PS-30-12
Supply terminals
Supply terminals
L
N
L
N
Output voltage indication
Output voltage
indication
-
+
Output voltage terminals
Output voltage terminals
+
+
+
Output voltage terminals
-
-
\ -
Output voltage terminals
PS-30-R
PS-100-12
Output voltage terminals
Supply terminals
N
-
-
-
-
Supply terminals
N
L
L
Output Indication
voltage of over-load
indication
Setting
output voltage
Output voltage
terminals
+
+
+
+
+
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
Output voltage Output voltage terminals
+
+
+
\ -
-
-
Output voltage terminals
terminals
49
Power supplies DR
!
Stabilized switching power supply
!
Input voltage (Uprim) in a wide range 100 - 240 V AC
!
DR-60-12: power supply with fixed output voltage DC 12 V, stabilized 54 W
!
DR-60-24: power supply with fixed output voltage DC 24 V, stabilized 60 W
!
Max. load 12 V-4.5 A, 24 V-2.5 A
!
Electronic protection of short-circuit, over-loading, over-voltage, fine setting of output voltage by trimmer
in a range ±10%
EAN code
DR-60-12V: 8595188125048
DR-60-24V: 8595188125055
!
LED power indicator light, viewable from the front panel
!
Ambient air cooled through the perforated housing
!
4.5-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, isulation class II
Technical parameters:
Input (U prim)
Voltage range:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Consumption without load (max):
Consumption with full load (max):
Output (Usec)
Output voltage:
Max.load:
Output voltage-no load DC:
Wave of output voltage:
Efficiency:
Tolerance of output voltage:
Electronic fuse:
Fine adjustment of output voltage:
Overloud protection:
Time delay after connection:
Other information
Working humidity:
Thermal coeficient:
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength (prim/sec):
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Symbol
88-264 V AC/ 47-63 Hz nebo 124-370 V DC
in the range of supply voltage
3VA
AC 65 VA
AC 70 VA
12V ±10%
4.5A / 54W
12V ±10%
0.12V
83.5%
24V ±10%
2.5A / 60W
24V ±10%
0.15V
86%
±1 %
electronic protections short-circuit, over load, over voltage
±10 % - trimrem
to 105-160 % of rated output
100 ms for 100% loading and AC 230 V
20 - 90 % RH
0.03 % /°C (0 to 50 °C)/ 0.03 % /°F (32 °F to 122 °F)
-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
-40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to 185 °F) / (10 - 95% RH )
3 kV
IP20 device/ IP40 in-built in distribution board
solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 10)
78 x 93x 56 mm (3.1˝ x 3.7˝ x 2.2˝)
300 g (10.6 oz.)
EN 61010-1, EN 61558-1, EN 61558-2-17
Description
Terminal supply voltage Uprim
Input voltage terminals U DC
+ +
Trimmer for fine setting
of output voltage ±10%
50
N
L
AC
DC
+
-
Connection
DR-60-12
DR-60-24
Uprim
supply voltage
U DC
Output voltage
DC 12 V/4.5 A
DC 24 V/ 2.5 A
AC 100-240 V
DC 124-270 V
NL
++
trimmer for fine
setting
of output voltage
±10%
Power supply ZSR-30, ZNP-10
Regulated stabilized power supply ZSR-30
Supply of various devices and appliances by safe voltage with fully galvanic separation from the main.
! Input voltage: AC 230 V
! Output voltage: DC 5-24 V stab., DC 24 V unstab. and AC 24 V
! Exceeded current limit values is indicated by LED flashing
! When there is full short-circuit, output is disconnected, output current is limited by an electronic fuse
! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
Nonstabilized power supply ZNP-10-12V, ZNP-10-24V
AC and DC output voltage: 12 V or 24 V, nonstabilized
! Power supply with fixed output voltage
! Protection against short-circuit and overload by a safety fuse
! Input voltage: AC 230 V
! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
EAN code
ZNP-10-12V: 8594030332733
ZNP-10- 24V: 8594030334089
ZSR-30: 8594030331750
Technical parameters
Entry (U prim)
Voltage range:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Consumption without load (max):
Consumption with load (max):
Output (Usec)
Output voltage:
Output voltage-no load AC:
Output voltage-no load DC:
Fuse:
Wave of output voltage:
Efficiency:
Tolerance of output voltage:
Electronic fuse:
Other information:
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strenght (prim/sec):
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
ZSR-30
6VA
10VA
ZNP-10-24V
ZNP-10-12V
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
-15 %; +10 %
7 VA
11 VA
Connection
6.5 VA
ZSR -30
PRI
DC 5-24V stab.
DC 24V nonstab.
AC 24V
32V
44V
300 mV
75 %
±5 %
T100 mA/250 V DC 24 V nonstab.
AC 24 V
32 V
44 V
DC 12 V nonstab.
AC 12 V
17 V
22 V
primary wind T100 mA
max.4 V
AC
AC
DC
REG
DC
+ -
max.3 V
SEC
x
x
x
Towards black-out and
and current overloading
АС 230 V
50 Hz / 60 Hz
+ REG
DC
-
ZNP-10
-20.. +40°C (-4 °F to 104 °F)
-20.. +60°C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
4 kV
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
390 g (13.8 oz.)
360 g (13.8 oz.)
360 g (13.8 oz.)
EN 61010-1, EN 61558-2-1. EN 61558-1
PRI
АС 230 V
50 Hz / 60 Hz
T100 mA/250 V AC
DC
+ SEC
DC
+ DC
WARNING! Values of max. load are valid for (operational) temperature.
Total loads on all output terminals may not exceed this values:
by supplying 230 V-253 V – 8W
from 230 V…207 V output power is proportionately decreesing onto 5 W
Description
ZSR-30
Input voltage terminals
ZNP-10-12V
ZNP-10-24V
Input voltage terminals
Output voltage
indication
AC output voltage
AC output voltage
DC nonstabilized output voltage
DC output regulated voltage
DC unregulated output voltage
51
Bell transformers ZTR
!
Designated for general use – e.g. as home bells supply, door locks supply
!
Input voltage: AC 230 V
!
Short-circuit-proof, doubled output terminals
!
2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
ZTR-8-8: output voltage 8 V
ZTR-8-12: output voltage 12 V
!
EAN code
ZTR-8-8V : 8595188136808
ZTR-8-12V: 8595188136815
ZTR-15-12V: 8595188139281
Technical parameters
Entry (U prim)
Voltage range:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Consumption without load (max):
Output (Usec)
Output voltage:
Output voltage-no load AC:
Max.loability:
Fuse:
Other information:
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strenght (prim/sec):
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
52
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
ZTR-15-12: output voltage 4 - 8 -12V
ZTR-8-8
ZTR-8-12
ZTR-15-12
Connection
AC 230 V / 50 Hz
-15 %; +10 %
7.2 VA
AC 8 V
12 V
8 VA
9.4 VA
AC 12 V
16 V
8 VA
short-circ.resistant
ZTR-8-8
± 10 %
3.5 VA
AC 4 V
AC 8 V
AC 12 V
16 V
4V 5VA - 8V 10VA - 12 V 15VA
8V
3
230V ~ 50 Hz
1
N
EN 61558-1, EN 61558-2-8, EN 61558-2-1
L
2
ZTR-8-12
12V
3
-20.. +40°C (-4 °F to 104 °F)
-20.. +60°C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
3.75 kV
IP20/40
solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x1.4˝ x 2.5˝)
350 g (12.3 oz.)
314 g (11.1 oz.)
312 g (11 oz.)
4
4
230V ~ 50 Hz
1
N
L
ZTR-15-12
2
Twilight switches
SOU
62x34x98
IP65
SOU-2
SOU-1
Accessories
of twilight switches:
SOU-3
Twilight switch with digital
time clock.
Voltage range:
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
Output conatct:
1x changeover /SPDT 8 A.
Twilight switch.
Voltage range:
AC 230 V a AC/DC 12-240 V
Output contact:
1x changeover/SPDT 16 A.
Twilight and light
switch
Voltage range:
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
Output conatct:
1x changeover/SPDT 16 A.
Photosensor SKS
Protection degree: IP56.
It is suitable for mounting on the wall or in panel.
Memory relays
MR
MR-41
MR-42
Voltage range:
AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 -240 V
Output contact:
1x changeover/SPDT 16 A.
Voltage range:
AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 -240 V
Output contact:
2x changeover / SPDT 16 A.
Control and signalling devices
USS
SWITCHES,
PUSH BUTTONS
SWITCHES
WITH GLOW LAMP
USS
designated for switching,
controlling and signalling by
auxiliary any power circuits.
SIGNALLING LIGHT
BLIND FLANGE
53
Twilight switch SOU-1
Mounting of photosensor SKS on the wall
EAN codes:
SOU-1 /230V + photosensor SKS: 8595188121002
SOU-1 /UNI + photosensor SKS: 8595188121019
Photosensor SKS: 8594030337288
54
It serves to control lights on the basis of ambient light intensity
!
Used for switching street illumination and garden lights, illumination of advertisements, shop windows, etc.
!
Level of ambient intensity is monitored by an external sensor and output is switched according to set level on the device
!
Control input for additional control, e.g. time switch, preswitch etc.
!
Level of illumination adjustable in two ranges: 1 - 100 Lx and 100 - 50000 Lx
!
Adjustable time delay to eliminate short term fluctuation in illumination
!
External sensor IP56 suitable for mounting on the wall (cover and holder of a sensor are a part of the package)
!
Supply voltage AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 - 240 V
!
Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A
!
Red LED output indication
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
SOU-1
230
UNI
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Power input (apparent/loss):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Time delay:
Time delay setting:
Illumination rang 1):
Illumination rang 2):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Control
Power the control input:
Load between S-A2:
Control. terminals:
Glow tubes connetions:
Max. amount of glow lamps
connected to controlling input:
Impulse length:
Reset time:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Sensor cable length:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions of the sensor:
Weight of sensor:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Mounting of photosensor SKS
into the panel
!
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
0 - 2 min
potentiometer
1 - 100 Lx
100 - 50000 Lx
Symbol
Connection
L
A1
16
N
18
A1 S A2
IN
IN
IN
S A2
15
15 16 18
Function
Description of DIP switch
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO2)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
IN
ambient
light
intensity
DIP 1 - LUX
ON
100 - 50000 Lx
1 - 100 Lx
LEVEL
Hysteresis
A1-A2
DIP 2 - TEST
ON
Lx
ТЕSТ
S
15-18
ТЕSТ ON
NORMAL
t
t
Description
0.8 - 530 mVA (UNI), 0.8 - 530 mVA (AC 230 V)
Yes(UNI, AC 230 V)
A1-S
AC 230 V - Yes / UNI - No
230 V - max. amount 20 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
150 ms
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
max. 50 m (standard wire)
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 10)
see page 133
20 g (0.7 oz.)
90x17.6x64 mm
(UNI) - 75 g (2.6 oz.), (230) - 65 g (2.3 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Supply voltage terminals
Terminals for sensor
A1
S A2
IN
IN
Terminal of blocking input
Output indication
Supply voltage indication
Switch of test function TEST
Setting of level of
illumination
Fine setting of level of
illumination
Setting time delay
15
16
18
Output contact
Twilight switch SOU-2 with digital time switch clock
innovation!
Mounting of photosensor SKS on the wall
!
It serves for control of lights on the basis of ambient light intensity and real time (combination of SOU-1
A1 A2 T1 T1
and time switch clock SHT-1 in one device)
15 16 18
EAN code
SOU-2 /230V + photosensor SKS: 8595188130523
photosensor SKS: 8594030337288
SOU-2 : 85957888121644
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Back-up supply:
Typ záložní baterie:
Summer/winter time:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Switching voltage:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time circuit
Power back-up:
Accuracy:
Minimum interval:
Data stored for:
Program circuit
Illumination range:
Program place number:
Program period:
Data readout:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Dimensions of the sensor:
Weight:
Weight sensor:
Standards:
!
Time clock can override the light sensor for applications when lights are not required
!
Adjustable light intensity 1-50000 lx
!
Function „random switching“ enables simulation of presence in a house when nobody is at home
!
Switching: according to a program (AUTO) / permanently manual / random (CUBE)
!
External sensor IP56 issuitable for mounting on the wall/ in panel ( cover and sensors are part of delivery)
!
easy replacement of backup battery with plug-in module located on front panelof device (no disassembly required)
!
2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Mounting
of photosensor SKS into the panel
SOU-2
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
max. 4 VA
-15 %; +10 %
yes
CR 2032 (3V)
automatic
Symbol
Connection
external sensor
A1
3 years
max. ±1 s day (23 °C/ 73.4 °F )
1 min
min. 10 years
1-50000 Lx
100
daily, weekly
LCD display, illuminated by back up
-10 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x1.5
(AWG 12)
90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 1.4˝ x 2.5˝)
see page 119
110 g (3.9 oz.)
20 g (0.7 oz.)
EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1, EN 60255-6
18
16
A1 A2 T1 T1
T1
T1
15
A2
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO2)
8 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
250 V AC1 / 30 V DC
1x107
1x105
Un
15 16 18
Description of visual elements on the display
Displaying the day
Status indication
Auto + t
Prog
Operation mode indication
Man
Displays 12/24 hour mode
Indication of the switching
program
Display of date / the lighting
setup menu
Time display
Control button PRG / +
Reset
Control button ESC
SOU-2
Control button OK
Control button MAN1 / -
Description
Sensor-Terminal
Supply voltage terminal (A1)(A2)
A1 A2 T1 T1
Auto
Backlight display
SOU-2
OK
MAN
RESET
PRG +
Controlling buttons
ESC
_
Lead-sealing point
Plug-in module:
15 16 18
Plug-in module for replacement
of the backup battery
Output - Channel 1(15-16-18)
with battery backup
without battery backup
55
Twilight switch SOU-3
! It serves as control of the device on the basis of ambient light intensity
! External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall, front cover removable without screws
98x62x34
IP65
! Built in high resolution light sensor
! Two devices in one, function is set by jumper:
- twilight switch – contact closes by decreasing of ambient light intensity, and opens by its increasing
- light switch – contact closes by increasing ambient light intensity, and opens by decreasing light
intensity. Used for switching of devices by reaching of pre-set ambient light level, usually sun
shine(pulling down the shutters or blinds, activation of solar panels)
adjustable (by jumper) ranges of light level
! 3 adjustable levels of time delay (for elimination of short-term fl uctuations of light intensity – for short
increases in light intensity)
! Supply voltage 230 V AC
! Potential-free output contact 12A/AC1 switching
EAN code
SOU-3 /230V: 8595188140560
Technical parameters
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Input (apparent/loss):
Setting the scale level of lighting:
Function (twilight switch)
- range 1:
- range 2:
- range 3:
Function (light switch)
- range 1:
- range 2:
- range 3:
Setting function
Level of light-slight:
Slight setting of light level:
Time delay t:
Delay setting t:
Output
Output contact:
Current rating:
Switching output:
Peak current:
Switched voltage:
Min.switching output:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life:
Other information:
Operation temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh:
Operation position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution level:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Suggested power-supply cable:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
SOU-3
L-N
AC 230V / 50 - 60Hz
- 15% .. +10%
max 6VA / 0.7W
by jumper J2
Description (proportion is accordant to real size)
Cable gommet M16x1.5
for cable max. Ø 10mm/ 0.4”
Hole for mounting on
the wall Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2”
1 ... 10 Lx
10 ... 100 Lx
100 ... 1.000 Lx
100 ... 1 000 Lx
1 000 ... 10 000 Lx
10 000 ... 100 000 Lx
by jumper J3
0.1 ... 1 x range
potenciometer
0 / 1 min. / 2 min.
by jumper J1
SOU-3
L
N
L
15
18
J1
Delay
(min)
1 x NO- SPST (AgSnO2)
12 A / AC1
3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC / 24 V DC
500 mW
3 x 107
0.7 x 105
J2
Adjustable range
setting (Lx)
10
100
1.000
0
1
2
J3
Function
light switch
twilight switch
1.000
10.000
100.000
Slight setup finish in the frame of range
-30 °C to +60 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4kV (supply-output)
sensor-side down or on the sides
IP65
III.
2
max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12)
CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY4x1.5)
98 x 62 x 34 mm (3.9˝ x 2.4˝ x 1.3˝)
122 g ( 4.3 oz.)
EN 60255-6, 61010-1
Hole for mounting on
the wall Ø4.3mm/ 0.2”
Sensor of ambient light
Connection
L
N
L
N
potentialless
NO contacts
jumper for L
potential
L
15
18
Function
Actual
illumination level
Setup
illumination level
Solid
hysteresis 12%
L
N
3- wiring connection
L-N
Function
twilight switch
15 - 18
Function
light switch
15 - 18
56
t
t
t
t
t
Device is standardly supplied with jumper L-15 (3-wire connection).
For the correct function of device is neccesary sensor-side down device mounting.
L
15
18
L
N
4- wiring connection
Memory & latching relays MR-41, MR-42
EAN code
MR-41 /230V
MR-41 /UNI
MR-42 /230V
MR-42 /UNI
8595188115889
8595188115896
8595188115902
8595188115919
Technical parameters
Number of functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Voltage range:
Consumption (apparent/loss):
Supply voltage tolerance:
Supply indication:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Controlling
Consumption of input:
Load between A2-ON/OFF:
Control. terminals:
Glow tubes connetions:
Max. amount of glow lamps
connected to controlling input:
Impulse length:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting/DIN rail:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
Latching relays, controlled by buttons from several locations can replace three way switches or cross bar switches
thanks to control by buttons (unlimited number, connected in parallel by 2 wires), installation gets more transparent
and faster for mounting
!
Relay MR-41/UNI, MR-42/UNI memorize its last state even after supply failure. During the failure relay will turn off and
after re-energizing will automatically turns on.
!
MR-41
- output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A
!
MR-42
- options - 2x parallel contacts or the other relay is latching
- function selected via external jumper between B1 - B2
- output contact: 2x changeover /SPDT 16 A
!
Supply voltage AC 230 V or AC/DC 12-240 V
!
1-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting, controlling by buttons
MR-42
MR-41
2
A1 - A2
AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
AC 0.17 - 3 VA / DC 0.1 - 1.2 W
AC 0.17 - 12 VA / DC 0.11 - 1.9 W
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
AC max. 12 VA / 1.2 W
AC max. 12 VA / 1.9 W
-15 %; +10 %
green LED
Symbol
1
2x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO2)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / <3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x10 7
0.7x10 5
MR-42
MR-41
12
A1
14
11
ON/OFF A2
12
A1
14
11
ON/OFF A2
22
24
21
1x changeover / SPDT (AgSnO2)
Connection
MR-41
L
N
L
N
+
A1
+
A1
ON
OFF
A2
B1
AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI), AC 0.53 VA (AC 230 V)
Yes
A1 - ON/OFF
Yes
230V - max. amount 5 pcs
(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)
min. 25 ms / max. unlimited
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
(UNI) - 62 g, (230) - 60 g
(UNI) - 89 g, (230) - 85 g
EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1
MR-42
ON
OFF
A2
B2
21 22 24
11 12 14
11 12 14
Function
MR-41
A1 - A2
ON/OFF
11 - 14
MR-42
A1 - A2
ON/OFF
11 - 14
B1
B2
B1
B2
21 - 24
11 - 14
21 - 24
57
Controlling and signalling modules USS
! Independent switch units designed for flexible controlling and switching of power circuits
! USS - “Do It Yourself” = it is possible to “click into” different types of switches and
signalling units into the basic module
! Units are delivered as components and configured by the user
! 15 types of units: switches, push buttons, signal lights of different colours including flashing lights
units are replaceable also for future (for example when an application is changed, extended, etc...)
! It is possible to place up to two units into one MODULE (for example 2x switch,
2x signalling lights or combinations) = saves space in switchboard panels
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
! Operating temperature
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
! M3 screw with clamp terminals
Units
A3
(A13)
USS-02
A3
(A13)
USS-03
A3
(A13)
USS-04
A3
(A13)
USS-05
A3
(A13)
A1
(A12)
A1
(A12)
A2
(A11)
A1
(A12)
A2
(A11)
A1
(A12)
A2
(A11)
A1
(A12)
6A / 250 V AC
Switch
8 A / 250 V AC
Alternation switch
6 A / 250 V AC
Switch with cental position
6 A / 250 V AC
Switch + button with central position
6 A / 250 V AC
Switching button with central position
A1
(A12)
8 A / 250 V AC
NO switch
A3
USS-06/R(A13)
A1
(A12)
8 A / 250 V AC
NC switch
A3
(A13)
A1
(A12)
10 A / 250 V AC
Switch with glow lamp (red)
10 A / 250 V AC
Switch with glow lamp (green)
10 A / 250 V AC
Switch with glow lamp (yellow)
A2
(A11)
A3
(A13)
A1
(A12)
A2
(A11)
A3
(A13)
A1
(A12)
A2
(A11)
A1-A2. AC 250 V Signalling LED (red)
A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V
A1
(A11)
A3
(A13)
A2
(A12)
USS-11
A1
(A11)
A3
(A13)
A2
(A12)
USS-12
A1
(A11)
A3
(A13)
A2
(A12)
A1-A2. AC 250 V Signalling LED (yellow)
A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V
USS-13
A1
(A11)
A3
(A13)
A2
(A12)
A1-A2. AC 250 V Signalling LED (white)
A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V
USS-14
A1
(A11)
A3
(A13)
A2
(A12)
A1-A2. AC 250 V Signalling LED flashing (red)
A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V
A1
(A11)
A3
(A13)
A2
(A12)
A1-A2. AC 250 V Signalling LED (blue)
A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V
USS-15
58
A3
A1-A2. AC 250 V Signalling LED (green)
A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V
USS - ZM
+ USS - 07
+ USS - 11
A1
A2
SWITCHES, PUSH BUTTONS
They have a low uplift and a large
fingerboard. High quality contacts, easy rock
switch and large button area provide years
of useful life.
Unit: 01-06
SWITCHES WITH GLOW LAMP
Switch and signalization in one unit.
Signalization is carried out by a glow lamp
in dolly including series resistance. It is
possible to instal it for permanent indication
or for an intermittend by contact of the
switch.
Colours: red, green, yellow.
Supply voltage of the signalling light:
AC 250 V.
A2
(A11)
A3
USS-06/S(A13)
USS-10
Example of an order:


USS-01
USS-09
BLIND FLANGE
Used to fill in an empty position in the front
panel of the USS Module
Color: Grey, RAL7035 (the same as the
housing).
Unit: 00
Blind flange
USS-00
USS-08
8595188124577
8595188124614
8595188124621
8595188124638
8595188124645
8595188124652
8595188124669
8595188124676
8595188136372
8595188124683
8595188124690
8595188124706
8595188124331
8595188124348
8595188124355
8595188124362
8595188124898
8595188124379
Make your own device USS - easy and intelligent solution!
RATED CURRENT/VOLTAGE
FOR SWITCHES SUPPLY
CONNECTION INDICATION VOLTAGE FOR SIGNALLING DESCRIPTION
LIGHTS
Basic MODULE (housing with terminals
USS-ZM
MODUL
and contacts)
USS-07
EAN code
USS-ZM
USS-00
USS-01
USS-02
USS-03
USS-04
USS-05
USS-06/S
USS-06/R
USS-07
USS-08
USS-09
USS-10
USS-11
USS-12
USS-13
USS-14
USS-15
SIGNALLING LIGHT
High luminescence SMD/LED that
illuminates the entire button area surface.
Input voltage can be either AC 230 V or AC/
DC 24 V (output light may vary).
Red sig. light is delivered also in a flashing
version.Unit: 14.
Colours: red, green, yellow, white, blue
Unit: 10-15
Terminal connection
A3
Max. number of symbols:
8
4
A12
Dimensions
See page 117-121
APEM
A 13
UL
Switches and buttons are marked by laser according to your request in
case you order 50 pcs and more.
A1
A13
A 11
Laser marking
A2
A11
A 12
4
8
Monitoring relays
Voltage
Current
V
AC
HRN-33(HRN-63)
Supply and monitored voltage in range
AC 48-276 V, 1x output for Umax and
Umin adjustable level.
HRN-35
as HRN-33 but individual output for each
level ( Umax/Umin). Adjustable time
delay to eliminate voltage peaks.
Power factor
cos-φ
Frequency
Hz
Hz
3 phase
1 phase
AC/DC
Level
A
AC
HRN-41 (Hysteresis)
HRN-55
Monitoring DC and AC voltage
10-500 V, divided into 3 inputs and
3 ranges, 2 independent outputs 16 A,
2x time delay.
HRN-55N
AC/ DC
supply from all phases
supply L1-N (monitors also disconnection
of neutral wire) Time delay to eliminate
peaks.
HRN-42 (Window)
HRN-57
as HRN-41 but function WINDOW. Other
functions (applicable for HRN-41): faulty
state memory, hysteresis, galv. separated
supply AC 230, 400, or AC/DC 24 V.
HRN-57N
supply from all phases
PRI-32
PRI-41 (Hysteresis)
monitoring by current transformer
(wire through an opening, galv.
separated, without heat loss), adjust.
current 1-20A, multivoltage
AC 24-240 and DC 24V, output 8A
changeover.
3 inputs (0,4-1,6, 1,25-5, 4-16A)
divided into 3 ranges (selectable by
a switch).
HRH-5
Replacemat for HRH-2,
simple version , 2 functions,
galvanically separated supply
voltage UNI 24.. 240 V AC/DC
HRF-10
COS-1
monitors and scores power factor
(phase shift between current and
voltage cos φ) in 3phase/1phase
circuits (motors, pumps etc.).
for monitoring the frequency
of AC voltage. The monitored
frequency 50/60/400 Hz is
selected by a switch.
supply L1-N (monitos also neutral wire
disconnection)
Adjustable voltage level.
HRN-37 (HRN-67)
as HRN-33(63), but in voltage range
AC 24-150 V.
HRN-34(HRN-64)
HRN-54
as HRN-33(63) but in voltage range
DC 6-30 V for monitoring battery circuits
( 6,12,24 V).
HRN-54N
supply from all phases
supply L1-N (monitors also disconection
of neutral wire).All parameters adjustable by potentiometers.
PRI-51
HRN-56
adjustable level Umin
HRN-56/120
monitoring of current by in-built transformer,
5 ranges (in versions 1/2/5/8/16A), range
5A is suitable for current transformer
(X/5), supply and output as PRI-32,
difference from PRI-32: direct monitoring
and finer ranges (higher sensitivity) =
higher accuracy in measuring.
PRI-42 (Window)
as PRI-41 but function “WINDOW”.
HRH-1
4 functions, advanced setting for various
combinations, galvanically separated
supply AC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V,
2 output contacts/2PDT 16A.
HRN-56/208
HRN-56/240
HRN-56/400
HRN-56/480
HRN-56/575
PRI-52
For scanning the current up to 25 A. Long
distance device diagnostics (black-out,
increasement of take-off )
Priority relay
Supplying voltage AC 230 V
Output 8A/ SPST switching over
HRH-6
HRH-6/S
Device monitors 5 levels by using six
probes. Supply voltage: 12-24 V DC or
galvanically separated 230 V AC.
Additional signalization to HRH-6
with 6 control lights on the front
panel of device.
Level switches accessories:
HRN-43
HRN-43N
galvanically separated supply AC 230V,
AC 400 or AC/DC 24V, memory, adjustable hysteresis and delay,
2 x independent output.
Level sensors SHR
PRI-53
MPS-1
Optical signaling of three-phase network.
for monitoring the current in three-phase
devices. Power supply: 24-240 V AC/DC,
galvanically separated from the circuit of
the monitored current 2 types depending
on the strength of rated current In (1A, 5A)
HRH-4
a set of level relay HRH-5 and
a contactor VS425.
For automatic operation
1-phase and 3-phase
pumps. 2 function. IP55.
SHR-1(M, N) - for monitoring flooding
SHR-2- for level detection
SHR-3 - for demanding and industrial environment
59
Monitoring relays review
Relays monitor voltage



62
HRN-35
1-M
from
monitored
1
AC 48 - 276 V



62
from
monitored
1
AC 230V
AC 110V
AC 400V
AC/DC 24V
3
HRN-43N/230V
HRN-43N/110V
HRN-43N/400V
HRN-43N/24V
3-M
AC 230V
AC-110V
AC 400V
AC/DC 24V
3
HRN-55
1-M
HRN-55N
1-M
HRN-56/120
HRN-56/208
HRN-56/240
HRN-56/400
1-M
HRN-56/480
HRN-56/575
3-M
















AC 3 x 172 - 287 V



3
AC 3 x 300 - 500 V
3
3
from
monitored
3
from
monitored

2 output relays, functions of the second relay may be selected (independent/parallel)
Galvanically separated power supply
68
3
from
monitored

AC 3 x 48 - 276 V
3
AC 3 x 172 - 287 V
AC 3 x 300 - 500 V
AC 3 x 172 - 287 V
AC 3 x 72 - 160 V
AC 3 x 125 - 276 V
AC 3 x 144 - 276 V
AC 3 x 240 - 460 V
AC 3 x 228 - 550 V
AC 3 x 345 - 660 V




Power supply from all phases, i.e. the relay function is preserved even if
one phase fails
Power supply L1-N, i.e. the relay also monitors the neutral wire interruption
Power supply from all phases, i.e. the relay function is preserved even if
one phase fails

Power supply L1-N, i.e. the relay also monitors the neutral wire interruption, replacement for HRN-52

If the supply voltage falls below 60% of Un (OFF lower level), the relay will
immediately disconnects with no delay
Power supply from all phases, i.e. the relay function is preserved even if
one phase fails


If the supply voltage falls below 60% of Un (OFF lower level), the relay will
immediately disconnects with no delay
Power supply L1-N, i.e. the relay also monitors the neutral wire interruption










60
Type
HRH-1/230V
HRH-1/110V
HRH-1/400V
HRH-1/24V
3-M
from
monitored
AC 3 x 50 - 253 V




HRH-4/230V
HRH-4/24V
64
65
May be used for scanning the current from the external current
transformer - up to 600A
73
Monitors the drop in the strength of current below the preset value
Monitors exceeding the preset value
74
Setting
Description



Set
AC 230 V
AC/DC 24 V




HRH-5
1-M
AC/DC
24-240 V



HRH-6/AC
HRH-6/DC
box
IP65
AC 230 V
AC/DC 12-24V

*

Sensitivity adjustable by potentiometer.
Galvanically separated power supply
78

Unit with no protection devices - adequate protection element needs to be
integrated before the unit. Ingress protection of the assembly is IP55
82


Measuring the frequency of 10 Hz will protect liquid from polarisation and
measuring probes from increased oxidation
Galvanically separated power supply
77


* devices mainly designated for monitoring water level in
fire-engine tanks
80
Relay for factor cos-φ monitoring
65
66
Type
66
Monitoring values

COS-1/230V
COS-1/110V
COS-1/400V
COS-1/24V
3-M
AC 230V
AC 110V
AC 400V
AC/DC 24V
Monitoring values
Setting
3
Description
0.1 - 0.99
Two output relays, one independent relay for each level
Galvanically separated power supply





84
67


Thanks to the power supply from all three phases, the relay is operational
even if one phase fails
Relay for frequency monitoring
67




HRF-10
3


Type
1-M
AC 3 x 0.4 - 1.2 A
AC 3 x 2 - 6 A
AC 230 V
AC 110 V
AC 400 V
AC/DC 24 V
64
Signal relays
MPS-1

Level switches
68
from
monitored
from
monitored
Second relay function (independent/parallel)
Galvanically separated power supply from measuring inputs
AC 3 x
84 - 480 V

3
3
61

from
monitored
1-M


1-M
HRN-54N


HRN-57N
1-M

AC 3 x 300 - 500 V
from
monitored
HRN-54

3
1-M
AC/DC
24-240 V

61

from
monitored
HRN-57
6-M

Page
3-M
PRI-53/1
PRI-53/5
AC 0.5 - 25 A
72
Page
HRN-43/230V
HRN-43/110V
HRN-43/400V
HRN-43/24V
AC/DC
10 - 50 V
32 - 160 V
100 - 500 V
1
May be used for scanning the current from the current transformer - up to 600A
Power supply is galvanically separated from the measured current



Optical signaling of three-phase network
70
3-M
AC
161 - 346V
Monitoring values
1
40 - 60 Hz
48 - 72 Hz
320 - 480 Hz
Setting






Description
Page
1
AC 230 V
Memory
Errors
AC 230V
AC 110V
AC 400V
AC/DC 24V
1-M
Frekvence
<
3-M
PRI-52

Function
HRN-42/230V
HRN-42/110V
HRN-42/400V
HRN-42/24V
62

Hysteresis
AC/DC
10 - 50 V
32 - 160 V
100 - 500 V



Frekvence
>
1

75

The adjustable delay for elimination of short-term outages and peaks for
every level
Galvanically separated power supply

Delay
AC 230V
AC 110V
AC 400V
AC/DC 24V
62

Hysteresis
3-M


75

The adjustable delay for elimination of short-term outages and peaks for
every level
Galvanically separated power supply
Sensitivity
Probe
HRN-41/230V
HRN-41/110V
HRN-41/400V
HRN-41/24V
 

< cos φ
AC 24 - 150 V
62

> cos φ
1



71
Delay
from
monitored



Delay
1-M
AC 0.05 - 0.5 A
AC 0.1 - 1 A
AC 0.2 - 2 A
AC 0.5 - 5 A
AC 0.8 - 8 A
AC 1.6 - 16 A

Exceeding the current value - the current flowing through the monitored
conductor must not exceed 100 A even on a short-term basis
Frekvence
<
HRN-67
1
Level min.
DC 6 - 30 V
AC 24-240 V
DC 24 V


Frekvence
>
1
1-M
Level max.
from
monitored
PRI-51/0.5
PRI-51/1
PRI-51/2
PRI-51/5
PRI-51/8
PRI-51/16
62

cos φ
range
1-M
AC/DC 0.12 - 1.6 A
AC/DC 0.375 - 5 A
AC/DC 1.2 - 16 A
Frequency
Range
HRN-64

1
Phases
AC 48 - 276 V
AC 230 V
AC/DC 24 V
Phases
1
3-M
Supply voltage
from
monitored

PRI-42/230V
PRI-42/24V
Supply voltage
1-M

AC/DC 0.12 - 1.6 A
AC/DC 0.375 - 5 A
AC/DC 1.2 - 16 A
Supply voltage
HRN-63

1
Design
AC 24 - 150 V
AC 230 V
AC/DC 24 V
Design
1-M
3-M
Design
HRN-37
For all types, the delay is adjustable from 0 - 10 seconds (to eliminate
short-term outages or peaks)
The lower voltage level (Umin) is set in % of the upper level (Umax)
PRI-41/230V
PRI-41/24V

Page
DC 6 - 30 V
AC 1-20 A
<I
1
1
>I
from
monitored
AC 24-240 V
DC 24 V
Description
Memory
Errors
1-M
1-M
Hysteresis
HRN-34
PRI-32
Delay
62
<I

Type
Setting
>I

Rozsah

Phases
AC 48 - 276 V
Page
1
Monitoring values
Design
Memory
Errors
Hysteresis
from
monitored
Delay
<U
Asymmetry
>U
1-M
Failure
Phases
HRN-33
Range
Voltage
Description
Design
Type
Nastavení
Phase sequence
Secure variables
Supply voltage
Relay for current monitor
Switchable ranges of rated frequency
85
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-41, HRN-42
! Monitoring DC / AC 1-phase in 3 ranges
! Monitoring voltage with 2 independent levels (overvoltage / undervoltage)
! Two versions,
HRN-41: Function “HYSTERESIS” a HRN-42: Function “WINDOW”
! “MEMORY” function - manual reset key on frontal panel
! function of second relay (independent/parallel)
! Adjustable delay for short peaks
EAN code
HRN-41 /110V
HRN-41 /230V
HRN-41 /400V
HRN-41 /24V
HRN-42 /110V
HRN-42 /230V
HRN-42 /24V
! Galvanically separated supply voltage
8595188140430
8595188140409
8595188121521
8595188140416
8595188140478
8594030337653
8594030338070
Technical parameters
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring
Ranges:
Terminals:
Input resistance:
Max. permanent overload:
Peak overload <1ms:
Time delay for Umax:
Time delay for Umin:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Dependance on temperature:
Tolerance of limit values:
Hysteresis (from fault to normal):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
! Output contact: 1x changeover/SDPT 16 A / 250 V AC1 for all monitored levels
! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
HRN-41
HRN-42
A1 - A2
AC 110 V, AC 230 V, AC 400 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC 50-60Hz)
max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
Description
Measured voltage AC or DC
MEMORY function
Function of 2nd relay
(1st-paralel, 2nd-independent)
Hysteresis from faulty to OK normal state
Supply indication
Adjusting upper level
- Umax
Indication Umax
10 - 50 V (AC 50Hz) 32 - 160 V (AC 50Hz) 100 - 500 V (AC 50Hz)
C - B1
C - B2
C - B3
110 kΩ
360 kΩ
1.1 MΩ
100 V
300 V
600 V
1 kVV
250 V
700 V
adjustable, 0 -10 s
adjustable, 0 -10 s
5%
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5%
selectable 5 % / 10 %
2x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
yellow LED
3x107
0.7x105
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
239 g (8.4 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
t1 - time delay for Umax
Output indication
t2 - time delay for Umin
Indication Umin
Adjusting bottom level - Umin
Symbol
Connection
Uin100-500
32-160
Un
10-50
A1
C
B1
B2
B3
16
18 26
28
A1 A2 C
~~
A2
15
B1 B2 B3
25
16 15 18 28 25 26
Function
Un
Umax
Uin
Umin
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
15-18
25-28
15-18
25-28
RESET
LED > U
LED < U
LED
MEMORY-ON (DIP2)
Relay is delivered in two versions – according to the way of setting and monitoring voltage levels.
HRN-41 has function Hysteresiss, which means that only upper level is set ( Umax) and lower level (Umin) is
set in % from upper level. Therefore lower level automatically changes when changing upper level.
HRN-42 has function “WINDOW”, which means that upper level (Umax) and lower level (Umin) are set independently in % from rated monitores range.
Both types have choice of function MEMORY, in case the relay gets into a faulty state it keeps output in this state until it is reset by button RESET. DIP switch No.3 can be used to choose if relays should switch
individually for each level or in parallel in case any level of voltage is overrun. DIP switch No.4 serves to set hysteresis which applies when going from normal state to a faulty one.
Relay has protection against polarity reversing for DC voltage or incorrectly chosen AC-DC voltage (this fault is indicated by flasching of both LEDs ( LED <U a LED >U).
61
Monitoring voltage relay line HRN-3x and HRN-6x
It serves to control supply voltage for appliances sensitive to supply tolerance, protection of the device against under/over voltage
HRN-3x is band voltage relay, HRN-6x is over/under voltage relay. For difference - see graph of function
HRN-33, HRN-63 - monitors voltage in range AC 48 - 276 V
- U max and U min can be monitored independently
HRN-34, HRN-64 - like HRN-33, but voltage range is DC 6 - 30 V
- monitoring of battery circuits (12, 24 V)
HRN-35 - like HRN-33, but independent output relays for each voltage level
- switching of other loads possible
HRN-37, HRN-67 - like HRN-33, monitors voltage in range AC 24 -150 V
- it is possible to monitor level of overvoltage and undervoltage independently
! Adjustable time delay for all types is 0 - 10 s (to eliminate short voltage drops or peaks)
! Voltage Umin adjusted as % of Umax
! 3-state indication - LEDs indicating normal state and 2 fault states
! Supply from monitored voltage (monitors level of its own supply)
! 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
!
EAN code
HRN-33
HRN-34
HRN-35
HRN-37
HRN-63
HRN-64
HRN-67
8595188115636
8595188115643
8595188115650
8595188130615
8595188130622
8595188130639
8595188130646
Technical parameters
Supply and measuring
Terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Upper level (Umax):
Bottom level (Umin):
Max. permanent:
Peak overload <1ms:
Time delay:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Dependance on temperature:
Tolerance of limit values:
Hysteresis (from fault to normal):
Output - Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
HRN-33/ HRN-63
HRN-34/ HRN-64
HRN-35
A1 - A2
AC 48 - 276 V / 50Hz
AC max. 1.2 VA
AC 160 - 276 V
30 - 95 % Umax
AC 276 V
AC 290 V
A1 - A2
DC 6 - 30 V
DC max. 1.2 VA
DC 18 - 30 V
35 - 95 % Umax
DC 36 V
DC 50 V
A1 - A2
AC 48 - 276 V / 50Hz
AC max. 1.2 VA
AC 160 - 276 V
30 - 95 % Umax
AC 276 V
AC 290 V
HRN-37/ HRN-67
A1 - A2
AC 24-150 V / 50Hz
AC max. 1.2 VA
AC 80-150 V
30 - 95 % Umax
AC 276 V
AC 290 V
adjustable 0 - 10 s
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
5%
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5%
2 - 6 % of adjusted value (only HRN-33, HRN-34, HRN-35, HRN-37)
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 1x chang. for each level of voltage,(AgNi)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red/ green LED
3x107
0.7x105
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
73 g (2.6 oz.)
85 g (3 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
61 g (2.2 oz.)
Symbol
61 g (2.2 oz.)
Connection
Un
Un
Un
-
+
HRN-33, HRN-37.
HRN-63, HRN-67
A1
HRN-34, HRN-64
16
18
A1
HRN-33, HRN-37.
HRN-63, HRN-67
HRN-35
16
18
A1
16
18
26
A1
A2
HRN-34,
HRN-64
A1
A2
HRN-35
A1
A2
28
25 26 28
15 16 18
A2
62
15
A2
15
A2
15
25
15 16 18
15 16 18
Monitoring voltage relay line HRN-3x and HRN-6x
Indication LED
HRN-34
HRN-33, HRN-37
HRN-35
HRN-64
HRN-63, HRN-67
Normal state
Umin<Un<Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Normal state
Umin<Un<Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)
Un>Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = ON
Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)
Drop below Umin(undervoltage)
Un>Umax or Un<Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = ON
Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)
Drop below Umin(undervoltage)
Un>Umax or Un<Umax
Green LED = OFF
Red LED = ON
Drop below Umin(undervoltage)
Un<Umin
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Normal state
Umin<Un<Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)
Un>Umax
Green LED = ON
Red LED = ON
Drop below Umin(undervoltage)
Un<Umin
Green LED = OFF
Red LED = ON
Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)
Un>Umax
Green LED = OFF
Red LED = ON
Drop below Umin(undervoltage)
Un<Umin
Green LED = ON
Red LED = OFF
Description
HRN-33, HRN-37
HRN-63, HRN-67
Supply/monitoring voltage
A1
Supply/monitoring voltage
HRN-35
A1
A2
A2
Indication
Indication
Adjusting of upper value Umax
Adjusting of delay
Adjusting of upper value Umax
Adjusting of delay
Adjusting of bottom value Umin
Adjusting of bottom value Umin
25
15
16
15
18
Output contact
16
26
28
Output contact for Umin
18
Output contact for Umax
Function HRN-33, 34, 35, 37 (band voltage relay)
HRN-34
HRN-33,HRN-37
Hysteresis
Monitoring relay series HRN-3x monitors level of voltage in single - phase circuits. Monitored voltage
serves also as supply voltage. It is possible to set two indipendent (all occurrences) levels of voltage,
when exceeded the output is activated. HRN-33 and HRN-34 - in normal state the output relay is
Hysteresis
permanently switched. It switches off when there is a limit settings. This combination of linkage of
the output relay is advantageous when the full failure of supply (monitored) voltage is considered to
be a faulty state in the same way as a decrease of voltage within the set level. Output relay is in both
situations always switched off .
Differently HRN-35 version uses indipendent relay for each level, in normal state it is switched off. If
the upper level is exceeded (for example overvoltage) 1 relay switches on, when the bottom level (e.g.
Legend:
undervoltage) is exceeded 2 relay switches. It is thus possible to see the particular faulty state.
To eliminate short peaks in the main the time delay, which is possible to be set in range 0 - 10 s, is
Umax - upper adjustable level of voltage
used. It functions when changing from normal to faulty state and prevents unavailing pulsation of
Un - measured voltage
Umin - bottom adjustable level of voltage the output relay caused by parasitive peaks. Time delay doesn´t apply when changing from faulty
15-18 - switching contact of output relay No.1 to normal state, but hysteresis (1-6% depends on the voltage setting) apply. Thanks to changeover
25-28 - switching contact of output relay No. 2 contacts it is possible to get other confi gurations and functions according to actual requirements of
the application.
LED ≥ Un - indication green
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
>
HRN-35
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
LED U
>
- indication red
Function HRN-63, 64, 67 (over/under voltage relay)
HRN-63, 64, 67
Monitoring relay line HRN-6x serves to monitor levels of voltage in single-phase or DC circuits.
Monitored voltage is in the same time also supply voltage. It is possible to set two indipendent levels
Umax - upper adjustable level of voltage of voltage. When Umax is exceeded, output is activated. In case voltage level falls below Umin, output
is deactivated. This combination is advantageous when full absence of supply voltage is understood as
Un - measured voltage
Umin - bottom adjustable level of voltage faulty state. as well as voltage drop in the frames of set level. To eliminate short voltage peaks in the
15-18 - switching contact of output relay main there is time delay which can be set in a range of 0-10 sec. Such delay applies in case of going
LED U> - indication red LED
from overvoltage to undervoltage. In case of returning from undervoltage to overvoltage this delay
doesn’t apply. Thanks to changeover output contacts it is possible to reach various configurations and
functions according to requirements or an application.
Legend:
63
Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-55, HRN-55N
!
Replacement for HRN-51 and HRN -51N
!
Relay monitors phase sequence and failure, exceeding of monitored voltage in 3 phase main
!
HRN-55 - supply from all phases, which means that function of relay is applicable also if one phase fails
!
HRN-55N - supply L1-N, it means that relay also monitors break of neutral point
!
Fixed delay T1 (500ms) and adjustable delay T2 (0.1-10s)
!
Faulty state is indicated by LED and output contact of relay is OFF.
!
Output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
HRN-55 8595188137225
HRN-55N 8595188137232
Technical parameters
Monitoring terminals:
Supply terminals:
Voltage:
Level Umax:
Level Umin:
Burden:
Hysteresis:
Max. permanent:
Peak overload <1ms:
Time delay T1:
Time delay T2:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
HRN-55
HRN-55N
L1, L2, L3
L1, L2, L3
3x400 V / 50 Hz
Description
L1, L2, L3,N
L1, N
3x400V/230V / 50 Hz
L1
L3
L2
Indication
125 % Un
75% Un
max. 2 VA
5%
AC 3x460 V
AC 3x500 V
Supply/monitoring terminals
Adjusting of time delay T2
AC 3x265 V
AC 3x288 V
max. 500 ms
adjustable 0.1-10 s
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
10 A
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
1x107
1x105
16
Symbol
Connection
HRN-55
HRN-55
16
L1
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 ( AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
67 g (2.36 oz.)
66 g (2.3 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
18
15
Output contact
3~
HRN-55N
18
U
L2
L3
15
L1
L2
HRN-55N
16
L1 N
3~
15
15
Relay in 3-phase main monitors correct phase sequence and failure of any phase. Green LED
is permanently ON and indicates presence of power supply voltage. In case of phase failure or
exceeding voltage level red LED flashes and relay breaks. When changing to faulty state, time
delay applies. Time delay setting is set by a potentiometer on front panel of the device. In
case of incorrect phase sequence red LED shines permanently and relay is open. In case supply
voltage falls below 60% Un (OFF lower level)relay immediately opens with no delay and faulty
state is indicated by red LED.
Function
HRN-55: thanks to supply form all phases, this relay is able to stay operational also if one
phase is out.
HRN-55N -supply L1-N, means that relay monitor also failure in neutral wire.
64
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L1
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L2
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L3
15-18
green LED
red LED
L3
15
18
Hysteresis
Function description
N
L2
16
16
L3
L1
18
U
L2
L3
Hysteresis
18
Relay for monitoring over/under voltage in 3-phase mains HRN-57, HRN-57N
!
It serves to monitor voltage in a switchboard, protection of devices in 3-phase main
!
It monitors value of voltage in 3-phase main
!
It is possible to set upper and lower level independently
!
Adjustable time delay eliminated short voltage peaks and failures in the main
!
The device is supplied from monitored voltage
!
Faulty state is indicated by red LED and by breaking output relay contact
!
Output contact 1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A /250 V AC1
!
Relay doesn’t monitor phase sequence
!
HRN-57 – supply from all phases, means that relay is functional also in case of failure in one phase
!
HRN-57N -supply L1-N, means that relay monitors also failure of neutral wire, replacement for HRN-52
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
HRN-57 8595188137256
HRN-57N 8595188137249
Technical parameters
Monitoring terminals:
Supply terminals:
Voltage:
Level Umax:
Level Umin:
Burden:
Hysteresis:
Max. permanent overload:
Peak overload <1ms:
Time delay T1:
Time delay T2:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
HRN-57
HRN-57N
L1, L2, L3,N
L1, N
3x400V/230V / 50 Hz
105 - 125 % Un
75 - 95 % Un
max. 2 VA
5%
AC 3x460V
AC 3x265V
AC 3x500V
AC 3x288V
max. 500 ms
adjustable 0.1-10 s
Description
L1, L2, L3
L1, L2, L3
3x400 V / 50 Hz
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
10 A
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
1x107
1x105
Supply / monitoring terminals
L1
L2
L3
Indication
Supply indication
Adjusting upper value Umax
Adjusting of time delay T2
Adjusting bottom value Umin
16
15
18
Output contact
Symbol
Connection
HRN-57
HRN-57
16
L1
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.2x 2.5 or 1x4,
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 ( AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
68 g (2.4 oz.)
66 g (2.3 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
N
3~
HRN-57N
18
U
L2
L3
15
L1
L2
HRN-57N
16
L1 N
3~
N
L3
16
16
L3
L1
L2
18
U
L2
L3
15
15
15
18
18
Function
Hysteresis
Function description
Relay in 3-phase main monitors size of phase voltage. It is possible to set two independent
voltage levels and thus it is possible to set two independent voltage levels and monitor e.g.
undervoltage and overvoltage independently. In normal state when voltage is within set
levels, output relay is closed and red LED shines. In case voltage exceeds or falls below the
set levels, output relay breaks and red LED shines (LED indicates faulty state – flashes when
timing)
In case supply voltage falls below 60 % Un (UOFF lower level) relay immediately breaks
without delay and faulty state is indicated by red LED.
In case timing is in progress and faulty state is indicated, timing is immediately stopped.
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L1
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L2
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L3
Hysteresis
15-18
green LED
red LED
65
Relay for monitoring over/under voltage, phase sequence and failure HRN-54, HRN-54N
EAN code
HRN-54 8595188137201
HRN-54N 8595188137218
Technical parameters
Supply and measuring
Supply terminals:
Supply/measured voltage:
Level Umax:
Level Umin:
Burden:
Hysteresis:
Max. permanent overload:
Peak overload <1ms:
Time delay T1:
Time delay T2:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Indication of state:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
HRN-54
!
It serves to monitor voltage, phase failure and sequence in switchboards, protection of devices in 3-phase mains
!
It is possible to set upper and lower level of monitoring voltage
!
Adjustable time delay eliminates short voltage peaks and failures in the main
!
Supply is done from monitored voltage
!
Faulty state is indicated by red LED and by opening of output relay contact
!
Output contact 1x changeover / SPDT 8 A /250 V AC1
!
In case supply voltage falls below 60 %Un (Uoff lower level) relay immediately opens without delay
!
HRN-54 –supply from all phases which means that relay is functional also in case when one phase is faulty
!
HRN-54N –supply L1-N, means that relay monitors also failure of neutral wire
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
HRN-54N
L1, L2, L3,N
L1, N
3x400V/230V / 50 Hz
105-125 % Un
75-95 % Un
max. 2 VA
5%
AC 3x460 V
AC 3x265 V
AC 3x500 V
AC 3x288 V
max. 500 ms
adjustable 0.1-10 s
Description
L1, L2, L3
L1, L2, L3
3x400 V / 50 Hz
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
10 A
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
1x107
1x105
Supply/monitoring terminals
L1
L2
L3
Supply indication
Output indication
Adjusting upper value Umax
Adjusting of time delay T2
Adjusting bottom value Umin
16
18
15
Output contact
Symbol
Connection
HRN-54
HRN-54
16
L1
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4,
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
69 g
67 g
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
N
3~
HRN-54N
18
U
L2
L3
15
L1
HRN-54N
L2
L1 N
3~
16
L3
Relay in 3-phase main monitors size of phase voltage. It is possible to set two independent
voltage levels and thus it is possible to set two independent voltage levels and monitor e.g.
undervoltage and overvoltage independently. In normal state when voltage is within set
levels, output relay is closed and red LED shines. In case voltage exceeds or falls below the
set levels, output relay opens and red LED shines ( LED indicates faulty state – flashes when
timing).
In case supply voltage falls below 60 % Un (UOFF lower level)relay immediately opens without
delay and faulty state is indicated by red LED.
In case timing is in progress and faulty state is indicated, timing is immediately stopped.
U
16
16
L2
L3
15
15
15
18
Function
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L1
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L2
Umax
Umin
UOFF
L3
15-18
green LED
red LED
66
N
L3
18
Hysteresis
Function description
L1
L2
Hysteresis
18
Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-56
!
Relay monitors phase sequence and failure (e.g. control of correct motor winding etc.)
!
Relay is designated for monitoring of 3-phase mains
!
Supply from all phases which means that relay is functional also in case of one phase failure
!
Supply and monitored supply Un:
1-MODULE
HRN-56/208 - 3x120V
HRN-56/208 - 3x208 V
HRN-56/240 - 3x240 V
HRN-56/400 - 3x400 V
Technical parameters
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
Fixed time delay T1 (500ms) and adjustable time delay T2 (0 -10s)
!
Faulty state is indicated by LED and by opening of output relay contact
!
Output contact 1x changeover/SPDT 8 A /250V AC1
!
1-MODULE, 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
208
240
EAN code
HRN-56 /120V
HRN-56 /208V
HRN-56 /240V
HRN-56 /400V
HRN-56 /480V
HRN-56 /575V
8595188130745
8595188130134
8595188130141
8595188130158
8595188130189
8595188130196
Description
HRN-56
120
Monitoring terminals:
Supply terminals:
Supply/measured voltage:
Level Umin:
Level Uoff :
Burden:
Hysteresis:
Max. permanent overload:
Peak overload <1s:
Time delay T1:
Time delay T2:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Indication of state:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
3-MODULE
HRN-56/480 - 3x480 V
HRN-56/575 - 3x575 V
400
480
575
L1, L2, L3
L1, L2, L3
3 x 120V/50Hz 3 x 208V/50Hz 3 x 240V/50Hz 3 x 400V/50Hz 3 x 480V/50Hz 3 x 575V/50Hz
adjustable 70 - 95 % Un
60 % Un
max. 2 VA
5%
AC 3 x 160V
AC 3 x 276V
AC 3 x 460V AC 3 x 550V AC 3 x 660V
AC 3 x 180V
AC 3 x 300V
AC 3 x 500V AC 3 x 600V AC 3 x 700V
max. 500 ms
adjustable 0 -10 s
1-MODULE
Supply terminal
L1
L2
L3
Indication
Adjusting value Umin
Adjusting of time
delay
16
15
18
Output contacts
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
10 A
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
red LED
1x107
1x105
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel /
IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4,with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
66 g
66 g
66 g
67 g
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
3-MODULE front panel
Indication
Adjusting value Umin
Adjusting of time
delay
Symbol
16
L1
IP 40 from front panel /
IP 20 terminals
max.1x 2.5, max.2x1.5
with sleeve max. 1x1.5
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
108 g
108 g
Connection
18
L1
L2
3~
L1
L2
L3
L3
U
L3
L2
15
16
15
18
16 16 15 15 18 18
Function
Hysteresis
Function description
Relay in 3-phase main monitors correct phase sequence and phase failure. Green LED shines permanently and indicates
energization. In case of phase failure red LED flashes and relay turns off. When changing to faulty state, time delay applies
– delay setting is done by potentiometer on the front panel of the device. In case of incorrect phase sequence, red LED
shines permanently and relay is open. In case supply voltage falls below 60% Un (Uoff lower level) relay immediately
opens with no delay and faulty state is indicate by red LED.
HRN-56: Thanks to supply from all phases, relay is functional also in case of one phase failure.
Umin
UOFF
L1
UOFF
L2
UOFF
L3
t1
t2
15-18
green LED
red LED
67
Relay for complete monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N
! Monitoring 3-phase mains:
- voltage in 2 levels (undervoltage and overvoltage) in range 138-276V or 280-480 V (3x400 V)
- phase asymmetry
- phase sequence
- phase failure
! Function “MEMORY” - for return from the faulty into normal state press button „RESET“ located on the front panel
! HRN-43 - for circuits 3x400 V (without neutral)
! HRN-43N - for circuits 3x400/230 V (with neutral)
EAN code
HRN-43 /230V
HRN-43 /400V **
HRN-43 /24V **
HRN-43N /230V
HRN-43N /400V
HRN-43N /24V
! 2 output relays, selectable function of 2nd relay (independent / parallel)
8594030337660
8595188121316
8594030338087
8594030338216
8595188120258
8594030338094
Technical parameters
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Nominal voltage:
Terminals:
Upper level Umax:
Bottom level Umin:
Max. permanent overload:
Hysteresis:
Asymmetry:
Peak overload <1ms:
Time delay t1:
Time delay t2:
Accuracy
Set. accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependance:
Limit values tolerance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
! Fixed (t1) and adjustable (t2)
! Galvanically
delay to eliminate short voltage drops and peaks
separated supply voltage AC 400 V, AC 230 V, AC/DC 24 V
! Output contact: 2x changeover/ DPDT
16 A / 250 V AC1
! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
HRN-43
HRN-43N
A1 - A2
AC 230 V, AC 400 V, AC/DC 24 V / (AC 50-60Hz)
max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
3x400V / 50Hz
L1. L2. L3
240–480V
3x400V / 230V / 50Hz
L1. L2. L3, N
138–276V
35 - 99 % Umax
3x480 V
adjustable 5 % or 10 % of set value
5 - 20 %
600 < 1ms
350V < 1ms
fixed, max. 200 ms
adjustable 0-10 s
Description
Selection of function MEMORY
Function of 2. relay
(1.-paralel, 2.-independent)
Supply voltage
Indication overvoltage/
undervoltage, failure
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
239 g (8.4 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Time pause t2
Umax adjusting
Sequence indication
Asymmetry indication
Asymmetry 5-20 % setting
Umin adjusting
Symbol
5%
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5%
2x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
3x107
0.7x105
Hysteresis from
faulty to normal state
HRN-43
HRN-43N
A1
L1
L2
L3
3~
16
18 26
A2
A1
L1
L2
L3
N
U
15
3~
A2
25
HRN-43N
HRN-43
L1
L2
L3
N
Un
Un
A1 A2 N
L1 L2 L3
A1 A2
16
18 26
28
U
Connection
16 15 18 28 25 26
68
28
L1 L2 L3
16 15 18 28 25 26
15
25
Relay for complete monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N
Function
Overvoltage - undervoltage
Hysteresis
Legend:
L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage
RESET - press of the button on frontal panel
t1 - time delay, fixed
t2 - time delay, adjustable 0-10 sec
15-18 output relay 1
25-28 output relay 2
LED U - indication overvoltage / undervoltage
Hysteresis
Umax
Umin
L1
x
L2 Uma
Umin
x
L3 Uma
Umin
RESET
t1 t2
t1
t1
t2
Selection of 2nd relay function:
In order to monitor 2 levels of voltage, it is possible to select
if output relay will respond to each level individually (see
the diagram) or both relays will switch in parallel way (see
diagram “phase sequence”).
Selection via DIP switch.
15-18
t1
t2
t1
25-28
LED
MEMORY - ON (DIP-2)
Phase sequence
Legend:
L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage
RESET - press of the button on frontal panel
t1 - time delay, fixed
t2 - time delay, adjustable 0-10 sec
15-18 output relay 1
25-28 output relay 2
LED indication of phase sequence
L1
L2
L3
L3
L2
L3
L2
L2
L3
L2
L3
RESET
t1
t1
Selection of 2nd relay function:
The function is not implied when monitoring phase sequence,
the relays are switched in parallel way.
t1
15-18
(25-28)
t1
t1
LED
MEMORY - ON (DIP-2)
Asymmetry - phase failure
L1
L2
L3
Legend:
L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage
RESET - press of the button on frontal panel
t1 - time pause, fixed
t2 - time pause, adjustable 0-10 sec
- adjustable asymmetry 5-20%
15-18 output contact of relay 1
25-28 output contact of relay 2
LED - asymmetry indicator
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
100%
0%
RESET
Hysteresis
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
t2
t1
15-18
(25-28)
Selection of 2nd relay function:
The function is not implied when monitoring phase sequence,
the relays are switched in parallel way.
DIP switch is ignored.
LED
MEMORY - ON (DIP-2)
Function description
Relay is designated to monitor 3-phase circuits. Type HRN-43N controls voltage towards neutral wire, type HRN-43 controls interphase voltage. Relay can monitor voltage in two levels (overvoltage/
undervoltage), phase assymetry , sequence and failure. Each faulty state is indicated by individual LED. By DIP switch (No.3) it is possible to define function of the other relay – independent function (1x
for overvoltage, 1x for undervoltage) or in parallel. Time delays t1(fixed) – when changing from faulty to normal state or when de-energized and t2 (adjustable) when changing from normal to faulty
state. These delays prevent incorrect conduct and oscillation of output device during short voltage peaks in the main or during gradual voltage decline into normal.
Voltage control
Set upper level Umax in range 138-276 V (or 240 - 480 V for HRN-43) and lower level Umin in range 35-99% Umax. In case any phase passes this range, after a delay which eliminated short voltage peaks,
contact opens. Output contact again switches after returning back into monitored voltage range and exceeding fixed hysteresis (which is adjustable in two values by DIP switch).
Phase sequence
Monitors correctness of phase sequence. In case of unwanted change output contact breaks. In case of energization of a device with incorrect phase sequence, contact stays opened.
Asymmetry
Rate of assymetry between individual phases is set in a range of 5-20%. In case set asymmetry is exceeded, output relay breaks and LED indicating asymmetry shines. Delays t1, t2 and hysteretic are
applicable when returning to normal state.
69
Optical signaling of three-phase network MPS-1
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Used for optical signaling of the voltage level in three phases
Each phase features LED signaling broken down by color into voltage levels:
- voltage in tolerance of +/-15% - green
- overvoltage - red
- undervoltage - yellow
- voltage < 50V - LED not illuminated
Four-wire connection - L1, L2, L3, N
Monitors phase voltages against neutral wire
Not dependent upon order of phases
Four-wire connection - L1, L2, L3, N
In 1-MODUL design, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
MPS-1 8595188145978
Technical parameters
Supply voltage:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Power consumption:
Indication:
LED not illuminated:
LED illuminated:
- yellow
- green
- red
Other information
Design:
Mounting:
Pracovní poloha:
Coverage:
Overvoltage category:
Contamination level:
Working temperature:
Storage temperature:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
MPS-1
Connection
AC 3x400/230V, 50/60Hz
+20%, -75%
max.1.0VA / 0,5W
0 ... 50V / 45 ... 0V
50 ... 207V / 195,5 ... 45V
207 ... 264,5V / 253 ... 195,5V
264,5 ... 276V / 276 ... 253V
1 module
DIN rail EN60715
any
Panel IP40, terminals IP10
III.
2
-20 ... +55°C
-30 ... +70°C
90x17.6x64mm
58 g
EN60947-1, EN60947-5-1
L1
N
L2
L3
Description of device
Terminal N
Terminal L1
Function
After connecting the supply voltage, the LED illuminates - the color corresponds to the voltage size of
individual phases. If the phase voltage drops under 40V ( phase outage), the corresponding LED is not
illuminated.
Description of function
Terminal L2
L1
N
L2
L3
Terminal L3
Indication L1
Indication L2
Indication L3
70
Current monitoring relay PRI-32
! Current transformer is a part of the product. Inside this transformer there is a wire which senses the volume of flowing current
! This construction reduces thermal stress of product
when compared with conventional solutions with inbuilt shunt, and
increases current range up to 20 Amps, and galvanically separates monitored circuit
! For heating bars in sliding rails, heating cables, indication of current flow, controlling of 1-phase motor consumption ...
! Universal supply AC 24 - 240 V and DC 24 V
! Supply is galvanic separated from measuring current
! Current exceeding – current flowing through monitored wire must not exceed
100 A
! Output contact: 1x changeover/SPDT 8 A
! Clamp terminals
! 1-phase, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
PRI-32 8595188121965
Technical parameters
Supply circuit
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Current range:
Current adjustment:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependancy:
Limit values tolerance:
Overload capacity:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Output indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
PRI-32
Description
Supply terminals
A1 - A2
AC 24 - 240 V, DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
max. 1.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
A1
A2
Output indication
Supply indication
1 - 20 A (AC 50 Hz)
potentiometer
5%
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5%
max.100 A /10 s
Controlling cable outlet
(max. diameter 6mm)
Adjustment of access
current
16
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
red LED
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4,
(AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
68 g (2.4 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
15
18
Output contact
Symbol
Connection
Un
A1
16
18
A1
A2
A2
15
16
15
18
Function
Monitoring relay PRI-32 serves to monitor current level in single phase AC circuits. Due to
its fluent adjustment of release current, it is predestined for applications with necessity of
current flow indication, and can be used as precedence relay. Output relay is off in normal
state. In case the set current level is exceeded, it switches. Multivoltage supply is an
advantage.
Imax
Hysteresis
I
15-18
LED
Un
71
Current monitoring relay PRI-51
! It serves for monitoring of heating in rail-switches, heating cables, consumption of one-phase motors, indicates current flow
! Flexible adjustment by potentiometer, choice of 6 ranges:
AC 0.05-0.5A; AC 0.1-1A; AC 0.2-2A; AC 0.5-5A; AC 0.8-8A; AC 1.6-16A
! Adjustable delay 0.5 - 10 s to eliminate short current peaks
! It is possible to use for current scanning from current transformer - up to 600 A!
! Universal supply AC 24 - 240 V and DC 24 V
EAN code
PRI-51 /0.5A
PRI-51 /1A
PRI-51 /2A
PRI-51 /5A
PRI-51 /8A
PRI-51 /16A
! Supply is not galvanically separated from measured current, it must be in the same phase
8595188142885
8595188124904
8595188124911
8595188124928
8595188124935
8595188124942
! Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A
! 1-phase, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, replacement for PRI-31
Technical parameters
Supply circuit
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Load:
Current range:
Recomended current transformers:
Max. permanent current:
Inrush overload <1ms:
Current adjustment:
Time delay:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependancy:
Limit values tolerance:
Hysteresis (fault to OK):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Output indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Description
PRI-51
Supply terminals
A1 - A2
AC 24 - 240 V a DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
max. 1.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
Measuring input (only AC)
A2
A1
B1
B2
Output Indication
Adjusting current in % In
Adjusting time pause
between B1 - B2
PRI-51/0.5 PRI-51/1 PRI-51/2 PRI-51/5 PRI-51/8 PRI-51/16
AC0.05-0.5A AC0.1-1A AC0.2-2A AC0.5-5A AC0.8-8A AC1.6-16A
(AC50Hz) (AC 50Hz) (AC 50Hz) (AC 50Hz) (AC 50Hz) (AC 50Hz)
applicable also for current transformer
more information page 87
0.5A
1A
2A
5A
100 A
potentiometer
adjustable 0.5-10 s
8A
16 A
16
18
15
5%
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5 % (10% for 0.05-0.5A range)
5%
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
green / red LED
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4,with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
58 g ( 2 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Output contact
Symbol
Connection
Example Connection: PRI-51 with current
transformer for current range increase
A1
A2
16
18
L
N
Un
Un
B1
B2
15
Is
A1
A2
A1
A2
B1
B2
B1
B2
15
Current
transformer
16
16
18
15
18
Example of an order
Always specify all reference name of current relay according to required range, for example PRI-51/5.
Function
Monitoring relay PRI-51 serves to monitor current level in one-phase AC circuits. Gradual setting
of actuating current of monitoring relay enables many different applications. Output relay is in
normal state opened. After the set current level is reached, relay closes after the set delay (0.5-10s).
When returning from faulty to normal state there is a hystersis (5%). Multi-voltage of this relay is an
advantage. It is possible to monitor load which doesn´t have the same supply as monitoring relay PRI-51.
Range of PRI-51 can be increased by an external current transformer.
72
Ip
Load
Hysteresis
Current monitoring relay PRI-52
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
EAN code
PRI-52 8595188136556
!
Technical parameters
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Burden (apparent):
Burden (loss):
Measuring circuit:
Current range:
Maximal permanent current:
Inrush overload <1s:
Current adjustment:
Time delay:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependance:
Limit values tolerance:
Hysteresis:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Switching power:
Output indication:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution level:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Relay is designated for:
- distant device diagnostic (short circuit, take-off increasing)
- preferred (priority) relay – two appliances (boiler and floor heating) operating on one phase, but never run
together – prevention against current overload and circuit breaker tripping. Enables to save your main breaker expenses.
- current tranzit indicator – informs about heating activation, ceramic hob, ventilator….
- changing over of appliances according to inverter‘s (converter) output by photocell applications
NEW – hole for threaded conductor passes through the body of device
Part of device is current transformer, which is sensing size of current in threaded conductor
Possible to use also for sensing of current up to 600A from external current transformer
Slight setting (by potentiometer ) of tripping current – range AC 0.5….25A
Slight setting (by potentiometer) of delay – adjustable in range 0.5…..10s
Supply voltage AC 230V
Output contact 1x changeover /SPDT 8A (AC1)
1-phase version, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamp terminals
PRI-52
Device describtion
A1 - A2
AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz
-15 %; +10 %
max. 5 VA
max. 1.4 W
Supply terminals
AC 0.5 ... 25A / 50 Hz
25A
100 A
potentiometer
adjustable 0.5 ... 10 s
Supply voltage indication
A1
A2
Output indication
Hole for threaded conductor
(max. Ø 5.8 mm/0.23˝ )
Adjusting of time delay
10
5
20
25
0.5
In 0.5 - 25A
10 %
<1 %
< 0.2 % / °C
10 %
0.25A
16
18
15
1x changeover /SPDT (AgNi/Silver Alloy)
8 A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
red LED
-20 °C to +55 °C ( -4 °F to 131 °F )
-30°C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to158°F )
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP40 from front panel / IP10 terminals
III.
2
max. 2x2.5, max. 1x4/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
64 g (2.26 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
Adjusting of current in A
15
Output contact
Symbol
Connection
Un
Ip
Un
A1
16
A1
A2
Is
18
A2
I
A1
A2
current
transformer
15
16
16
15
18
15
18
Connection example: PRI-52 with current transformer for increasing of current range.
Functions
hysteresis
Imax
I
15-18
t
Monitoring relay PRI-52 serves for monitoring of current level in 1-phase AC circuits. Slight setting of
release current level designates this relay for many various applications. Output relay is in normal status
switched off. When set current level is overrun, relay get closed after preset delay. By return from error to
normal status is used hysteresis.
PRI-52 range is possible to increase with external current transformer.
Adventage of PRI-52 is that the hole for threaded conductor is located under the level of covering in the
switchboard – thanks that, threaded conductor is not accessible for unwanted manipulation.
LED I >
73
Three-phase relay PRI-53
!
!
6
!
!
!
!
!
!
EAN code
PRI-53/1 8595188142137
PRI-53/5 8595188142144
Technical parameters
Supply terminals:
Current monitoring terminals:
1st phase:
2nd phase:
3rd phase:
Supply voltage:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Operating AC frequency:
Burden: (max):
Rated current In:
Current level - I:
Overload capacity
- continuous:
- max.3s:
Difference:
Delay (until failure):
Output relay - contact:
AC contact capacity:
DC contact capacity:
Mechanical life:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh
(power supply – relay contact):
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution level:
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
!
PRI-53/1
PRI-53/5
A1, A2
Connection
Example of connection: PRI - 53 with a current conversion transformer for increasing the current range.
I1, I2
I3, I4
I5, I6
24 - 240V AC/DC
± 10%
45 - 65 Hz
3VA / 1.2W
AC 1A
AC 5A
adjustable 40 - 120% In
2A
20A
It is intended for monitoring the current in three-phase devices (e.g. cranes, motors, etc.)
24-240 V AC/DC power supply galvanically separated from the circuit of the monitored current
Adjustable current level in % of In:
Fixed difference level
Adjustable delay level (when exceeding the preset limit)
Adjustable function:
- UNDER - monitors the drop in the strength of current below the preset value I
- OVER - exceeding the preset value I
2 types depending on the strength of rated current In (1A, 5A)
6-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Output relay with 2 changeover contacts
Option of connecting via the current transformers to increase the value of the monitored current by up to 600 A
N
L1
L2
L3
Un
LOAD
I1 I2
A1 A2
I3 I4
10A
50A
fix 1 % In
adjustable 0.5 - 10s
2x schangeover / DPDT (AgNi) gilded
250V / 8 A, max. 2000VA
30V / 8A
3x106 at rated load
-20.. +55 °C
-30.. +70 °C
4 kV / 1 min.
III.
2
IP 40 from font panel / IP 20 terminal
max 2 x 1.5mm2 / 1 x 2.5mm2
90 x 105 x 64 mm
208 g
208 g
EN 60255-6, EN 60255-27, EN 61000-6-2,
EN 61000-6-4
I5 I6
16 15 18 28 25 26
Device describtion
Supply voltage terminals
Current monitoring terminals
A1
Supply voltage indication
I1
A2
I2
I3
I4
PRI-53/1
Indication of exceeding
the preset limit
Delay setting
Current level setting
UNDER / OVER function setting
16
15
18
28
25
26
Output contacts
I5
I6
Current monitoring
terminals
Functions
After the supply voltage is connected the green LED is on.
UNDER function:
If the strength of the monitored current in all phases exceeds the preset level I, the relay is triggered and the red
LED is off. If the strength of the monitored current drops in any phase below the level I, the relay is disconnected
after the preset delay timing elapses and the red LED goes on. The red LED flashes during the delay.
If the strength of the monitored current returns above the level I + difference, the relay is triggered without delay
and the red LED goes off.
OVER function:
If the strength of the monitored current is lower in all phases than the preset level I, the relay is disconnected
and the red LED is off.
If the strength of the monitored current exceeds in any phase the level I, the relay is triggered after the preset
delay timing elapses and the red LED goes on. The red LED flashes during the delay.
If the strength of the monitored current again drops below the level I - difference, the relay is disconnected
without delay and the red LED goes off.
74
Current monitoring relay PRI-41, PRI-42
!
To monitor overloading / discharge ( machine, motor...), load sensing, diagnostics of remote device (interrunption,
short circuit, current cunsumption increase...)
!
Monitors AC/DC 1-phase current in 3 ranges
!
Monitoring adjusted current in 2 independent levels
!
PRI-41: “HYSTERESIS” function and PRI-42: “WINDOW” function
!
function of 2nd relay (independent/parallel):
“MEMORY” function - manual reset.
“RESET” button on the frontal panel
EAN code
PRI-41 /230V
PRI-41/24V
PRI-42 /230V
PRI-42 /24V
8595188140485
8595188140492
8595188140515
8595188140522
Technical parameters
Supply circuit
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Ranges:
Terminals:
Input resistance:
Max. permanent current:
Inrush overload <1ms:
Time delay for Imax:
Time delay for Imin:
Accuracy
Measuring accuracy:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependancy:
Limit values tolerance:
Hysteresis (fault to OK):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
PRI-41
!
Adjustable time delay for each level
!
Galvanically separated supply
!
Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1 for each current level
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
PRI-42
Description
MEMORY function
Meassured AC or DC
A1 - A2
AC 230 V or AC / DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
4 - 16 A (AC50Hz)
C - B1
5 mΩ
16 A
20 A
1.25 - 5 A (AC50Hz) 0.4 - 1.6 A (AC50Hz)
C - B3
C - B2
50 mΩ
11 mΩ
1.6 A
5A
2A
6.3 A
adjustable 0-10 sec
adjustable 0-10 sec
5%
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5%
selectable 5 % / 10 %
Function of 2nd relay
(1st-paralel, 2nd-independent)
Supply indication
Hysteresis from faulty to OK
normal state
Indication Imax
t1 - time delay for Imax
Adjusting upper level - Imax
Output indication
Indication Imin
t2 - time delay for Imin
Adjusting bottom level - Imin
Symbol
Connection
I 0.4-1.6
1.25-5
Un
4-16
A1
16
18 26
28
A1 A2 C
changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
yellow LED
3x107
0.7x105
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
239 g (8.4 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
B1 B2 B3
C
B1
B2
B3
A2
15
25
16 15 18 28 25 26
Function
Un
Imax
I
Imin
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
15-18
25-28
15-18
25-28
RESET
LED > I
LED < I
LED
MEMORY-ON (DIP2)
Relay is delivered in two versions - according to setting and level monitoring .
PRI-41 has function hysteresis, which means that you set only upper level (Imax) and lower level is set in % from upper level. Therefore when upper level is changed, lower level changes automatically.
PRI-42 has function “WINDOW”, which means that you set upper level (Imax) and lower level (Imin) individually in % of rated monitored range.
Both types have selectable function MEMORY. In case the relay gets to faulty state, this function leaves relay in this state until it is reseted by RESET button. DIP switch No. 3 can be used to choose if output
relay should switch for each level separatelly, or in parallel in case any current level is exceeded. DIP switch No. 4 serves to set hysteresis which applies when changing from faulty to normal state. Relay is
protected against re-poling of DC current, or wrong AC/DC current (this fault is indicated by LED <I a LED >I common flashing).
75
Current transformator SR - for Monitoring current relay PRI
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
EAN code
SR051
SR101
SR151
SR200
SR250
SR300
SR400
SR600
8595188117425
8595188117432
8595188117449
8595188117456
8595188117463
8595188117470
8595188117487
8595188117494
Technical parameters
Max. wire diameter:
Max. bus-bar profi le:
Primary current (A):
Accuracy class:
0.5
1
3
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
76
Accessory to monitoring relay PRI series, for extension of max. controlled current
max. cable 35 mm (1 ˝)
Max. cable size:
- solid conductor: max. 6 mm2
- wire max. 4 mm2
Bus-bar to max. dimension 40x10 mm ( 2 ˝ x 0.4 ˝)
Frenquency: 50 - 60 Hz
Constant overload capacity: 1.2 x In
Output current: 0 - 5 A
1-phase, DIN rail or panel mounting
SR051
22
SR101
22
SR151
SR200
SR250
SR300
SR400
SR600
30x10
30x10
40x10
40x10
40x10
300
400
Rated capacity (VA):
600
4
8
8
12
12
15
12
15
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F)
15
22
23
23
-
-
-
50
100
Rated capacity (VA):
150
2
3
4
6
4
2.5
3.5
5
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F)
7
9
1.25
1.5
200
250
Rated capacity (VA):
8.5
11
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F)
35
35
35
Level switch HRH-5
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
EAN code
HRH-5 /UNI
!
8595188136396
HRH-5
Technical parameters
Functions:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Input:
Toleration of voltage range:
Measuring circuit
Sensitivity ( input resistance):
Voltage n electrodes:
Current in probes:
Time response:
Max. capacity of probe cable:
Time delay (t):
Time delay after switching on (t1):
Accuracy
Accuracy in setting (mechanical):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Switching voltage:
Switched voltage:
Min. switched output DC:
Mechanical life (AC1):
Electrical life:
Other information
Operational temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strenght:
Operational position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvltage category:
Pollution degree:
Profile of connecting wires (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Recommended measuring probes:
2
A1 - A2
24... 240 V AC/ DC (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
max. 2 VA
-15 %; +10 %
adjustable in range 5 kΩ -100 kΩ
max. AC 3.5 V
AC <0.1 mA
max. 400 ms
800 nF (sensitivity 5kΩ), 100 nF (sensitivity 100 kΩ)
adjustable, 0.5 -10 sec
1.5 sec
±5%
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy )
8 A / AC1
2500 VA , 240 W
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
1x107
1x105
Relay is designed for monitoring levels in wells, basins, reservoirs, tanks....
In one device you can choose the following configurations:
- one-level switch of conductive liquids (by connecting H and D)
- two-level switch of conductive liquids
One-state device monitors one level, two-state device monitors two levels (switches on one level
and switches off on another level)
Choice of function PUMP UP, PUMP DOWN
Adjustable time delay on the output (0.5 - 10s)
Sensitivity adjustable by a potentiometer (5-100kΩ)
Measuring frequency 10Hz prevents polarization of liquid and raising oxidation of measuring probes
Galvanically separated supply voltage UNI 24.. 240 VAC/DC
Output contact 1xchangeover/SPDT 8A/250V AC1
In 1-module type, mounting onto a DIN rail
Device description
Supply voltage terminals
Terminals for conection of
probes H, D
Indication of supply voltage
Choice of function
Output indication
Choice of function
Adjustment of
delay on output
Terminal for connection of
probe C
Output contacts
Connection
Monitoring of two levels
Monioring of one level
Un
A1
A2
A1
A2
H
D
H
D
16
C
15
18
max
max
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
3.75 kV (supply - sensors)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from font panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
AWG 10 (2.5 mm2)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
72 g (2.5 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
pg. 83
Symbol
A1
16
18
C
D
H
A2
15
Un
min
Tank with
monitored level
16
C
15
18
Tank with
monitored level
Function
Function PUMP UP
Function PUMP DOWN
Un
max
level
min
15-18
red LED
Un
max
level
min
t
t
15-18
t
t
red LED
Relay is designated for monitoring of levels of conductive liquids with possibility of functions: PUMP UP
or PUMP DOWN. To prevent polarization and liquid electrolysis of liquid, and undesirable oxidation of
measuring probes, alternating current is used. For measuring use three measuring probes: H- upper level,
D- lower level, C - common probe. In case you use a tank made of a conductive material, you can use
it as probe C. In case you require monitoring of one level only, it is neccessary to connect inputs H and
D and connect them to one probe - in this case sensitivity is lowered by half (2.5... 50kΩ). Probe C can
be connected with a protective wire of supply system (PE). To prevent undesirable switching out output
contacts by various influences (sediment on probes, humidity...) it is possible to set sensitivity of the device
according to conductivity of monitored liguid (corresponding to “resistance” of liquid) range 5 up to 100kΩ.
To reduce infuences of undesirable switching of output contacts by liquid gorgle in tanks, it is possible to set
delay of output reaction 0.5 - 10s.
77
Level switch HRH-1
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
EAN code
HRH-1 /230V 8594030337783
HRH-1 /24V 8594030338209
!
!
Technical parameters
HRH-1
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Hysteresis (input - opening):
Voltage on electrode:
Current in probes:
Time reaction:
Max. cable capacity:
Time delay tD:
Time delay tH:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech.):
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Measuring sensors:
3
A1 - A2
AC 230V, AC/DC 24V (galvanicaly separated)
or AC 110V(AC 50-60Hz)
max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
Used to check the level in wells, reservoirs, tanks, pools, tankers, containers, etc.
Within the framework of a single device, the following configurations can be selected (see functions graph):
- two separate level switches
- two probes in one tank
- filling tank from well
Single-state monitors one level (full or empty tank), double-state monitors two levels (switches on upon one
level and switches off upon the second)
DIP switch on front panel is used to choose function (see functions graph):
- pumping in
- pumping out
- over-pumping
Option of setting time delay for reacting to the output upon a change in level, any type of delay by DIP switch
Sensitivity adjustable by potentiometer (probe resistance based on fluid)
The measuring frequency 500 Hz prevents fluid polarization and oxidation increase of measured probes
Galvanically separated supply AC 230 V, AC/DC 24 V or AC 110 V
Output contact 2x switches 16 A / 250 V AC1
In 3-MODULE design, fixing to DIN rail
in an adjustable range 5 kΩ- 100 kΩ
max. AC 5 V
AC <1 mA
max. 400 ms
4 nF
adjustable 0.5 -10 sec
adjustable 0.5 -10 sec
±5%
2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
3x107
0.7x105
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with cavern max. 1x1.5
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
240 g (8 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
pg. 83
Measuring probes
There can be any measuring probe (any conductive contact, it is recommended to use
brass or stainless steel).
The probe wire does not need to be shielded, but it is recommended. When using a
shielded wire, the shielding is connected to terminal S.
Connection
Symbol
Un
A1
16
18
28
26
C
D
H
S
A1 A2 C
A2
15
D H S
25
16 15 18 28 25 26
Description
Terminal for connection of conductor
common for both probes
Supply voltage terminals
Terminals for connecting probe
Terminals for connecting
shield
A1
A2
C
S
H
D
Supply voltage indication
DIP
Delay setting
relay H
H relay indication
(OUT2)
Delay setting
relay D
D relay indication
(OUT1)
16
Output contact of D relay - OUT1
15
18
28
25
26
Sensitivity setting
of probe according to
resistance of
measured fluid
Output contact
of H relay - OUT2
Description and importance of DIP switches
2 separate tanks
change of function of relay D
relay D - delayed close
relay H - delayed close
78
Level switch HRH-1
Functions
Two separate level switches
Un
Un
sonda D
probe D
LED D
LED D
OUT1- relay D
OUT1- relay D
tD
tD
probe H
tD
tD
probe H
LED H
LED H
OUT2 - relay H
tH
OUT2 - relay H
tH
When the tank is empty relay D open, relay H is closed
tH
tH
When the tank is empty both relays are switched
Two probes in single tank
Un
Un
probe D
probe D
probe H
probe H
LED D
LED D
OUT1- relay D
OUT1- relay D
tD
tD
LED H
tD
tD
tH
tH
LED H
OUT2 - relay H
tH
OUT2 - relay H
tH
The relay, which is used to control the level liquids conductive (water, chemical solutions, food, etc.).
In this principle, it goes on about the measurement of liquids by measuring probes. As the measuring used signal is 5V AC/ 500Hz. Using an AC signal prevents the the increasing oxidation of probes and
unwanted polarization and electrolysis liquid. During depending on the DIP settings configurations, switches can control two independent levels or use a combined function for one level (see diagram
of functions).
The relay is equipped with regulation of the sensitivity to to liquid resistance. It‘s also possible to eliminate some of the unwanted switching in the sensitivity settings according to specific conditions
(for example, pollution probe sediments, humidity, etc.). It‘s also possible for each probe to set the delay in the range of 0.5-10s, and using the DIP switch type delay (when you turn the relay on and off,
depending on application).
Example of usage:
For controlling two independent tanks
For controlling the level combination of upper and bottom probe
container with
the monitored level
container with
the monitored level
16 15 18 28 25 26
Pump control or other output device
D
H S
Pump control or other output device
16 15 18 28 25 26
probe H
A1 A2 C
probe D
H S
common
probe C
D
probe H
A1 A2 C
Un
common
probe C
common
probe C
probe D
Un
container with
the monitored level
Output relays for pump control or other output devices,
Selecting contacts is depending on the selected function
Note:
As a common probe, it could be used with an advantage such as metal pipes, tanks, etc.
Due to the isolation of probes from a supply voltage, and the measured voltage which is up to 5V, it is possible to connect probes using standard communication cables.
79
Level switch HRH-6
Function 1 is monitoring minimal and maximal level depth, for example in fire engine cars, tanks etc.
Function 2 is monitoring level depth in water collectors, basins, pools ec.
! Selection of particular function is made by jumper on the front panel
! Level depth is indicated on the panel of device by LED
! Device monitors 5 levels by using six probes (one probe is common)
! Common probe can be replaced by a metal (conductive) tank
! Level indicationby six LED‘s on the front panel of the device
! It is possible to connect another indication module (e.g. in fire-engine cabin)
! Adjustable sensitivity according to liquid conductvity
! Adjustable time delay - elimination of level movement, e.g. while a tank is being filled up
! Measuring frequency 10 Hz to prevent polarization of liquid
! Supply voltage 12.... 24 V DC (to be used in fire-engines) or galvanically separated 230 VAC for general use
! Contact relay 10A for signalization of full/empty tank (according to a chosen function)
! Choice of functions PUMP UP/OFF/PUMP DOWN by a switch located on the front panel of the device
! Protection degree IP65
!
!
EAN code
HRH-6 /AC
HRH-6 /DC
HRH-6S
8595188136990
8595188137409
8595188137416
Technical parameters
HRH-6 / DC
HRH-6 / AC
2
Function:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Sensitivityan adjustable range*:
12..24V DC
max. 1.8 W
+/- 20%
Connection of HRH-6 in a block
230V AC/50-60Hz
max.3.8 VA
-20 %; +10 %
min. 10...20kΩ
max. 100...150kΩ
max. 3V AC
500nF (for min. sensitivity), 50nF (for maximum sensitivity)
adjustable 1...10s
6xLED (1x red, 1x yellow, 4x green)
1x NO-SPST (AgNi/ Silver Alloy )
10A / AC1
2500 VA / AC1, 200 W / DC
16 A / < 3s
250V AC1 / 24V DC
500 mW
3x107
0.7x105
Voltage on probes:
Probe cable maximum capacity:
Time delay:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Switching voltage:
Peak current:
Switching voltage:
Min. switching capacity DC:
Mechanical life (AC1):
Electrical life:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
El. strength (supply – probes):
Operating position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Recommended measuring probe:
Description of function:
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
x
3.75 kV
any
IP 65
x
III.
2
110x135x72 mm (4.3˝ x 5.3˝ x 2.8˝)
384 g (13.55 oz.)
284 g (13.55 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
pg.83
SENS.
Jumper
- function selection
+Un
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
C
15
- Un
80
18
Cable for connecting
auxiliary signalling
Supply cable / relay
contact
HRH-6/DC
18
15
N
Delay setup
HRH-6/S
Auxiliary signalling
HRH-6/S
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
C
+
LED6
- level L5 indication
LED5
- level L4 indication
LED4
- level L3 indication
LED3
- level L2 indication
LED2
- level L1 indication
LED1 - supply
voltage indication
Cable for connecting
probes
Basic unit connecting
L
-
Sensitivity setup
Function switch
Connection
HRH-6/AC
+
HRH-6/DC
Basic unit
* Note: product is in a state of prototype, may be a subject of alternations .
HRH-6/DC
DELAY
LED6
- level L5 indication
LED5
- level L4 indication
LED4
- level L3 indication
LED3
- level L2 indication
LED2
- level L1 indication
LED1 - supply
voltage indication
Level switch HRH-6
HRH-6 block connecting
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
C
PU SW PD
PD
SW
PU
15
18
AC 230V *
L
N
N
L
HRH-6/AC
C
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
LED4
LED5
LED6
+ 6V
LED1
LED2
LED3
- Un
+ Un
15
18
HRH-6/S
LED4
LED5
LED6
+ 6V
LED1
LED2
LED3
*By HRH-6/DC, incoming supply is connected on terminals +Un and - Un.
Functions
Un
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
LED6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
FUNKCE 1
FUNCTION
15-18
J1
15-18
FUNKCE 2
FUNCTION
J1
NAPOUŠTĚNÍ /
PUMP UP
VYPOUŠTĚNÍ /
PUMP DOWN
15-18
NAPOUŠTĚNÍ /
PUMP UP
15-18
VYPOUŠTĚNÍ /
PUMP DOWN
This device monitors level of a conuctive liquid in a tank by using six single probes or one 6-fold probe. In case you use a tank made of a conductive material, it is possible to use it as a common probe C.
This common probe is connected to a pole of supply (for fire-engines it means its body) in case of supply voltage 12...24VDC.
In case of supply voltage 230VAC, the circuits are galvanically separated from the main.
The device is controlled by a three-position switch PUMP UP/OFF/ PUMP DOWN. After switching into a position PUMP UP or PUMP DOWN, red LED1 shines and then also LED2...LED6 according to liquid
level. Output relay has 2 selectable functions.
Funtion setting is done by a jumper on basic board of HRH-6.
Function 1: ( for use in fire-engines) - jumper is applied. In case of function PUMP UP and level reaching L5, the relay controlling e.g. acustic signalization, permanently closes and indicated full tank. In
case of PUMP DOWN function and level dropunder level L3, relay priodically switches and under L2 it switches permanently (indicates almost empty tank).
Function 2: (for keeping liquid level) - jumper is not applied. In case of PUMP UP, sensor is switched until liquid reaches level L5. Then relay opens and switches again in case the lliguid level falls under level
L1. In case of PUMP DOWN - relay is switched until liquid falls under level L1. Then relay opens and switches again on level L5.
To eliminate LED flashing while level gurgle it is possible to delay reaction of probes (set delay 1..10s). According to conductivity of liquid it is possible to set sensitivity of probes (corresponding to
“resistance” of liquid).
81
Level set HRH-4
! In an easy way it automates operations of pumps depending on level
! Control of level in wells, tanks, reservoirs...
! It is delivered as a connected set – easy installation
! Possibility to monitor level of any type of conductive liquid
! It serves for an automatic operation in 1-phased and 3-phased pumps
! Set of level switch HRH-5 and a contactor VS425
! Function choice – pumping up or down
! Unit requires incoming over-current protection
! Protection degree of the set is IP55
! There is a possibility of 4 types of probes in a various design (they are not a part of this set, it is possible to deliver)
! Unit is placed in a plastic box with dimensions 160x135x83mm
EAN code
HRH-4 /230V 8595188117517
HRH-4 /24V 8595188117500
HRH-4
Technical parameters
Function:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Sensitivity ( input resistance):
Voltage n electrodes:
Current on probes:
Time response:
Max. capacity of probe cable:
Time delay (t):
Time delay (t1):
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech):
Output
Number of contacts:
Rated thermal current:
Loading in AC3:
Mechanical life:
Other information
Operation temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength (supply-output):
Operating position:
Protection degree:
Pollution degree:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
2
AC/DC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
7 VA
-15 %; +10 %
adjustable in range 5 kΩ -100 kΩ
max. AC 3.5 V
AC <0.1 mA
max. 400 ms
800 nF (sensitivity 5kΩ), 100 nF (sensitivity 100 kΩ)
adjustable, 0.5 -10 sec
1.5 sec
protection element
HRH-4/230V
±5%
4x switching
25 A
5.5 kW / 400 V
3x106
A1
A2
H
D
HRH-5
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV, galvanically insulated
any
IP 55
2
160 x 135 x 83 mm ( 6.3˝ x 5.3˝ x 3.3˝)
834 g (29.4 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
16
C
15
18
VS425-40
230V AC/DC
M
230 V
control lamp
Function description
Function
Function PUMP UP
Un
max
level
min
15-18
t
t
t
t
red LED
Function PUMP DOWN
Un
max
level
min
15-18
red LED
82
Connection
1) PUMP UP - in case the level falls under a lower limit ( sensor D), a relay switches and a pump pumps a
liquid up until it reaches an upper limit ( probe H), then a relay opens and a pump stops pumping. When
a level reaches a lower limit again, all process is repeated.
After the device is energized, relay automatically closes and a pump pumps liquid to upper limit.
2) PUMP DOWN - in case a level reaches over an upper limit, a relay closes and a pump pumps liquid down.
In case a level reaches a lower limit, a relay opens and a pump stops pumping.
When energized, a relay is in an open state and a pump operates only after an upper limit is exceeded.
3) In case you combine inputs H and D and connect them to one probe, the device will keep only one level
(upper and lower limit will become one).
In function PUMP UP relay closes in case the level falls under a probe level. A pump pumps liquid up and
in case the level reaches a probe level, a relay opens and a pump stops.
The level is kept in a small range around the probe.
In function PUMP DOWN relays closes in case a level reaches a probe level. A pump pumps down until
the level reaches a probe, then relay opens and pump stops.
Level switches accessories - Level sensors SHR
SHR-1-M: brass sensor
SHR-1-N: stainless steel sensor
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
SHR-1-M
EAN code
SHR-1-M
SHR-1-N
SHR-1-N
!
8595188110105
8595188111379
!
!
!
!
!
!
EAN code
SHR-2
wire to SHR-2
Sensor to control flooding
Electrode with diametr 4 mm / 0.2” is placed in plastic cover
Panel or to holder mounting
Conductor is connected to terminal board, shrink bushing for feeder place insulation is a part of device
Max. wire profile: 2.5 mm2 (AWG10)
Installation: after connecting a wire to the sensor, run the shrink bushing over the wire onto the sensor.
Heat the sensor and by shrinking the connection of sensor and wire will be hermetical
Weight: 9.7 g (0.3 oz.)
Operating temperature: -25 °C to +60 °C (-13 °F to 140 °F)
Total sensor lenght: 65.5mm /2.58 ”
8595188111263
8595188129770
!
!
Level probe SHR-2
Detection sensor is electrode, which in connection with switchable device is used for level detection for example in
wells,tanks,...
To be ued in electric conductive fluids and mechanically polluted fluids with temperature: +1 °C to +80 °C (33.8 °F to 176°F)
stainless steel one-pole electrode reside in PVC cover, intended for tank wall mounting or mounting by socket
To ensure corret function of the sensor, it is necessary to have the electrode without dirt which could disable the
connection of the electrode and fluid and thus lead to malfunction
Max. wire profile: 2.5 mm2 (AWG10)
Recomended wire ÖLFLON FEP 1x1.0 BK
Installation:
- conductor wire is connected by feazing of two brass screws to stainless steel electrode
- conductor is caulked by bushing Pg7 with protection degree IP68
Weight: 48.6 g / 1.7 oz.
Dimensions: max. diameter 21 mm/ 0.8”, lenght 96 mm / 3.8”
SHR-2 in open state
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
EAN code
SHR-3
Level probe SHR-3
Stainless probe to be used into demanding industrial environments, designated for screwing into tank wall or cover
The probe is installed in horisontal, vertical or in sidelong position on tank side or in tank cover. Installation is done by
soldering or by fixing nut. It is necessary to use 24 mm (1” ) screw. It is necessary to use an adequate torque with
regards to a seal and operational overpressure in a tank
Sensor has connecting wire - lenght 3 m, which is connected to sensor to scan electrode and sensor bushing
connecting wire is double-wire PVC AWG 18 (0.75 mm2) , connection of wires: brown - scan electrode, blue - sensor bushing
Connection M18x1.5 screw
Protection degree IP 67
Sensor weight without cable: 100 g (3.3 oz.)
Operating surroundings: place without the danger of detonation , temperature on screw: max. 95°C / 203 °F
Pressure immunity: on 25 °C / 77 °F 4 MPa, on 95°C / 203 °F 1.5 MPa
Weight: 239 g (8.4 oz.)
Material: bushing and sean electrode: stainless steel W.Nr. 1.4301, insulation insert of electrode: PTFE
Internal material: self - extinguishing epoxide resin
Operating temperature: -25 °C to +60 °C (-13 °F to 140 °F)
Total sensor lenght: 65.5mm /2.58 ”
Dimensions
8595188111270
83
Power factor monitoring relay COS-1
!
Relay monitors phase shift between current and voltage - cos-φ in 3-phase and also 1-phase mains for monitoring
overload/unloading of motors
!
Function “MEMORY” - manual reset - button on front panel
!
It is possible to connect current transformer in front of the device. This enables increase of current range
!
2 output relays, independent for each level
!
Adjustable delay to eliminate short peak overloading
!
Adjustable range and bottom level cos-φ, of power factor between 0.1- 0.99
!
Adjustable delay to eliminate starting of motor
!
Selectable hysteresis 5 or 10%
!
Galvanically separated supply AC 230 V, AC 400 V or AC/DC 24 V
!
Output contact: 2x changeover/DPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Symbol
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring
Voltage set:
Terminals:
Upper level cos-φ:
Bottom level cos-φ:
Max. permanent voltage:
Current range:
Current overloading:
Hysteresis:
Time delay t1:
Time delay t2:
Accuracy
Accuracy setting (mechanical):
Accuracy of repetition:
Temperature dependance:
Limit values tolerance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Description
A1
A1 - A2
AC 230 V, AC 400 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC/50-60Hz)
max. 4.5 VA
-15 %; +10 %
3x400 V / 50 Hz
L1, L2, L3, B1
adjustable 0.1 - 0.99
adjustable 0.1 - 0.99
(input L1, L2, L3) AC 3x460 V
0.1 - 16 A
20 A (<3 sec.)
adjustable 5% or 10%
adjustable 0.5 - 30 s
adjustable 0 - 10 s
5%
<1 %
< 0.1 % / °C
5%
2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
20 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
yellow LED
3x107
0.7x105
16
18 26
28
Sellection of function MEMORY
B1
L1
L2
L3
φ
A2
15
2nd relay function
(1-parallel , 2- independent)
25
Supply voltage
Hysteresis from faulty to normal state
Time delay t1 for motor starting
Upper level - MAX
Upper level - max exceeding
Output indication
Bottom level- min exceeding
Time delay t2 for peak elimination
Adjusting bottom level - Cos φ MIN
Connection
P
Un
Un
Un
S
3-phase connection
Technical parameters
A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3
inner
shunt
16 15 18 28 25 26
1-phase connection
8595188120906
8595188120265
8595188120272
8594030338131
Supply set 3x400 V
Connection with current
transformer
EAN code
COS-1 /230V
COS-1 /110V
COS-1 /400V
COS-1 /24V
!
A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3
inner
shunt
16 15 18 28 25 26
A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3
inner
shunt
16 15 18 28 25 26
Function
L1-L2-L3
MAX
Hystereze
Hysteresis
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
max.1x 2.5, max.2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
240 g (8 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1
COS φ
Hystereze
Hysteresis
MIN
RESET
t1
t2
t2
t1
t1
15-18
t2
t1
25-28
LED
φ
LED
φ
LED
MEMORY ON (DIP-2)
After the device is switched on, the yellow LED flashes for time t1 and both relays are switched (state OK). This delay serves to eliminate a faulty state e.g. motor start-up. If the upper limit is exceeded
(cosφ - max) red LED shines > cosφ . After a time delay t2 the output relay opens (15-18). Equally, if it falls under bottom limit (cosφ - min) red LED shines < cosφ and after a time delay t2 the output relay
opens (25-28). In case the load is disconnected (no current), red LED shines >cosφ (cosφ = 1).
84
Frequency monitoring relay HRF-10
!
3
The relay serves to monitor frequency of AC voltage, e.g. in photovoltaic power stations, generators
The monitored frequency 50/60/400 Hz is selected by a switch
!
Supply from monitored voltage
!
Two adjustable levels of frequency (Fmin, Fmax) in the range of 80 - 120% Fn
!
Adjustable difference level
!
Adjustable delay level
!
Switchable ranges of rated frequency Fn
!
3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
EAN code
HRF - 10 8595188144827
8144827
Device description
Technical parameters
HRF-10
Supply and monitoring terminals:
Supply voltage:
Rated frequency Fn:
Burden: (max):
Overload capacity:
- continuous:
- max.10s:
Frequency Fmax:
Frequency Fmin:
Difference:
Delay (until failure):
Opening level (Uopen):
Output relay - contact:
AC contact capacity:
DC contact capacity:
Mechanical life :
Other information
Operational temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strenght:
(napájení - kontakt relé):
Protection degree:
Overvltage category:
Pollution degree:
Profile of connecting wires (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
L, N
161 - 346V
50 / 60 / 400 Hz
1.7VA / 1.1W
346V
416V
adjustable 80 - 120 %Fn
adjustable 80 - 120 % Fn
adjustable 0.5 - 5 % Fn
adjustable 0.5 - 10 s
161V
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi) gilded
250V / 8 A, max. 2000VA
30V / 8A
3x106 at rated load
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV / 1 min.
III.
2
IP 40 from font panel / IP 20 terminals
max. 2 x 1.5mm2 / 1 x 2.5mm2 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
125 g (4.4 oz.)
EN 60255-6, EN 60255-27, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4
Supply/monitored voltage
terminals
L
N
Supply voltage
indication
Delay setting
HRF-10
Difference setting
Indication F > Fmax
Fmax setting
Fn setting
Indication F <Fmin
Fmin setting
16
15
18
28
25
26
Output contacts
Functions
Rated frequency setting
Fn setting = 50Hz
Fn setting = 60Hz
Fn setting = 400Hz
Connection
L
N
N
L
16 15 18 28 25 26
After the supply (monitored) voltage is connected the green LED is on.
If the value of the monitored frequency falls within the range between the two set levels Fmin - Fmax
no red LED is on. The relay UNDER is triggered (contacts 15-16-18) and the relay OVER is disconnected
(contacts 25-26-28).
If the monitored frequency exceeds the set level Fmax, the relay OVER is triggered after the set delay
timing elapses and the red LED OVER goes on. The red LED flashes during the timing.
If the monitored frequency drops below Fmax - difference, the relay is activated without delay and the
red LED OVER goes off.
If the monitored frequency drops below the set level Fmin, the relay UNDER is disconnected after the
set delay timing elapses and the red LED UNDER goes on. The red LED flashes during the timing. If the
monitored frequency exceeds the level Fmin + the difference, the relay is triggered without delay and
the red LED UNDER goes off.
If the monitored voltage is lower than the opening level Uopen both the relays are disconnected and
both the red LED (UNDER and OVER) start flashing slowly - indicating insufficient supply voltage.
85
Thermostats and hygrostats
Analog
TER
single thermostats
TER-3A
TER-3B
-30 to +10 °C
(-22 °F to 50 °F)
external NTC.
0 °C to +40 °C
(32 °F to 104 °F)
external NTC.
TER-3D
TER-3C
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F)
external NTC.
+30 °C to +70 °C
(86 °F to 158 °F)
external NTC.
TER-3H
-15 °C to +45 °C
(5 °F to 113 °F)
external NTC.
TER-3E
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F)
external NTC.
TER-3G
TER-3F
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F)
in-built NTC.
TER-4
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F)
external PT100.
TER-7
Monitoring heating of motor winding in
range given by resistance of in-built
PTC thermistor(1.8-3.3 kΩ), additional
function (memory, reset), output contact
2x8A changeover/ SPDT,
supply: AC/ DC 24-240 V.
Wide and accurate range of setting -40 °C to +110 °C
(-40 °F to 230 °F) in ten ranges
in one device, fine temperature setting.
2 inputs for NTC senzor, 2 outputs 16 A changeover/ SPDT, additional function
(memory, hysteresis, indication of faulty sensor).
Supply: AC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V (galv. separated ).
Thermo
ATR
ATF
Analog room thermostat with
temperature range +5 to +400 °C
(+41 °F to +104 °F)
night decline, flush mounted in to wiring box.
ATC
Analog floor thermostat
with temperature
range +5 to +50 °C
(+41 °F to +122 °F)
„temporary temperature change“ in range
±10 °C/ 50 °F.
Combined thermostat
with room and floor sensor,
temperature range
+5 to +50 °C
(+41 °F to +122 °F).
TEV
TEV-1
TEV-2
Thermostat with„dead zone“,
independent adjustable range
-20 to+20 °C ( -4 °F to +68 °F),
protection against freezing, water-proof type IP65.
Digital
TER
TEV-3
Thermostat for regulation
of heating (cooling), adjustable range
-20 to+20 °C ( -4 °F to +68 °F), externí
sensor NTC, external sensor NTC,
output contact 16A changeover/SPDT.
Thermostat for regulation
of heating (cooling), adjustable range
+5 to +35 °C (41°F to 149 °F), external sensor
NTC, output contact 16 A, control potentiometer and indication on panel.
Single exteriors thermostat
for monitoring and regulation
of temperature in demanding
enviroments (humid and
contaminated, agressive
and defective, industrial
workshops, washing rooms,
green-houses, cellars and
cooling boxes…)
Temperature range:
-30 °C to +60 °C /
-30 °C to 140 °F
Hygro-thermostat
TER-9 Digital multifunction thermostat
2 temperature inputs, 2 outputs 8A changeover/ SPDT, 6 functions,
in-built time switch clock, LCD with back light,
galvanically sep.supply voltage AC 230 V or AC/DC 24V, 2 MODUL.
Temperature range: -40 °C to +110 °C / -40 °C to 230 °F
RHT-1
Hygrostat
62x34x153
IP65
Hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring
and regulation in range 0 to + 60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)
and relative humidity monitoring and regulation in
range 50...90%
RHV-1
Hygro-thermostat for humidity monitoring
and regulation in range 0.. 90 % RH
Thermo
DTR
Digital room thermostat with
temperature range +5 to +50 °C
(+41 °F to +122 °F)
with in-built
(internal) sensor.
Intelligent regulation.
ATV-1
Energy-saving digital thermostat for
radiators, with temperature range
+8..+28°C.
DTF
DTC
Digital floor thermostat with
temperature range +5 ..+50 °C
with external sensor,
16 A potential-free contact.
Digital combined thermostat with room
and floor sensor with temperature range
+5 to +50 °C
(+41 °F to +122 °F),
pre-programmed programs
Accessories
to thermostats:
TC, TZ , PT-100
- external temperature sensors for
thermostats in lengths 3m, 6m,12m
-TC/TZ: thermistor NTC 12 kΩ/ 25 °C
PT: element PT-100 (only TER-3G)
86
TEV-4
62x34x153
IP65
LKM-45
Wiring box for thermostat
mounting on a surface.
Thermostats and hygrostats
Sensor
#
TER-3B
1M-DIN
#
#
NTC
#
TER-3C
1M-DIN
#
#
NTC
#
TER-3D
1M-DIN
#
#
NTC
#
TER-3E
1M-DIN
#
#
NTC
#
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F) 1 °C (34 °F )
TER-3F
1M-DIN
#
NTC
#
TER-3G
1M-DIN
#
# PT100
#
TER-3H
1M-DIN
#
#
NTC
#
TER-4
3M-DIN
#
#(2x)
NTC
TER-7
1M-DIN
#
#
PTC
TER-9
2M-DIN
#(2x)
NTC
#
TEV-1
IP65 box
#
#
INTC
#
TEV-2
IP65 box
#
#
NTC
#
TEV-3
IP65 box
#
#
NTC
#
TEV-4
IP65 box
#
NTC
#
#
#
ATR
ELEGANT
#
ATF
ELEGANT
#
ATC
ELEGANT
#
DTR
ELEGANT
# #
DTF
ELEGANT
#
DTC
ELEGANT
RHT-1
1M-DIN
RHV-1
IP65
ATV-1
valve
#
NTC
#
#
NTC
#
# #
NTC
#
NTC
#
#
NTC
#
# # #
NTC
#
#
#
built -in
#
#
built -in
# #
built -in
#
#
#
-30 °C to +10 °C
0.5 - 5 °C
(-22 °F to 50 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F)
0 °C to +40 °C
0.5 - 5 °C
(32 °F to 104 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F)
+30 °C to +70 °C 0.5 - 5 °C
(86 °F to 158 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F)
0.5 - 5 °C
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F)
Designation
NTC
Relative humidity
Hysteresis
Temperature range
Galv. separated
#
AC 24V
Type
#
AC 230V
External
1M-DIN
In-built
Analog
TER-3A
Digital
DESIGN
AC/DC 24 ..240V
Supply
Type
Type
single thermostat into a switchboard with external sensor
for temperature in cooling and against freezing
88
single thermostat into a switchboards with external sensor
for sensing room and operational temperature
88
single thermostat into a switchboards with external sensor
88
for sensing temperature in devices (overheating...)
single thermostat into a switchboard with external sensor
88
for sensing operational temperature of machines and devices
as TER-3D but with fixed hysteresis
88
-15 °C to +45 °C
1 °C/ 34 °F
(5 °F to 113 °F)
0.5 - 5 °C
0 °C to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F)
-15 °C to +45 °C 0.5 - 5 °C
(5 °F to 113 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F)
single thermostat into a switchboard with in-built sensor,
monitors operational temperature in a switchboard
88
as TER-3D but with input for sensor PT100
89
as TER-3A but with a different temperature range - for
cooling and heating
89
-40 °C to +110 °C 0.5 - 2.5 °C
(-40 °F to 230 °F) (32.9 °F to 37 °F)
Resistance
#
x
1.8-3.3 kΩ
-40 °C to +110 °C 0.5 - 5 °C
#
(-40 °F to 230 °F) (32.9 °F to 41 °F)
two-state thermostat (2 inputs, 2 outputs), two independent or
dependent thermostats, accurate setting, wide temperature range
90
thermistor relay for protection of motor overheating, input
designated for sensor PTC in-built in motor winding
91
multifunction( 6thermo functions) digital thermostat with
in-built time switch clock, 2 inputs/2 outputs
92
-20 to +20 °C 1.5 °C (35 °F )
( -4 °F to +68 °F)
thermostat with “dead zone” , control of heating and
protection against freezing, box for outdoor use with
98
-20 to +20 °C 1.5 °C(35 °F )
( -4 °F to +68 °F)
+5 to +35 °C 1.5 °C(35 °F )
(41°F to 149 °F)
single thermostat for regulation of heating, short sensor
is a part of this device, protection degree IP65
97
as TEV-2 but potentiometer and indication are placed
on front panel
97
-30 °C to +65 °C 0.5 / 1.5 / 4 0C
(-22 °F to 149 °F) 32.9/ 35/39 °F
single exteriors thermostat for monitoring and regulation
+5 to +40 °C
1 °C (34 °F )
( +41 °F to +104 °F)
+5 to +50 °C
1 °C (34 °F )
( +41 °F to +122 °F)
+5 to +50 °C
1 °C (34 °F )
( +41 °F to +122 °F)
0.5 -1°C
+5 to +50 °C
( +41 °F to +122 °F) (32.9 °F to 34 °F)
0.5 -1 °C
+5 to +50 °C
room analog thermostat line THERMO for mounting into
a wiring box
94
floor analog thermostat line THERMO for mounting
into a wiring box
94
room and floor (combined) analog thermostat line THERMO
for mounting into a wiring box
94
room digital thermostat line THERMO for mounting into
a wiring box
95
floor digital thermostat line THERMO for mounting into
a wiring box
95
room and floor ( combined) digital thermostat line
THERMO for mounting into a wiring box
95
#
( +41 °F to +122 °F) (32.9 °F to 34 °F)
+5 to +50 °C
0.5 -1 °C
( +41 °F to +122 °F) (32.9 °F to 34 °F)
#
0 to +60 °C
(32 °F to 140 °F)
H-4%
T- 2.5 °C
of temperature in demanding enviroments
hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring and
H-4%
regulation in range 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)
T- 2.5 °C(36.5 °F) and relative humidity in range 50.. 90%
0 ... 30 % RH hygro-thermostat for humidity monitoring
-30 °C to +60 °C
30 ... 60 % RH and regulation in range 0.. 90 % RH
(-22 °F to 140 °F) 2%, 3%, 4% 60 ... 90 % RH
+8..+28 °C
thermostatic direction valves, temperature regulation
+8..+28°C
99
100
101
96
87
Thermostats line TER-3 (A, B, C, D, G, H)
!
Single thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) in six ranges
!
It can be used for monitoring temperature e.g. in switchboards, heating systems, cooling systems, liquids, radiators,
motors, devices, open spaces, etc.
EAN code
TER-3A
TER-3B
TER-3C
TER-3D
TER-3G
TER-3H
8595188138390
8595188138406
8595188138413
8595188138420
8595188138451
8595188138468
Technical parameters:
!
Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring
!
Possibility to set function “heating”/”cooling” ( setting is done by DIP switch)
!
Adjustable hysteresis (sensitivity) , switching by potentiometer in range 0.5 to 5°C/ 32.9 to 41 °F
!
Choice of external temperature sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 3, 6 and 12 m (9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´)
!
It is possible to place sensor directly on terminal block – for temperature monitoring in a switchboard or in its surroundings
!
Multivoltage supply AC/DC 24 -240 V, not galvanically separated
!
Output contact 1x NO - SPST 16 A /250 V AC1
!
Red LED indicates status of output, green LED indicates energization of the device
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
TER-3
Function:
single level
Supply terminals:
A1-A2
Voltage range:
AC/DC 24 - 240V (galvanically unseparated) (AC 50-60Hz)
Burden:
2 VA
Operating range:
- 15 %; + 10 %
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
T1 - T1
TER - 3A -30 °C to +10 °C (-22 °F to 50 °F)
Temperature range:
TER - 3B 0 °C to +40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
(according to product type sensitivity)
TER - 3C +30 °C to +70 °C (86 °F to 158 °F)
TER - 3D 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)
TER - 3G 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)
TER - 3H -15 °C to +45 °C (5 °F to 113 °F)
Hysteresis:
Sensor:
Sensor fault indication:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech.):
Switching difference:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
ajustable in range 0.5 to 5°C/ 32.9 to 41 °F
external, termistor NTC , except for TER-3G (PT100)
flashing red LED
5%
0.5 °C / 32.9 °F
< 0.1 % / °C (< 0.1 % / °F)
1x NO (AgSnO2)
16A / AC1, 10A / 24V DC
4000 VA / AC1, 300 W / DC
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
2.5 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x 2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12)
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x 1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
73 g (2.6 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Symbol
Connection
18
A1
sensor
T1
T1
Un
A2
15
Function
A1
A2
T1
T1
15
18
Un
TEMPERATURE
Hysteresis
HEATING
15-18
LED
COOLING
15-18
LED
TEST
15-18
LED
]
]
]
]
15-18
LED
COOL
RUN
HEAT
TEST
COOL
RUN
HEAT
TEST
COOL
RUN
HEAT
TEST
short-circuit or
sensor disconnection
Function description
It is a single but practical thermostat with separated sensor for monitoring temperature. Device is placed
in a switchboard and external sensor senses temperature of required space, object, or liquid. Supply is
not galvanically separated from sensor. Sensor is double insulated. Maximal length of delivered sensor
is 12m/ 29.5´. device has in-built indication of sensor damage, which means that in case of short-circuit
or disconnection red LED fl ashes. Thanks to adjustable hysteresis, it is advantageous to regulate width of
the range and thus define sensitivity of load switching. Sensed temperature is decreased by set. hysteresis.
When installing it is necessary to keep in mind that hysteresis is increased by temperature gradient between
sensor’s jacket and thermistor.
Description
A1
Supply terminals
Sensor terminals
A2
T1
T1
Output indication
Supply voltage indication
Heating / cooling selection
Function TEST
Temperature adjusting
Hysteresis adjusting
Example of an order
Please specify a type of thermostat in your order (TER-3A, TER-3B .. or TER-3H) types differ in
temperature range and supply voltage.
15
88
18
Output contact
Thermostats line TER-3 ( E, F )
!
Single thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 to +60 °C /(32 °F to 140 °F)
!
It can be used for temperature monitoring e.g. in switchboards, heating systems, iquids, radiators, motors, devices,
open spaces, etc
EAN code
TER-3E 8595188138437
TER-3F 8595188138444
Technical parameters:
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperature range:
Hysteresis:
Sensor:
Sensor fault indic. (short-circuit / disconnection):
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech.):
Switching difference:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
Fixed hysteresis at 1 °C / 32 °F
!
TER-3E - choice of external temperature sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 3, 6 and 12 m (9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´)
!
TER-3F - sensor is a part of device, serves for monitoring temperature in a switchboard
!
Supply voltage AC /DC 24 - 240 V
!
Output contact 1x NO- SPST 16 A / 250 V AC1
!
Output status is indicated by red LED
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
TER-3F
TER-3E
Symbol
Connection
single level
A1-A2
AC /DC 24 - 240 V (AC 50-60Hz)
2 VA
- 15 %; +10 %
external sensor
Un
18
A1
T1
T1 - T1
X
Un
A1
A2
T1
T1
A1
A2
T1
0 to +60 °C /(32 °F to 140 °F)
fixed 1 °C/ 34 °F
thermistor NTC
in-built
A2
TER-3E
15
TER-3F
flashing red LED
15
5%
0.5 °C
< 0.1 % / °C
1x NO- SPST (AgSnO2)
16A / AC1,10 A / 24 V DC
4000 VA / AC1, 300 W / DC
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
2.5 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max. 2x 2.5 or 1x4
AWG 12
with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x 1.5
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
73 g (2.58 oz.)
74 g(2.61 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Example of an order
Please specify a type of thermostat in your order (TER-3E , TER-3F).
18
15
18
Description
A1
A2
T1
Supply voltage terminals
External sensor
T1
terminal
Supply voltage
indication
Output
indication
Temperature
adjusting
Supply voltage terminals
A1
A2
Output
indication
Supply voltage
indication
Temperature
adjusting
Sensor
15
18
Output
contacts
15
18
Output
contacts
Function
TER-3E, TER-3F
TEMPERATURE
HYSTERESIS=1K
Function description
It is a single thermostat for temperature monitoring with separated sensor (except for TER-3F). Device is
located in a switchboard and external sensor senses temperature of required space, object or liquid. Supply
is not galvanically separated from sensor but sensor is double insulated. Maximal length of sensor cable is 12
m (29.5´). Temperature sensing is decreased by set hysteresis. When installing it is necessary to keep in mind
that hysteresis is increased by temperature gradient between sensor’s jacket and thermistor.
89
2-stage thermostat TER-4
Two-state thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in a wide range -40 °C to +110 °C (-40 °F to 230 °F)
with a switch for temperature ranges shift and fine temperature setting ( high accuracy of setting)
! It can be used for temperature monitoring in e.g. switchboards, heating systems, cooling systems, open spaces, objects,
liquids, radiators, etc.
! 2 thermo inputs for sensor NTC 12 kΩ/25 °C (77 °F)
! Possibility to choose if both thermostats should work independently or dependently (by DIP switch)
! Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring
! Possibility to set functions “heating ” /“cooling ” (setting is done by DIP switch)
! Adjustable hysteresis (sensitivity)of switching 0.5 or 2.5 °C (32.9 or 37 °F) (DIP switch)
! Choice of external thermo sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 3, 6 and 12 m (9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´)
! It is possible to place the sensor directly on terminal block – to monitor temperature in a switchboard or in its surroundings
! Galvanically separated supply AC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V galvanically unseparated
! 2 independent output with changeover contacts/ SPDT 16 A /250 V AC1
! Output status indicated by red LED, faulty status of sensor by yellow LED
! 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
EAN code
TER-4 /230V: 8594030337806
TER-4 /24V: 8594030338148
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Supply voltage tolerance:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperatue ranges:
(set via switch individually
for each level)
Fine temperature setting:
Hysteresis for T1:
Hysteresis for T2:
Sensor:
Sensor failure indication:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mech.):
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Description
TER-4
Technical parameters:
double thermostat
A1-A2
AC 230 V (AC 50-60 Hz) galvanically separated, AC/DC 24V
max. 4.5 VA
- 15 %; + 10 %
Function of thermostat:
HEATING/COOLING
(inverts output)
Adjusting hysteresis for T1
Function: dependent /independent
Supply voltage indication
Adjusting hysteresis for T2
Output contact-relay 1
T1-T1 a T2-T2
-40 to -25 °C/ -40 to 77 °F
-25 to -10 °C/ 77 to 50 °F
-10 to +5 °C/ 50 to 41 °F
+ 5 to+20 °C/ 41 to 70 °F
+20 to+35 °C/ 70 to 95 °F
+35 to +50 °C/ 95 to 122 °F
+50 to +65 °C/122 to 149 °F
+65 to +80 °C/149 to 176 °F
+80 to +95 °C/176 to 203 °F
+95 to +110 °C/203 to 230°F
0-15 °C, in selected range
adjustable, 0.5 or 2.5 °C / 32.9 or 37°C (DIP switch)
adjustable, 0.5 or 2.5 °C / 32.9 or 37°C (DIP switch)
termistor NTC 12 kΩ/ 25 °C (77 °F)
yellow LED
5%
0.5 °C / 32.9 °F
< 0.1 % / °C (< 0.1 % / °F)
2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)16A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A /< 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
- 20.. +55 °C
- 30.. +70 °C
4 kV (supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)
238 g (8.4 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Temperature adjusting T1
Sensor failure
Temperature adjusting T2
Output contact-relay 2
Adjusting temperature range
Temperature adjusting fine
Connection
Symbol
Un
A1
16
18
26
1. sensor 2. sensor
28
A1 A2 T1 T1 T2 T2
T1
T1
T2
T2
A2
15
25
16 15 18 28 25 26
Function
Independent function
Dependent function
Un
Un
T1
H1
T2
H1
15-18
head
15-18
cool
Chart information:
Un –supply voltage
T1 –set temperature of thermostat 1
T2 –set temperature of thermostat 2
H1 –set hysteresis of thermostat 1
H2 –set hysteresis of thermostat 2
15-18 output contact of thermostat 1
25-28 output contact of thermostat 2
25-28
T1
15-18
no blocking
15-18
blocking
H2
H2
H1
H1
Blocking function:
When DIP switch 4 is in position ON, condition for
thermostat switching is switching output 15-18 at
both individual thermostats ( series function). Thus it is
possible to use e.g. first thermostat as operational and
the other as an emergency one.
Output 25-28 functions normally , according to T2.
This device includes 2 thermostats in one. Thermostat has 2 thermo inputs, 2 outputs and individual temperature setting. It offers two possibilities of use. Firstly it can be used as two individual thermostats
(e.g. for monitoring two temperature levels of one device or as a control of individual devices), secondly it is possible to set depending function of both thermostats, when thermostat 2 blocks thermostat
No.1 Advantage of this thermostats is a wide temperature range - 40.. +110 °C (in one device) with very good mechanical accuracy of setting. It is due to 10-state switch for thermo ranges and its scale
by 15 °C(59 °F) . VIt is possible to use fine tuning by potentiometer by 0-15 °C(32-59 °F) with accuracy ±1 °C/ 34 °F . Device has in-built control of sensor fault ( yellow LED). It is possible to set hysteresis
0.5 or 2.5 °C (32.9 or 37 °F).
It is possible to operate the thermostat only with one sensor. In that case it is necessary to connect a resistor 10 kΩ to the other input. This is a part of delivery.
90
Thermostat for monitoring temperature of motor winding TER-7
!
It monitors temperature in range of PTC thermistor
!
Fixed levels of switching
!
PTC sensor is used for sensing, It is in-built in motor winding by its manufacturer
!
MEMORY function - active by DIP switch
!
RESET of faulty state:
a) button on the front panel
b) by external contact (remote by two wires)
EAN code
TER-7: 8595188137164
Technical parameters:
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Cold sensor resistance:
Upper level:
Botton level:
Sensor:
Sensor failure indication:
Accuracy
Accuracy in repetition:
Switching difference:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Breaking capacity:
Inrush current:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (resistive):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring, red LED flashing indicates faulty sensor
!
Output contact: 2x changeover/DPDT 8 A /250 V AC1
!
Red LED shines and indicates exceeded temperature
!
Terminals of sensor are galvanically separated, they can be shorted out by terminal PE without damaging the device
!
Multivoltage supply AC/DC 24-240 V
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
TER-7
monitoring temperature of motor winding
A1-A2
AC/ DC 24 - 240 V (AC 50-60Hz)
max. 2 VA
-15 %; +10 %
Description
Supply terminals
Output contacts
A2
A1
25
28
26
Faulty states indication
Supply voltage indication
MEMORY function
Function TEST
Ta-Tb
50 Ω - 1.5 kΩ
3.3 kΩ
1.8 kΩ
PTC temperature of motor winding
blinking red LED
RESET button
< 5%
±5%
< 0.1 % / °C
Ta
2x changeover/DPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)8 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC
10 A /< 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500mW
3x107
0.7x105
Symbol
15
16
R
Tb
18
Output contacts
Terminals for sensor and reset
Connection
A1
16
18
26
28
A1
A2
Ta
-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)
25 26 28
PTC
Tb
-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F)
4 kV (supply - output)
15
25
R
A2
any
15 16 18
DIN rail EN 60715
Ta R Tb
IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals
III.
PTC
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 with sleeve max. 1x2.5 AWG (12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
Note
83 g (2.9 oz.)
Sensors could be in series in abide with conditions in technical specification - switching limit.
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Warning!: In case of supply from the main, neutral wire must be connected to terminal A2.
Function
∞Ω
Ω
3.3 Ω
1.8 Ω
Ω
Ω
red LED
memory
PTC / TK
The device controls temperature of motor winding with PTC thermistor which is mostly placed in motor winding or very close to it. Resistance
of PTC thermistor run to max 1.5 kΩ in cold stage.
By temperature increase the resistance goes strongly up and by overrun the limit of 3.3 kΩ the contact of output relay switch off - mostly
contactor controlling a motor. By temperature decrease and thereby decrease of thermistor resistance under 1.8 kΩ the output contact of
relay again switches on. The relay has function “Control of sensor fault“. This controls interruption or disconnection of sensor.When switch is
in position “TK” monitoring of faulty sensor is not functional - it is possibel to connect bimetal sensor with only 2 states: ON or OFF. The device
can work with bi-metal sensor in this position.
Other safety unit is function “Memory”. By temperature overrun (and output switches off ) the output is hold in faulty stage until service hit.
This bring the relay to normal stage (with RESET button) on front panel or by external contact (remote).
91
TER-9
Digital thermostat with 6 functions and built-in time switch clock with day, week and year program.
You can also limit temperature functions and courses this way in real time.
! Complex control of home and water heating, solar heating, etc.
! Two thermostats in one, two temperature inputs, two outputs with dry contact
! Maximum universal and variable thermostat including all ordinary thermostat functions
! Functions: two independent thermostats, dependent thermostat, differential thermostat, two level thermostat,
zone-based thermostat, dead zone thermostat
! Program setting of output functions, calibration of sensors according to reference temperature (offset)
! The thermostat is subject to the digital clock programs
! Wide operating range of temperature settings, the possibility of measuring in 0C and 0F
! Clear display of set and measured data on a backlit LCD
! Power supply: AC 230V or 24V AC/DC (based on type of device)
! The time switch clock has a battery backup, which retains data in case of a power outage (reserve backup time - up to 3 years)
! Easy replacement of the backup battery through the plug-in module, no disassembling is required
! Output contact 1x changeover/SPDT 8 A / 250 V AC1 for each output
! 2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
!
INNOVATION!
A1 A2
T1
T1
T2
T2
28
15 16 18 25 26
EAN code
TER-9/230V: 8595188124478
TER-9/24V: 8595188129190
Technical parameters:
Supply
Number of function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Burden:
Operating range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperature range:
Hysteresis (sensitivity):
Diference temperature:
Sensor:
Sensor failure indication:
Accuracy
Measuring accuracy:
Repeat accuracy:
Temperature dependance:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Max. breaking capacity:
Switching voltage:
Min. breaking capacity DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Time circuit
Power back-up:
Accuracy:
Min. switching interval:
Data stored for:
Program circuit
Number of memory places:
Program:
Data readout:
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Operating position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
92
TER-9
Symbol
Connection
Senzor 1 Sensor
Sensor
Senzor 2
Un
6
A1 - A2
AC 230 V (AC 50-60 Hz) galvanically separated,
AC/DC 24V galvanically unseparated
max. 4 VA
-15 %; +10 %
CR 2032 (3V)
T1-T1 and T2-T2
-40.. +110 °C
in an adjustable range 0.5.. 5 °C
adjustable 1.. 50 °C
termistor NTC 12 kΩ při 25 °C
displayed on the LCD
5%
< 0.5 °C
< 0.1 % / °C
1x changeover for each input/SPDT, (AgNi)
8 A / AC1
2000 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC
250 V AC1 / 30 V DC
symbol ON/OFF
A1
16
18
26
28
A1 A2 T1 T1 T2 T2
T1
T1
T2
T2
°C
15
A2
25
15 16 18 25 26 28
Description of visual elements on the display
Displaying the day
Status indication (1st channel)
Status indication (2nd channel)
Auto + t
Prog
Operation mode indication
Man
Displays 12/24 hour mode
Indication of the switching
program
Display of date / temperature
1 and 2 of setting menu
Time display
Control button PRG+
Control button MAN2 / ESC
TER-9
Reset
1x107
1x105
up to 3 year
max. ±1 s per day, at 23°C
1 min
min. 10 years
Control button OK
Control button MAN1 / -
Device description
Sensor-Terminal 1
Sensor-Terminal 2
Supply voltage terminal (A1)(A2)
A1
100
daily, weekly, yearly
LCD display, with back light
-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to 131 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4 kV (power supply - output)
any
DIN rail EN 60715
IP 20 terminals, IP 40 from front panel
III.
2
solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 35.6 x 64 mm
(230V) 127 g
(24V) 120 g
EN 61812-1. EN 61010-1. EN 60730-2-9; EN 60730-1; EN 60730-2-7
A2
T1
T1
T2
T2
Auto
Backlight display
TER-9
MAN 2
OK
MAN
RESET
Control buttons
ESC
PRG +
_
Lead-sealing point
28
15 16 18 25 26
Plug-in module for replacement
of the backup battery
Output - Channel 1(15-16-18)
Output - Channel 2 (26-25-28)
Multifunction digital thermostat TER-9
2 independent single-stage thermostats
Heating functions
T1
H1
H1
Ts1
dy1
dy2
dy2
dy1
15-18
Heating functions
T2
H2
H2
Ts2
dy2
dy1
dy2
dy1
25-28
Legend:
Ts1 - real (measured) temperature 1
Ts2 - real (measured) temperature 2
T1 - adjusted temperature T1
T2 - adjusted temperature T2
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2
dy1 - set switching delay of the output
dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact (for T1)
25-28 output contact (for T2)
Classic function of thermostat, output contact switched until adjusted temperature is
reached. Hysteresis eliminates frequent switching - output oscillation.
Legend:
Ts1 - real (measured) temperature 1
Ts2 - real (measured) temperature 2
T1 - adjusted temperature T1
T2 - adjusted temperature T2
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2
dy1- set switching delay of the output
dy2 - set delay on output breaking
25-28 output contact (for T2)
15-18 output contact (intersection T1 and T2)
Output 15-18 is closed, if temperature of both thermostats is bellow an adjusted level.
When any thermostat reaches adjusted level, the contact 15-18 opens.
Serial inner connection of thermostats (logic function AND).
Legend:
Ts1 - real (measured) temperature T1
Ts2 - real (measured) temperature T2
D - adjusted difference
dy1- set switching delay of the output
dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact (for T1)
25-28 output contact (for T2)
Switching of output corresponds with input, which has lower temperatures when
diff ference is exceeded.
Differencial thermostat is used for keeping two identical temperature e.g. in heating
systems (boiler and reservoir), solar systems (collector - reservoir, exchanger), water
heating (water heater, water distribution)etc.
Legend:
Ts - real (measured) temperature
T1 - adjusted temperature
D - adjusted difference
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - T=T1-D
dy1- set switching delay of the output
dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact
25-28 output contact
Typical example of use for two-stage thermostat is e.g in boiler-room, where there
are two biolers from which one is main and the other one is auxiliary. The main boiler
is managed according to set temperature and auxiliary boiler is switched in case
temperature falls under set difference. Thus it helps to the main boiler in case outside
temperature dramatically falls.
In the range of set difference (D) output 15-18 functions as normal thermostat to input
1 (type 1). In case temperature falls under set difference, second output switches too.
Legend:
Ts - real (measured) temperature
T1 - adjusted temperature
T2 - adjusted temperature T=T1-D
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2
dy1- set switching delay of the output
dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact
25-28 output contact
Output is closed (heating) only if temperature is within adjusted range. If temperature is
out of range, the contact opens. T is set as T1-D.
The function is used for protection of gutters against freezing.
Legend:
Ts - real (measured) temperature
T1 - adjusted temperature
T2- T=T1-D
H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1
H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2
dy1- set switching delay of the output
dy2 - set delay on output breaking
15-18 output contact (heating)
25-28 output contact (cooling)
In case of thermostat with a „dead zone“ , it is possible to set temperature T1 and a diff
erence (respectively a width of dead zone D). If temperature is higher than T1, output
contact of cooling switches ON; if the temperature gets bellow T1, the contact switches
OFF.
If the temperature gets bellow temperature T, the contact of heating switches ON and
it switches OFF when temperature T is exceeded. This function can be used for example
for automatic air warming and cooling in ventilation so the sit is always within the range
T1 and T.
Depending functions of 2 thermostats
H2
Ts2
T2
dy2
dy1
H2
H2
dy2
dy1
25-28
H1
Ts1
T1
dy1 dy2
dy2
dy1
H1
H1
dy1
15-18
dy1 dy2
dy1 dy2
15-18
Differential thermostat
Ts1
D-H1
D
D-H2
D
Ts2
D
dy2
dy1
15-18
dy1
dy2
dy1
25-18
2-stage thermostat
H1
T1
D
T
H1
H1
Ts
H2
H2
H2
dy1 dy2
dy2
dy1
dy1
dy2
15-18
dy1dy2
dy1
25-28
Thermostat with “WINDOW”
T1
H1
Ts
H1
H1
D
H2
H2
H2
T
T2
dy1
dy2
dy1
dy2
dy1
dy2
dy1
dy2
dy1
dy2
dy1
dy2
15-18
25-28
Thermostat with dead zone
H1
T1
Ts
D
H2
H2
H2
T
T2
dy1
dy2
15-18
dy1
25-28
H1
H1
dy2
dy1
93
Room and floor analog thermostat Thermo
ATR - Analog Thermo Room:
Room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +40 °C ( +41 °F to +104 °F) with a built-in sensor
! ATF - Analog Thermo Floor:
Floor thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F) with external sensor
Function „temporary temperature change“ in range ±10 °C (decreasing / increasing temperature)
!
ATC - Analog Thermo Combined:
Room and floor thermostat, sensors are connected in series and block each other
Function „temporary temperature change“ , fix -5 °C /+23 °F (night decline)
Temperature range +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F) for both sensors, adjustable separately
It is possible to use it without external sensor
!
Ø 65mm
!
EAN code - DEVICE:
ATR : 8595188125000
ATF : 8595188130165
ATC : 8595188130172
EAN code - COMPLET:
ATR, white frame Elegant: 8595188136228
ATF, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m : 8595188135870
ATC, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m: 8595188135887
To devices is neccessary to order additionally - frame in design ELEGANT and external sensor (except ATR)
Technical parameters:
Supply
Power supply and tolerance:
Consumption, frequency:
Measuring
Temperature range:
Accuracy:
Hysteresis:
Temperature sensor:
Night decline:
Off set/calibration:
Setting
Room temperature setting:
Floor temperature setting:
Offset setting:
Night decline setting:
Night decline switching:
Display
Power supply indication:
Output ON indication:
Night decline indication:
Indication of faulty fl oor sensor:
ATR
ATC
ATF
AC 230 V ±10 %,
6.5 VA/ 50-60 Hz
+5 to +40 °C ( +41 °F to +104 °F)
room
adj. ± 7 °C/45 °F
adj. ± 7 °C/45 °F
Description
Auxiliary button 1*
Main knob
main knob
x
main knob
x
main knob
auxiliary button 2
auxiliary button 1
auxiliary button 2
x
internal / external
internal pushbutton
Main switch
Indication of night decline
Supplyvolatge and output
indication
Night decline push-button
Wiring box
Supply cable
green LED 1
red LED 1
red / orange LED 2
* Auxiliary button 1 and 2 are accessible after removal of the main knob
red LED 2
Connection
LED 1 flashing
x
Standart jumper L-15
(remove when
potential-free contact is used)
ATR
LED 1 flashing
potential-free contact NO, material of contact - AgNi
16A/250 V, 4000 VA for AC1
galvanic
3x107
0.7x105
-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)
-20 °C to +70 °C (-4 °F to +158 °F)
4kV
wiring box with min. depth 30mm /1.18 ˝ , Ø min.65 mm / 2.6 ˝
IP30 in standard conditions
solid wire 1x 2.5 / 1.5 with sleeve (AWG 12)
84 x 89 x 56.4 mm ( 3.3 ˝ x 3.5 ˝ x 2.22˝ )
110 g (3.9 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
If potential-free contact is used
ATF
ATC
L
N
Design
L
N
Complete offer of switching devices line ELEGANT can
be found in an individual catalogue ELEGANT Home
switches, which can be sent to you upon request.
94
Auxiliary button 2*
+5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F)
±2 °C/ 36 °F
±1 °C/ 34 °F
floor
room + floor
adj. ±10 °C/50 °F
fix - 5 °C/ 41 °F
adj. ± 10 °C/50 °F
x
Indication- exceeded temp./ext.
sensor:
Output
Type:
Max. loadability:
Contact separation:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operating temperature:
Storage temperature:
Electrical strength:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
ATR, ATF, ATC
Night decline is activated by a pushbutton on device or external contact (only ATR)
Night decline setting is done by an auxiliary button 2(under main button, only ATR/ATF)
Ofset setting (calibration ±10 °C/ 50 °F) with „known“ thermometer.
External sensor (TC-3, 3m / 9.84’) is a part of delivery (only ATF/ATC), it is possible to extend its length up to 100 m/ 328’
Design ELEGANT*, wide range of colors, possibility to combine more frames together
Accessories:
See page 102
15
18
EXT.
SENZOR
Digital room and floor thermostat Thermo
Ø 65mm
EAN code - DEVICE:
DTR : 8595188125017
DTF : 8595188135924
DTC : 8595188135931
!
DTR - Digital Thermo Room:
Room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to+122 °F ) with a built-in sensor
!
DTF - Digital Thermo Floor:
Floor thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to+122 °F ) with external sensor
!
DTC - Digital Thermo Combined:
Combined thermostat with room and floor sensors and temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to+122 °F )
Choice of temperature display from internal or external sensors
By program it is possible to choose,which sensor is active and if it should function in serial or in parallel
!
DTF, DTC
External sensor (TC-3,3m)is a part of delivery (only ATF/ATC), it is possible to extend its length up to 100 m(328’)
Monitoring of disconnection or short-circuit of external sensor, fault is displayed
EAN code - COMPLET:
DTR, white frame Elegant: 8595188136235
DTF, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m : 8595188135863
DTC, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m: 8595188135856
To devices is neccessary to order additionally - frame in design ELEGANT and external sensor (except DTR)
Technical parameters
Supply
Power supply and tolerance:
Consumption, frequency:
Backup:
Measuring
Temperature range:
Accuracy:
Hysteresis:
Temperature sensor:
Adjusting
Min. temperature cycle:
Min. time cycle:
Number of programs:
Number of events:
Offset/calibration:
Display
LCD display:
Displaynig date:
Output indication:
Output
Type:
Max.loadability:
Contact separation:
Mechanical life:
Elektrical life:
Other information
Operating position:
Storing position:
Electical strenght:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
DTR
DTF
DTC
AC 230V ±15%,
1.5 VA, 50-60 Hz
rechargable accumulator LIR2032 (40mAh)
charging time from 0 to 100%: 3 hours
backup time when capacity is 100% 72 hours
+5 to +50 °C ( +41 to +122 °C )
± 0.5 °C / 0.5 °C (± 32.9 °C / 32.9 °C)
adjustable 0.5 °C or 1 °C /32.9 or 33.8 °C
room (internal) and
room (internal)
floor (external)
floor (external)
0.5 °C (32.9 °F)
10 min.
4; pre- set program 1
2- 6 in a program
adjustable ±0.5 °C (32.9 °F)
26x24 mm, with backlight (ON or OFF pernamently)
current time, set/ current temperature, day in a week, output status
red LED and symbol on LCD
Other Funktions DTR, DTF, DTC
- programs are pre-set according to most frequently used functions =„Plug and Play “
- pushbutton lock to prevent unwanted manipulation with thermostat
- choice of display current/set temperature
- „freezing protection“ in case temperature drops below +50 °C (+122 °F) thermostat always switches
heating on
- choice of function heating or cooling
- easy and intuitive control by four push-buttons
- automatic shift summer/winter time
- holiday mode -it is possible to set temperature and time from 1 hour to 99 days without any
intervention into program settings or turning heating off (suitable in case of planned absence
holiday...)
- modern desing in Elegant line of wall switch buttons, combinations with many colors and
multiframes are possible
Description of visual elements on the display
Program mode
Operational mode
Time setting
Manual mode (permanent/temporary)
External sensor

Program events
Description
Wiring box
Output
indication
potential- free contact NO - SPST, material of contact - AgNi (Silver Allow)
16A/250V, 4000VA by AC1
galvanic, electrical strength 4kV
3x107
0.7x105
-10 °C to +55 °C ( +14 °F to +131°F)
-20 °C to +70 °C ( -4 °F to +158°F)
4kV
IP30 in standard conditions
wiring box with min. depth 30mm /1.18 ˝ , Ø min.65 mm / 2.6 ˝
solid wire 1x 2.5 / 1.5 with sleeve (AWG 12)
84 x 89 x 54.3 mm ( 3.3 ˝ x 3.5 ˝ x 2.14 ˝ )
120 g (0.26oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1
Day of the week
AM/PM
Holliday mode
Temperature display
Display
Controlling
buttons
Supply cable
Reset
Connection
DTR
DTF
DTC
15
16 A/ 4000VA
250 VμAC1
18
L
16 A/ 4000VA
250 VμAC1
N
N
EXT.
SENZOR
Design
Complete offer of switching devices line ELEGANT can be found in an individual
catalogue ELEGANT Home switches, which can be sent to you upon request.
L
L
N
N
Accuracy:
See page 102
95
Energy-saving digital radiator thermostat ATV-1
!
NEW!
!
!
!
!
!
This energy-saving digital radiator thermostat is a programmable regulation device for various heaters,
but mainly radiators
It can be used to regulate temperature in closed rooms, thus helping to lower heat energy consumption;
Functions:
Manual mode - measuring and checking a manually set temperature
Automatic mode - control between two temperatures based on a set time program:
- comfort temperature (factory setting 21°C)
- energy-saving temperature (factory setting 16°C)
Intervals of heating and energy-saving operation can be set using a freely adjustable time program.
8 individually programmable switching times per day:
- 4 heating intervals
- 4 energy-saving intervals
The device features very quiet operation and long battery life (up 5 years)
Quick and easy installation
EAN code
ATV-1
8595188160889
USB programming
adapte
8595188160995
Technical parameters:
Other functions
ATV-1
Operating voltage:
Temperature range:
Color:
Dimensions (L x W x H):
Design:
3 V / DC (2 AA batteries 1.5 V / DC AA)
+ 8.. +28 °C
White
76.5 x 53.5 x 63 mm
Thermostatic direction valves, electronic
Examples of daily heating program:
1. Time function - the desired temperature can be set for a certain adjustable time interval
2. Vacation function - while you‘re gone, you can set and maintain the desired temperature
3. Open window function - when the temperature drops, the heating valve automatically closes in order
to save energy
4. Child safety block - blocking against undesired interference with the thermostat
5. Freeze protection - if the temperature drops below 6 °C, the valve opens until
the temperature again exceeds 8 °C. This keeps heaters from freezing.
Description of device
BATHROOM
heating
heating
heating
heating
21 °C
21 °C
02
saving
18
18°C°C
saving
saving
saving
saving
Mo
61
Di
21
Mi
Do
8
Fr
4
Sa
So
:
8:00 - 9:00 10:30 - 12:00
16:00
16:00--17:00
17:00
1. Display
2. Increase temperature
3.Button MENU
4. Button - timer function
5. Decrease temperature
6. OK button - confirm settings
AUTO
MANU
20:00
20:00--21:30
21:30
1
4
2
5
3
6
LIVING ROOM
saving
18
18°C°C
topí
heating
21 °C
21 °C
saving
9:00 - 10:00
Setting for ATV-1:
- manual
- via USB programming adapter PROGmatic
Using the programming port, in seconds your settings will be transferred
into the thermostat.
saving
17:00 - 20:30
Adapters
Type of valve
Heimeier, Junkers Landys+Gyr, MNG,
Honeywell, Braukmann
thread size M 30x1,5
Danfoss RAV
(the valve plunger must be fitted with the
enclosed pin)
Type of adapter
No adapter necessary
+ enclosed pin;
only for RAV
Package content
Package content
Danfoss RA
Thermostat
Danfoss RAVL
Adapters
Instruction manual
96

Thermostats TEV-2, TEV-3
TEV-2
TEV-3
!
Single thermostat with possibility of temperature management in adjustable range (it is possible to
modify this range or make a special one on request)
!
Used to regulate heating (or cooling) in demanding environments (outside , humidity, dustiness, etc.)
!
Thermostat is placed in water-proof box with IP65, which enables installation outside, with in-built sensor TC-0
!
TEV-2 - control and indication elements are placed under transparent cover
!
TEV-3 - control and indication elements are placed directly on the cover (for easy orientation and frequent
change of temperature)
EAN code
TEV-2: 8595188129251
TEV-3: 8595188129268
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Input:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperature ranges:
Hysteresis (sensitivity):
Sensor:
Faulty sensor indication:
Accuracy
Accuracy of settings (mechanical):
Dependance on temperature:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Max. breaking capacity:
Peak current:
Switched voltage:
Min.switching output DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life (AC1):
Other information
Operation temperature:
Operation position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Polution level:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
TEV-2
TEV-3
!
Thermostat status is indicated by LED (2 colours)
!
Function of monitoring sensor disconnection and short-circuit
!
Output changeover /SPDT contact 16A(AC-1)
Symbol
Connection
Function heating
one-level thermostat
L-N
230V AC / 50 - 60 Hz
max. 2.5 VA
±15%
L
V1
Function cooling
V2
T
T
T- T
-20 to +20 °C / -4 °F to +68 °F +5 to+35 °C/ +41 °F to +95 °F
3 °C (± 1.5 °C) / 37,4 °F (± 34.7 °F)
thermistor NTC 12 kΩ
red LED flashing
N
L
SENSOR NTC
SENSOR NTC
Description TEV-2 (without cover)
5%
< 0.1 % / °C
Device status indication
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384W / DC
30 A/ < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24V DC
500 mW
red LED
3x107
0.7x105
-30 to +50 °C (-22 °F to 122°F)
any
IP 65
III.
2
solid wire 2.5/ with sleeve 1.5 (AWG 12)
110 x 135 x 66 mm (4.33˝x 5.3˝x 2.3˝)
266 g (9.38 oz.)
277 g(9.77 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Temperature setting
Terminal for sensor
Terminals for connection of supply
voltage and output contact
PG11
PG11
PG9
Sensor
Opening for incoming cables
Description TEV-3 (cover)
Device status indication
Function TEV-2,TEV-3
Hysteresis
Sensor
failure
Temperature setting
V1
LED red
LED green
TEV-2 and TEV-3 are universal single thermostats for universal use. In case ambient
temperature is higher than set temperature relay is open (function HEATING), for cooling
function (opposite function) is possible to use NC contact of relay (V2).
PG11
PG11
Opening for incoming cables
PG9
Sensor
97
Thermostat TEV-1
EAN code
TEV-1: 8595188129121
Technical parameters
Function:
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Input:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Measuring circuit
Measuring terminals:
Temperature ranges:
thermostat 1
thermostat 2
Hysteresis (sensitivity):
Sensor:
Faulty sensor indication:
Accuracy
Accuracy of settings (mechanical):
Dependance on temperature:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Max. breaking capacity::
Peak current:
Switched voltage:
Min.switching output DC:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life:
Other information
Operation temperature:
Operation position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution level:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
!
Two-level thermostat with function “WINDOW” meaning that output is switched in case the measured temperature
is within set range ( adjustable in range -20.. +20 °C/ -4 °F to +68 °F)
!
Used as protection against freezing ( water-shoots, pavements, drives, pipes, etc.) heating is on when temperature
falls under set upper level (e.g.+5 °C/ +41 °F) and off in case it falls under lower level (e.g.-10 °C /-50 °F ,
when heating is not able effectively operate)
!
Thermostat is placed in water-proof box with IP65, which allows installation outside, with in-built sensor TC-0
!
Thermostat status is indicated by LED (3colors) under transparent cover
!
Function monitoring short-circuit and sensor disconnection (break)
!
Output changeover contact 16A/ SPDT (AC-1)
TEV-1
two-level thermostat
L-N
230V AC / 50 - 60 Hz
max. 2.5 VA
±15 %
Symbol
Connection
Function heating
L
V1
Function cooling
V2
T
T
T-T
N
L
-20.. +20 °C (-4 °F to +68 °F)
-20.. +20 °C (-4 °F to +68 °F)
3°C (± 1.5 °C)
thermistor NTC 12 kΩ/ 25 °C (77 °F )
red LED flashing
SENSOR NTC
Function
5%
< 0.1 % / °C
Un
1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)
16 A / AC1
4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC1 / 24 V DC
500 mW
LED
3x107
0.7x105
T2
Hysteresis
T1
Sensor
failure
V1
LED red
LED green
LED orange
Description
-30 °C to +50 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F)
any
IP 65
III.
2
solid wire 2.5/ with sleeve 1.5 (AWG 12)
110 x 135 x 66 mm (4.33 ˝x 5.3 ˝x 6.6 ˝)
238 g (8.4 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Device status indication
Bottom temperature setting
Upper temperature
Terminal for sensor connection
V1
L V2 N
N
T1
T1
Description of function
TEV-1 is a double thermostat designated for system of protection of roof watershoots against freezing. The device is placed in a waterproof box (IP65), sensor
with double insulation,which is a part of the device, senses ambientrature. The
device operates as zonal thermostat with independent setting of upper and bottom
operational temperature. In case the ambient temperature is higher than T1 (upper
temperature), thermostat switches heating of watershoots off (icing melts down). In
case the ambient temperature is lower than T2 (bottom temperature), thermostat
also switches heating off (to big freezing heating cannot manage to melt the ice).
98
SENSOR NTC
PG11
PG11
Terminals for connection of supply
voltage and output contact
PG9
Sensor
Opening for incoming cables
Thermostat TEV-4
!
Single point thermostat for monitoring and regulation of temperature in demanding enviroments (humid and
contaminated, agressive and defective, industrial workshops, washing rooms, green-houses, cellars and cooling boxes…)
153x62x34
IP65
!
External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall
!
Built-in thermo-sensor is integrated in the device
!
Two fuctions adjustable by jumper: heating and cooling
!
3 adjustable (by jumper) ranges of temperature, and fine adjustment through potentiometer
!
3 adjustable (by jumper) levels of hysteresis
!
Supply voltage 230 V AC
!
Potentialless NO- SPST contact 12A AC1 switching
EAN code
TEV-4: 8595188140577
L-N
AC 230V / 50 - 60Hz
- 15% .. +10%
max. 6VA / 0.7W
setting by jumper J3
cooling
heating
by jumper J2
-30 °C to 0 °C (-22 °F to 32 °F)
0 °C to +30 °C (32 °F to 86 °F)
+ 30 °C to +60 °C (86 °F to 140 °F)
potentiometer
0.5 / 1.5 / 4 °C (32.9 °F/ 34.7 °F/ 39.2 °F)
by jumper J1
Cable gommet M16x1.5
for cable max. Ø 10mm/ 0.4˝
TEV-4
L
15
18
J1
Hysteresis
(°C)
1 x NO- SPST (AgSnO2)
12 A / AC1
3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC / 24 V DC
500 mW
3 x 107
0.7 x 105
L
N
J2
Adjustable range
setting (°C)
J3
Function
cooling
heating
-30 .. 0
0 .. 30
30 .. 60
0.5
1.5
4
Slight setup finish in the frame of range
-30 °C to +65 °C (-22 °F to 149 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4kV (supply-output)
sensor-side down
IP65
III.
2
max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12)
CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY4x1.5)
153 x 62 x 34 mm ( 6˝ x 2.4˝ x 1˝)
148 g (5.2 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, 61010-1
Function
Hole for mounting
on the wall
Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝
adjustable
hysteresis
Temperature sensor
Connection
L
N
L
N
jumper for L
potential
L
15
18
Actual
temperature level
Setup
temperature level
Hole for mounting on the wall
Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝
potentialless
NO contacts
~
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Input (apparent/loss):
Function
Function - :
Function - :
Temperature setting
- range 1:
- range 2:
- range 3:
Slight temperature setting:
Hysteresis:
Hysteresis setting:
Output
Output contact:
Current rating:
Max. breaking capacity:
Peak current:
Switched voltage:
Min.switching output:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life:
Other information
Operation temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh:
Operation position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution level:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Suggested power-supply cable:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Description (proportion is accordant to real size)
TEV-4
57mm(2.24”)
Technical parameters:
L
N
3- wire connection
L
15
18
L
N
4- wire connection
L-N
Function
heat
15 - 18
 Function
cool
Device is standardly supplied with jumper L-15 (3-wire connection).
For the correct function of device is neccesary sensor-side down device mounting.
15 - 18
99
Hygro-thermostat RHT-1
!
Hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)
and relative humidity monitoring and regulation in range 50...90%
EAN code
RHT-1: 8595188137263
Technical parameters
Possibility of setting of up to 8 conditions for contact switching and function permanently ON/OFF
!
Sensor is a part of the device - designated for measuring in switchboards
!
Function of sensor control (damage, disturbances...)
!
Fixed setting of temperature hysteresis at 2.5 °C / 36.5 °F and humidity at 4%
!
Output state is indicated by red LED
!
Supply voltage AC/DC 24-240 V
!
Output contact 1x NO/ SPDT 16A/250 V AC1
!
1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting
Device description:
RHT-1
Function:
Supply terminals:
Input:
Voltage range:
Tolerance of voltage range:
Measuring circuit
Temperature range:
Humidity range:
Temperature hysterisis:
Humidity hysterisis:
Sensor: internal
Indication of sensor´s fault:
Accuracy
Setting accuracy (mechanical):
Long-term stability of humidity:
Output
Number of contacts:
Current rating:
Switched output:
Switched voltage:
Output indication:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life:
Other information
Operational temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh:
Operational position:
Mounting:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage category:
Pollution degree:
Terminal wire capacity (mm2):
hygro-thermostat
A1 - A2
1VA
24-240V AC / DC (AC 50 - 60 Hz)
-15%; +10%
Output contacts
Ventilative upper oppenings
18
15
TOP
Output indication
Indication of supply voltage
Function setting
0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)
50.. 90%
2.5 °C / 36.5 °F
4%
internal
red LED flashing
Temperature setting
Humidity setting
5%
typical < 0.8% / year
1x NO/SPDT (AgSnO2)
16A / AC1, 10A / 24V DC
4000 VA / AC1, 300W / DC
250V AC1 / 24V DC
red LED shines
3x107
0.7x105
-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F )
2.5 kV (supply-output)
vertical, with correct orientation
DIN rail EN 60715
IP40 from front panel, IP10 on terminals
III.
2
max. 2x2:5, max. 1x4
with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12)
90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)
69 g (2.4 oz. )
EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Symbol
Connection
A1
15
A2
18
Ventilative lower opennings
A2
A1
Supply voltage terminals
Funcions:
Choice of function
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
ON
OFF
Relay switched under the following conditions
T > Tset
T < Tset
T > Tset
T < Tset
T < Tset
T > Tset
T < Tset
T > Tset
or
or
or
or
a
a
a
a
relay permanently ON
relay permanently OFF
RH > RHset
RH > RHset
RH < RHset
RH < RHset
RH < RHset
RH < RHset
RH > RHset
RH > RHset
Description of functon:
15
18
A2
A1
T
RH
-
+
Un
100
!
This device is designated for monitoring of parameters of environment (meaning temperature and
relative humidity) in switchboards. It enables setting of eight conditions of constact closing and therefore
it is usable for various types of load (e.g. fans, heating, air-conditioning, dehydrating units...). While
installing it is neccessary to take into account the fact that hysterisis rises by persistence of measured
values between sensor and ambient environment. The device is equipped by sensor fault detection. In
case of sensor fault, exceeding allowed limits (for temperature -30°C/ -22 °F and +80°C/ 176 °F; for
humidity 5% and 95%) or in case of faulty internal communcation higher than 50% ( due to e.g. high
ambient disturbances) contact opens and sensor fault is indicated. Sensor fault doesn´t have influence on
function permanently ON or pemanently OFF.
Note: In case the conditions for switching are not applied, relay is open.
Hygrostat RHV-1
153x62x34
IP65
!
Single hygrostat is used for regulation of humidity in harsh environments (washdown, greenhouse, refrigeration)
!
External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall
!
Built-in hygro-sensor is integrated in the device
!
Two functions adjustable by jumper: moisting and drying
!
3 adjustable (by jumper) levels of hysteresis
!
Supply voltage 230V AC
!
NO contact closure 12A/AC1
EAN code
RHV-1: 8595188140584
Supply
Supply terminals:
Voltage range:
Input voltage range:
Input (apparent/loss):
Setting function
Function -  :
Function -  :
Set. the scale of relative humidity:
- range 1:
- range 2:
- range 3:
Slight setting of relative humidity:
Hysteresis
Hysteresis setting:
Output
Output contact:
Current rating:
Switching output:
Peak current:
Switched voltage:
Min.switching output:
Mechanical life:
Electrical life:
Other information
Operation temperature:
Storing temperature:
Electrical strengh:
Operation position:
Protection degree:
Overvoltage cathegory:
Pollution level:
Max. cable size (mm2):
Suggested power-supply cable:
Dimensions:
Weight:
Standards:
Description (proportion is accordant to real size)
RHV-1
L-N
AC 230V / 50 - 60Hz
- 15% .. +10%
max. 6VA /0.7W
Setting function Jumper J3
moistening
drying
Humidity setting Jumper J2
0 ... 30 % RH
30 ... 60 % RH
60 ... 90 % RH
Relative Humidity Setting Potentiometer
2, 3, 4 % from setup rate
Jumper J1
Cable gommet M16x1.5
for cable max. Ø 10mm/ 0.4˝
Hole for mounting on
the wall Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝
RHV-1
L
15
18
J1
Hysteresis
(% from
value)
1 x NO-SPST (AgSnO2)
12 A / AC1
3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC
30 A / < 3 s
250 V AC / 24 V DC
500 mW
3 x 107
0.7 x 105
J3
J2
Adjustable range Function
setting (%RH)  drying
 moistening
0 .. 30
30 .. 60
60 .. 90
2
3
4


Slight setup finish in the frame of range
-30 °C to +60 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F)
-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
4kV (supply-output)
sensor-side down
IP65
III.
2
max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x2.5( AWG 12)
CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY4x1.5)
153 x 62 x 34 mm (6˝ x 2.4˝ x 1.3˝)
148 g (5.2 oz.)
EN 60730-2-9, 61010-1
Hole for mounting
on the wall
Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝
L
N
L
N
jumper for L
potential
potentialless
NO- SPST
contacts
L
15
18
Actual
humidity level
Humidity sensor
Connection
Function
Setup relative
humidity level
L
N
57mm(2.24”)
Technical parameters:
L
N
L
15
18
L
N
Adjustable
hysteresis
3- wire connection
4- wire connection
L-N


Function
moistens
15 - 18
Function
drying
15 - 18
Device is supplied with a standard jumper.
For the device to operate correctly, it must be mounted with the sensor side down.
101
Temperature sensors TC, TZ, PT100 - Accessories to Thermostats
!
Thermister temperature sensors are made of Negative Temperature Co-efficient (NTC)
embedded in a PVC or metal sleeve with a thermally-conductive sealer
Sensor TC - lead-in cable to sensor TC is made of wire CYSY 2Dx0.5 mm/ 0.02”
Sensor TZ - cable VO3SS-F 2Dx0.5mm /0.02” with silicone insulation for use in high
temperature applications
- silicone insulation for use in high temperature applications
Sensor PT100 - shielded silicon 2x0.22 mm 2 (AWG 21), shielding connected with a case
!
Weight of sensors TC:
Weight of sensors TZ:
Weight of sensors PT100:
- TC-0 - 5 g (0.2 oz.)
- TC-3 - 108 g (3.8 oz.)
- TC-6 - 213 g (7.5 oz.)
- TC-12 - 466 g (16.4 oz.)
- TZ-0 - 4.5 g (0.16 oz.)
- TZ-3 - 106 g (3.74 oz.)
- TZ-6 - 216 g (7.6 oz.)
- TZ-12 - 418g (14.7 oz.)
- PT100-3 - 68 g (2.4 oz.)
- PT100-6 - 149 g (5.3 oz.)
- PT100-12 - 249 g (8.8 oz.)
!
EAN code
TC-0
TC-3
TC-6
TC-12
TZ-0
TZ-3
TZ-6
TZ-12
PT100-3
PT100-6
PT100-12
TC
TZ
Technical parameters
Range:
Scanning element:
In air/ in water:
In air/ in water:
Cable material:
Terminal material:
Protection degree:
!
8595188110075
8595188110617
8595188110082
8595188110099
8595188140591
8595188110600
8595188110594
8595188110587
8595188136136
8595188136143
8595188136150
PT100
TC
TZ
PT100
0 °C to +70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)
NTC 12K 5 %
(τ65)
92 s / 23 s
(τ95)
306 s / 56 s
High temperature PVC
High temperature PVC
IP 67
-40 °C to +125 °C (-40 °F to 257 °F)
NTC 12K 5 %
(τ65)
62 s / 8 s
(τ95)
216 s / 23 s
Silicone
Nickel plated copper
IP 67
-30 °C to +200 °C (-22 °F to 392 °F)
Resistive values of sensors in dependance on temperature
Temperature ( 0C/ 0F )
Sensor NTC (kΩ)
Sensor PT100 (Ω)
20 / 68
14.7
107.8
30 / 86
9.8
111.7
40 / 104
6.6
115.5
50 / 122
4.6
119.4
60 / 140
3.2
123.2
70 / 158
2.3
PT 100
(τ0.5)
-/7s
(τ0.9)
- / 19 s
Silicone
Copper
IP 67
127.1
0
Tolerance of sensor NTC 12 kΩ is ± 5% by 25 C/ 77 F .
Long-term resistence stability by sensor PT100 is 0.05% (10 000 hours)
τ65 (95): time, which sensor needs to heat up on 65 (95) % of ambient temperature of environment, in which is located
TZ: Temperature sensors for range -40 °C to +125 °C (-40 °F to 257 °F)
TC-0 Temperature sensor can be connected directly to terminal
block (sensor length 110 mm/4.33")
TC-3 Temperature sensor 3 m (9.8´)
TC-6 Temperature sensor 6 m (19.7´)
TC-12 Temperature sensor 12 m (39.4´)
TZ-0 Temperature sensor can be connected directly to terminal
block (lenght of sensor 110mm/ 4.33˝)
TZ-3 Temperature sensor 3 m (9.8´)
TZ-6 Temperature sensor 6 m (19.7´)
TZ-12 Temperature sensor 12 m (39.4´)
Diagramm of sensor warm up via air
70
PVC
Silikon
60
50
a [oC]
TC: Temperature sensors for range 0 °C to +70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)
0
40
30
PT-100: Temperature sensor for range -30 °C to +200 °C (-22 °F to 392 °F)
20
PT100-3 -Temperature sensor 3 m (9.8´), double isolation silicone
PT100-6 -Temperature sensor 6 m (19.7´), double isolation silicone
PT100-12 -Temperature sensor 12 m (39.4´), double isolation silicone
10
0
00:00
02:53
05:46
08:38
11:31
14:24
17:17
s [min]
Sensor drawing
TC
20 mm/ 0.8˝
PT100
8.2 mm
0.3˝
TZ
4.6 mm
0.2˝
24 mm / 0.9˝
PVC -reaction
to water temperature
from 22.5 0C to 58 0C
(from 72.5 0F to 136.4 0F)
Silicone - reaction
to water temperature
from 22.5 0C to 63.5 0C
(from 72.5 0F to 144.5 0F)
22.65 mm/ 0.9˝
6.2 mm
0.2˝
Sensor photo
Installation box LKM-45
TC
TZ
Recommended installation box for wall mounting of THERMO
thermostats
PT100
Type LKM- 45, dimensions: 98x98x45 mm, color: white
EAN code: 8595188130806
102
Installation contactors
Installation contactors VS
VS120
VS220
Number of contacts: 1x20 A
Configuration of switching
and breaking contacts:
10, 01
Number of contacts: 2x20 A
Configuration of switching
and breaking contacts:
20, 11, 02
VS420
Number of contacts: 4x20 A
Configuration of switching
and breaking contacts:
40, 31
VS425
VS440
VS463
Number of contacts: 4x25 A
Configuration of switching
and breaking contacts:
40, 31, 22, 04
Number of contacts: 4x40 A
Configuration of switching
and breaking contacts:
40, 31, 22, 04
Number of contacts: 4x63 A
Konfigurace spínacích a
rozpínacích kontaktů:
40, 31, 22
Installation contactors with manual control VSM
VSM220
VSM425
Number of contacts: 2x20 A
Configuration of switching
and breaking contacts:
20, 11, 02
Number of contacts: 4x25 A
Configuration of switching
and breaking contacts:
40, 31, 22, 04
Accessories
Auxiliary
contacts
VSK
VSK-11
VSK-20
auxiliary contacts:
1x switching,
1x breaking.
auxiliary contacts:
2x switching
Installation
spacer
IKV
Module spacer
Contactror‘s loadability and dimensions
x
4
3
2
1
y
103
103
Installation contactors VS120, VS220, VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463
!
!
!
!
EAN code
see page 108
Technical parameters
Rated insulation voltage (Ui):
Rated thermo-current lth (in AC):
Switched operation
AC-1 for 400 V, 3 phase:
AC-1 for 230 V:
AC-3 for 400 V, 3 phase:
AC-3 for 230 V:
AC-7a for 400 V, 3 phase:
AC-7a for 230 V:
AC-7b for 400 V, 3 phase:
AC-7b for 230 V:
AC-15 for 400 V, 1 phase:
AC-15 for 230 V, 1 phase:
DC1 Ue = 24 V:
DC1 Ue = 110 V:
DC1 Ue = 220 V:
Loadability of modular contactors see page143
The max. number of switching for max. load:
Electrical life in 230 / 400 V
AC-1- resistive load :
AC-3-power load:
AC-5a - high-intensity discharge lamp:
AC-5b - incandescent lamps :
AC-7a - resistive household devices:
AC-7b - inductive household devices:
Minimal load:
Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM:
Coordination Type according EN 60 947-4-1:
Electrical strenght:
Contacts - max. cable size:
Solid conductor:
Stranded conductor:
Maximal torque:
Coil - max. cable size:
Solid conductor:
Stranded conductor:
Max. torque:
Operating
Coil control voltage:
Coil permanent supply +/- 10 %:
Coil gear supply +/- 10 %:
Mounting side-by-side:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Standards:
For switching electric circuits, especially for resistave loads
and three-phase induction motors
number of contacts VS120: 1
number of contacts VS220: 2
number of contacts VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463: 4
It is produced in configuration of switching and breaking contacts:
VS120: 10, 01
VS220: 20, 11, 02
VS420: 40, 31
VS425: 40, 31, 22, 04
VS440: 40, 31, 22, 04
VS463: 40, 31, 22
Protection IP 20 - on request we deliver covers that ensure protection IP 40
for all terminals
DIN rail or panel mounting
VS120
VS220
VS420
VS425
VS440
VS463
230 V
20 A
230 V
20 A
415 V
20 A
440 V
25 A
440 V
40 A
440 V
63 A
x
4 kW, 1 phase
x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
x
4 kW, 1 phase
x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
4A
6A
20 A
6A
0.6 A
x
4 kW, 1 phase
x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
x
4 kW, 1 phase
x
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
4A
6A
20 A
6A
0.6 A
13 kW
7.5 kW, 3 phase
2,2 kW
1.1 kW, 3 phase
13 kW
7.5 kW, 3 phase
2,2 kW
1.1 kW, 3 phase
4A
6A
20 A
2A
0.5 A
16 kW
9 kW, 3 phase
4 kW
2.2 kW, 3 phase
16 kW
9 kW, 3 phase
4 kW
2.2 kW, 3 phase
4A
6A
25 A
6A
0.6 A
26 kW
16 kW, 3 phase
11 kW
5.5 kW, 3 phase
26 kW
16 kW, 3 phase
11 kW
5.5 kW, 3 phase
4A
6A
40 A
4A
1.2 A
40 kW
24 kW, 3 phase
15 kW
8.5 kW, 3 phase
40 kW
24 kW, 3 phase
15 kW
8.5 kW, 3 phase
4A
6A
63 A
4A
1.2 A
600 switch/hr.
600switch/hr.
600 switch/hr.
600 switch/hr.
600 switch/hr.
0.2x106
0.3x106
0.1x106 by 30 μF
0.1x106 by 2 kW
0.2x106
0.3x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
20 A
2
4 kV
0.2x106
0.3x106
0.1x106 by 30 μF
0.1x106 by 2 kW
0.2x106
0.3x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
20 A
2
4 kV
0.2x106
0.3x106
0.3x106 by 36 μF
0.1x106 by 2 kW
0.2x106
0.3x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
20 A
2
4 kV
0.2x106
0.5x106
0.1x106 by 36 μF
0.1x106 by 2 kW
0.2x106
0.3x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
25 A
2
4 kV
0.1x106
0.15x106
0.1x106 by 220 μF
0.1x106 by 4 kW
0.1x106
0.15x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
63 A
2
4 kV
0.1x106
0.15x106
0.1x106 by 330 μF
0.1x106 by 5 kW
0.1x106
0.15x106
≥ 24 V, ≥ 100 mA
80 A
2
4 kV
AWG 7 (10 mm2)
6 mm2
1.2 Nm
AWG 7 (10 mm2)
6 mm2
1.2 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
1.2 Nm
AWG 7 (10 mm2)
6 mm2
1.2 Nm
AWG 3 (25 mm2)
16 mm2
3.5 Nm
AWG 3 (25 mm2)
16 mm2
3.5 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
2.1 VA/2.1 W
2.1 VA/2.1 W
max. 2 contactors**
120 g (4.2 oz.)
17.5x85x60 mm
(0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
2.1 VA/2.1 W
2.1 VA/2.1 W
max. 2 contactors**
130 g(4.6 oz.)
17.5x85x60 mm
(0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)
AC 24 V, 48 V
110 V, 230 V
5 VA/1.5 W
30 VA/25 W
max. 2 contactors**
170 g(6 oz.)
35x62.5x57 mm
(1.4˝x 2.7˝x 2.24˝)
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
2.6 VA/2.6 W *
2.6 VA/2.6 W *
max. 2 contactors**
213 g(7.5 oz.)
35x85x60 mm
(1.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
5 VA/5 W
5 VA/5 W
max. 2 contactors**
400 g(14 oz.)
53.3x84x60 mm
(2.1˝x 3.31˝x 2.4˝)
AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,
110 V, 230 V
5 VA/5 W
5 VA/5 W
max. 2 contactors**
400 g (14 oz.)
53.3x84x60 mm
(2.1˝x 3.31˝x 2.4˝)
600 switch/hr.
IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 61095, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, EN 61095, VDE 0660
* 3.8 VA/3,8 W for -04 version of contacts
** Note: In case several contactors are mounted close to each other, you need to use a installation spacer between every other contactor. We offer installation spacer of type IKV.
104
104
Connection
VS120
VS120-10
VS120-01
1
A1 +
R1
A1 +
2
A2 -
R2
A2
VS220-02
1
3
A1 +
1
R3
A1 +
R1
R3
A1 +
2
4
A2 -
2
R4
A2 -
R2
R4
A2 -
VS420-40
VS420
VS420-31
1
3
5
7 13
A1
1
3
5
21
A1
2
4
6
8 14
A2
2
4
6
22
A2
VS425-40
VS425
1 13 3 23 5 33 7 43
A1 +
1 13 3 23 5 33 R7 41
A1 +
2 14 4 24 6 34 8 44
A2 -
2 14 4 24 6 34 R8 42
A2 -
Photo
VS425
VS425-04
1 13 R3 21 R5 31
7 43
+
A1
2 14 R4 22 R6 32
8 44
A2 -
VS440-40
R1 11 R3 21 R5 31 R7 41
A1 +
R2 12 R4 22 R6 32 R8 42
A2 -
VS440-31
1
3
5
7 13
A1 +
1
3
5
R3
A1 +
2
4
6
8 14
A2 -
2
4
6
R4
A2 -
R1
R3
R5
R7
A1 +
R2
R4
R6
R8
A2 -
VS440-22
VS463
Photo
VS420
VS425-31
VS425-22
VS440
Photo VS120
Photo VS220
VS220-11
VS220-20
VS220
-
Photo
VS440
Photo
VS463
VS440-04
1
R3
R5
7
A1 +
2
R4
R6
8
A2 -
VS463-40
VS463-31
VS463-22
1
3
5
7 (13)
A1 +
1
3
5
R3
A1 +
1
R3
R5
7
A1 +
2
4
6
8 (14)
A2 -
2
4
6
R4
A2 -
2
R4
R6
8
A2-
Auxiliary contacts for VS425, VS440. VS463 and VSM220, VSM425
Datas of auxiliary contacts for VSK-11 and VSK-20
Ambient temperature:
Rated insulation voltage (Ui):
Electrical strength:
Rated current 230 V (AC 15):
Rated current 400 V (AC 15):
Max. switching frequence:
The max. number of switching for max. load:
Minimal load:
Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM:
Solid/ Stranded conductor (max):
Maximal torque:
Weight:
Dimensions:
-5 0C to +55 0C (23 0F to 131 0F )
500 V
4 kV
6A
4A
6A
600 sep./hod.
≥ 12 V, ≥ 10 mA
6A
2.5 mm² (AWG 10)/ 2.5 mm² (AWG 10)
0.8 Nm
10 g (0.35 oz.)
10x85x60 mm (0.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)
Connection of auxiliary contact VSK-11 and VSK-20
EAN code
see paga 108
VSK-11
31 43
32 44
VSK-20
23 33
24
34
105
105
Installation contactors with manual control VSM220, VSM425
!
!
!
!
!
!
EAN code
see page 122
Technical parameters:
Rated insulation voltage (Ui):
Rated thermo-current lth (in AC):
Switched operation
AC-1 for 400 V:
AC-1 for 230 V:
AC-3 for 400 V:
AC-3 for 230 V:
AC-7a for 400 V:
AC-7a for 230 V:
AC-7b for 400 V:
AC-7b for 230 V:
AC-15 for 400 V:
AC-15 for 230 V:
DC1 Ue = 24 V:
DC1 Ue = 110 V:
DC1 Ue = 220 V:
Loadability of modular contactors see page 147
The max. number of switching for max. load:
Electrical life in 230 / 400 V
AC-1- resistive load :
AC-3-power load:
AC-5a - high-intensity discharge lamp:
AC-5b - incandescent lamps :
AC-7a - resistive household devices:
AC-7b - inductive household devices:
Minimal load:
Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM:
Coordination Type according EN 60 947-4-1:
Electrical strenght:
Contacts - max. cable size:
Solid conductor:
Stranded conductor:
Maximal torque:
Coil - max. cable size:
Solid conductor:
Stranded conductor:
Max. torque:
Operating
Coil control voltage:
Coil permanent supply +/- 10 %:
Coil gear supply +/- 10 %:
Mounting side-by-side:
Weight:
Dimensions:
Standards:
VSM220
Special version of installation contactors with not only basic functions but
also with manual control
For switching accumulative appliances for heating and service water warming
Description of individual positions of manual control
AUTO: common function as with installation contactors without manual
control
1 - shifting from AUTO to 1: operational contacts are closed and back
contacts are open until there is another impulse to a contactor coil
0 - contacts are open (operational contact) or closed (stand-by contact)
regardless voltage
Optical indicator: ON-OFF
It is produced in configuration of making and breaking contacts:
VSM220: 20. 11, 02
VSM425: 40. 31, 22, 04
It is possible to connect auxiliary contacts VSK to contactors VSM220, VSM425
Connection VSM220
VSM425
230 V
20 A
440 V
25 A
X
4 kW, 1 phase
X
1,3 kW only NO, 1 phase
X
4 kW, 1 phase
X
1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase
4A
6A
20 A
6A
0.6 A
16 kW, 3 phase
9 kW, 3 phase
4 kW, 3 phase
2.2 kW, 3 phase
16 kW, 3 phase
9 kW, 3 phase
4 kW, 3 phase
2.2 kW, 3 phase
4A
6A
25 A
6A
0.6 A
600 switch/hr.
600 switch/hr.
VSM220-11
1
3
A1
1
R3
A1
2
4
A2
2
R4
A2
VSM220-02
R1
R3
A1
R2
R4
A2
Connection VSM425
VSM425 - only AC supply voltage
VSM425-40
6
1 13 3 23 5 33 7 43
A1
2 14 4 24 6 34 8 44
A2
6
0.2x10
0.3x106
0.1x106 by 30 μF
0.1 106 by 1.5 kW
0.2x106
0.3x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
20 A
2
4 kV
0.2x10
0.5x106
0.1x106 by 36 μF
0.1x106 by1.5 kW
0.2x106
0.5x106
≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA
25 A
2
4 kV
AWG 7 (10 mm2)
6 mm2
1.2 Nm
AWG 7 (10 mm2)
6 mm2
1.2 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)
2.5 mm2
0.6 Nm
AC 12 V, 24 V, 42 V,
48 V, 110 V, 127 V, 230 V
2.8 VA/1.2 W
12 VA /10 W
max. 2 contactors*
140 g (4.9 oz.)
17,5x85x60 mm
(0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)
AC 12 V, 24 V, 42 V,
48 V, 110 V, 127 V, 230 V
5.5 VA/1.6 W
33 VA/25 W
max. 2 contactors*
260 g (9.17 oz.)
35x85x60 mm
(1.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)
VS425-31
1 13 3 23 5 33 R7 41
A1
2 14 4 24 6 34 R8 42
A2
VSM425-22
1 13 R3 21 R5 31
7 43
A1
2 14 R4 22 R6 32
8 44
A2
VSM425-04
R1 11 R3 21 R5 31 R7 41
A1
R2 12 R4 22 R6 32 R8 42
A2
Auxiliary contacts VSK-11 and VSK-20
Datas of auxiliary contacts for VSK-11 and VSK-20 see page 108
IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 61095, EN 60947-4-1, EN 61095, VDE 0660
*Note: In case several contactors are mounted close to each other, you need to use a installation spacer between every
other contactor. We offer installation spacer of type IKV.
106
106
VSM220 - only AC supply voltage
VSM220-20
Loadability of installation contactors
TYPE OF LIGHT
Incandescent lamps
Flourescent lamps
Flourescent lamps
lead-lag circuit
Flourescent lamps
parallel correction
Flourescent lamps
with electronic
ballast units (EVG)
High-pressure
mercury-vapour
lamps uncorrected
High-pressure mercuryvapour lamps parallel
correction
Halogen metal
vapour lamps
uncorrected
Halogen metal-vapour
lamps parallel correction
High-pressure sodiumvapour lamps uncorrected
High-pressure sodiumvapour lamps parallel
correction
Low-pressure sodiumvapour lamps uncorrected
Low-pressure sodiumvapour lamps parallel
correction
OPERATION (W)
60
100
200
500
1000
18
24
36
58
18
24
36
58
18
24
36
58
1 x 18
1 x 36
1 x 58
2 x 18
2 x 36
2 x 58
50
80
125
250
400
700
1000
50
80
125
250
400
700
1000
35
70
150
250
400
1000
2000
35
70
150
250
400
1000
2000
150
250
400
1000
150
250
400
1000
18
35
55
90
135
180
18
35
55
90
135
180
I (A)
0.26
0.43
0.87
2.17
4.35
0.37
0.35
0.43
0.67
0.11
0.14
0.22
0.35
0.12
0.15
0.2
0.32
0.09
0.16
0.25
0.17
0.32
0.49
0.61
0.8
1.15
2.15
3.25
5.4
7.5
0.28
0.41
0.65
1.22
1.95
3.45
4.8
0.53
1
1.8
3
3.5
9.5
16.5
0.25
0.45
0.75
1.5
2.5
5.8
11.5
1.8
3
4.7
10.3
0.83
1.5
2.4
6.3
0.35
1.5
1.5
2.4
3.5
3.3
0.35
0.31
0.42
0.63
0.94
1.16
VS120
33
20
10
3
1
22
22
17
14
2 x 30
2 x 24
2 x 17
2 x 10
7
7
7
4
25
15
14
12
7
7
14
10
7
4
2
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
18
10
5
3
3
1
5
2
1
5
3
2
1
22
7
7
4
3
3
6
1
1
1
-
VS220
VS420
33
20
10
3
1
22
22
17
14
2 x 30
2 x 24
2 x 17
2 x 10
7
7
7
4
25
15
14
12
7
7
14
10
7
4
2
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
18
10
5
3
3
1
5
2
1
5
3
2
1
22
7
7
4
3
3
6
1
1
1
-
33
20
10
3
1
22
22
17
14
2 x 30
2 x 24
2 x 17
2 x 10
7
7
7
4
25
15
14
12
7
7
14
10
7
4
2
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
18
10
5
3
3
1
5
2
1
5
3
2
1
22
7
7
4
3
3
6
1
1
1
-
Number of lights on one contactor’s contact
VS425
VS440
VS463
VSM220
33
20
10
3
1
24
24
20
17
2 x 40
2 x 31
2 x 24
2 x 14
8
8
8
5
35
20
19
17
10
9
18
13
9
5
3
2
1
5
5
4
2
1
22
12
7
4
3
1
6
3
1
1
1
6
4
2
1
1
1
27
9
9
5
4
4
7
1
1
1
-
65
40
20
8
4
90
90
65
45
2 x 100
2 x 78
2 x 65
2 x 40
48
48
48
31
100
52
50
50
26
25
38
29
20
10
7
4
3
31
27
22
12
9
5
4
43
23
12
7
6
2
1
36
18
11
6
6
2
1
17
10
6
3
11
6
4
2
71
23
23
14
10
10
44
11
11
8
4
5
85
50
25
10
5
140
140
95
70
2 x 150
2 x 118
2 x 95
2 x 60
73
73
73
47
140
75
72
70
38
36
55
42
29
15
10
6
4
47
41
33
18
13
7
5
60
32
18
10
9
3
1
50
25
15
9
8
3
2
22
13
8
3
16
10
6
3
90
30
30
19
13
13
66
16
16
12
7
8
33
20
10
3
1
22
22
17
14
2 x 30
2 x 24
2 x 17
2 x 10
7
7
7
4
25
15
14
12
7
7
14
10
7
4
2
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
18
10
5
3
3
1
5
2
1
5
3
2
1
22
7
7
4
3
3
6
1
1
1
-
VSM425
33
20
10
3
1
24
24
20
17
2 x 40
2 x 31
2 x 24
2 x 14
8
8
8
5
35
20
19
17
10
9
18
13
9
5
3
2
1
5
5
4
2
1
22
12
7
4
3
1
6
3
1
1
1
6
4
2
1
1
1
27
9
9
5
4
4
7
1
1
1
-
107
107
EAN codes
EAN codes for VS
VS120
VS120-01 24V AC/DC
VS120-01 230V AC/DC
VS120-10 24V AC/DC
VS120-10 230V AC/DC
8595188129381
8595188138628
8595188121422
8595188129374
8595188129398
8595188130790
8595188121408
8595188125253
8595188129411
8595188129428
8595188121392
VS463
VS440
VVS440-04 24V AC/DC
VS440-04 110V AC/DC
VS440-22 24V AC/DC
VS440-22 230V AC/DC
VS440-31 24V AC/DC
VS440-31 230V AC/DC
VS440-40 24V AC/DC
VS440-40 110V AC/DC
VS440-40 230V AC/DC
VS220-02 24V AC/DC
VS220-02 110V AC/DC
VS220-02 230V AC/DC
VS220-11 24V AC/DC
VS220-11 48V AC/DC
VS220-11 110V AC/DC
VS220-11 230V AC/DC
VS220-20 24V AC/DC
VS220-20 48V AC/DC
VS220-20 110V AC/DC
VS220-20 230V AC/DC
8595188129299
8595188129305
8595188129787
8595188121477
8595188129572
8595188121460
8595188129565
8595188138567
8595188121453
VS463-22 24V AC/DC
VS463-22 230V AC/DC
VS463-31 24V AC/DC
VS463-31 110V AC/DC
VS463-31 230V AC/DC
VS463-40 24V AC/DC
VS463-40 110V AC/DC
VS463-40 230V AC/DC
VS425
VS420
VS220
8595188129848
8595188123105
8595188129367
8595188123112
8595188129794
8595188121514
8595188129596
8595188137904
8595188121507
8595188129589
8595188140652
8595188121491
VS420-31 24V AC
VS420-31 110V AC
VS420-31 230V AC
VS420-40 12V AC
VS420-40 24V AC
VS420-40 48V AC
VS420-40 230V AC
8595188129442
8595188129466
8595188121446
8595188129459
8595188129435
8595188138581
8595188121439
VS425-04 24V AC/DC
VS425-04 48V AC/DC
VS425-04 110V AC/DC
VS425-04 230V AC/DC
VS425-13 230V AC/DC
VS425-22 24V AC/DC
VS425-22 230V AC/DC
VS425-31 24V AC/DC
VS425-31 48V AC/DC
VS425-31 110V AC/DC
VS425-31 230V AC/DC
VS425-40 24V AC/DC
VS425-40 48V AC/DC
VS425-40 230V AC/DC
VS425-40 400V AC/DC
EAN codes for VSM
VSM220
VSM220-02 24V AC
VSM220-02 230V AC
VSM220-11 24V AC
VSM220-11 230V AC
VSM220-20 12V AC
VSM220-20 24V AC
VSM220-20 230V AC
108
8595188129817
8595188128100
8595188129800
8595188128094
8595188138369
8595188128117
8595188128087
VSM425
VSM425-04 24V AC
VSM425-04 230V AC
VSM425-22 24V AC
VSM425-22 230V AC
VSM425-31 24V AC
VSM425-31 42V AC
VSM425-31 230V AC
VSM425-40 12V AC
VSM425-40 24V AC
VSM425-40 230V AC
8595188129831
8595188128155
8595188129336
8595188128148
8595188129824
8595188160247
8595188128131
8595188143820
8595188128162
8595188128124
VSK-11 8595188121613
VSK-20 8595188121606
8595188129527
8595188129558
8595188143820
8595188121682
8595188129473
8595188129541
8595188121675
8595188129497
8595188137898
8595188129534
8595188121668
8595188129480
8595188136174
8595188121651
8595188129503
Technical information
Main regulations for correct use of products
Product loadability
Electro-magnectic compatibility of products
EMC chart
Overview of tested types of light sources
and the loads
110
111-112
113
114
115
Complementary information
Products packing
Dimensions
116
117-121
Examples of usage
Use of the products in domestic installations
Use of the product in the industry
Support of project designing
Production technology
122-129
131
132
133
134-135
109
Main instructions for correct use of ELKO EP products
To ensure correct and perfect function of a device and its safe operation, it is necessary to ensure and observe several main regulations:
1.) Device supply
- it is necessary to ensure continuous supply of the device without drops and voltage peaks. It is mainly important for device (e.g. dimmers) where there is synchronization managed
by sine wave of the main and fault in the main ca cause unreliable function of the device
- it is necessary to observe correct connection of terminals, and in case of DC supply voltage also polarity.
- it is necessary to observe allowed tolerance of the size of supply voltage which is given by technical parameters of individual devices
2.) Protection of the device
- it is necessary to ensure protection of the device by adequate elements of overvoltage protection – by fuses, by surge arrestors
3.) Elimination of disturbances on input circuits
- it is recommended to eliminate disturbances on control inputs of devices by suitable elements (R-C elements) and thus minimize creation of inductive voltage on incoming wires
- pay attention when connecting control inputs and while keep in mind max. current and min. voltage at rest, which can cause spontaneous switching of device (e.g. connected glow lamps)
4.) Opereting conditions
- to assure the granted life and correct functions of device, there is not recommended to leave the device in extreme conditions that could negative way influence the correct
device functions - permanent temperature influence over 70°C, aggressive exhalations, chemicals, high relative humadity over 95%, high electromagnetic field or microwave radiation
- for error-free function it is necessary to avoid device placement close to electromagnetic interference source
- all mentioned products fulfill the EMC requirements in accordance to EU Directive 89/336/EEC. Notwithstanding it is necessary to pay attention by device connecting to circuit
with electrical appliances that produce electromagnetic interference (contactors, motors), and pay attention to close power cables. It is recommended that device connecting cables
(supply and control inputs) are possibly short and go separately from power cables. In case the device is connected to circuit with contactors or motors it is necessary to protect the
device with appropriate extern protection components - RC members, varistors or surge voltage protector.
- when you use AL wires, it is necessary to follow requirements of ČSN standard 370606: 1959 and ČSN 370606 amendment 2: 1992
5.) Device handling and using
- input terminals do not fill-in with high power (for serial terminals max 0.5 N/m), do not give excessive pressure to carrier terminal parts to avoid demage of inner device construction
- protect the device before falls and excessive vibrations that could demage relays contacts
- do not overload input relay´s contacts, especially when using loads with other category then AC1
- when at switching of big loads the relay contacts get sealed it is necessary to use inserted contactor or power relay tuned to required load for given application
Description of used protection elements in device
All time and monitoring relays from our assortment are equiped with protective elements (varistors) against possible overvoltage in supply main. Limit voltage of used varistors
is 275 V. At short-time overvoltage in supply main varistor decrease its leak resistor and accumulate arosen overvoltage. When this overvoltage behave as short-time peak, varistor is
able to react and protect the device against negative influences. As other protection elements there are used transils and zener diodes that eliminate overvoltage impulses in supply
and input circuits of device (e.g. when switching inductive loads). In case of switching inductive loads it is recommended to separate a supply of power element (motors, contactors etc.)
from supply of measuring and control device inputs.
On the charts bellow you can see oscilographic running of disconnecting of loads (contactors) and reaction of protective elements to arosen voltage pikes.
Process of disconnection of contactor with coil on
230V/AC without R-C member
Osciloscope configuration
U=200 V/d
t=5ms/d
110
Process of disconnection of contactor with coil on
230V/AC and R-C member 390 Ohm-330 nF
Osciloscope configuration
U=200 V/d
t=10ms/d
Process of disconnection of contactor with coil and limited
varistor on 230V/AC
Osciloscope configuration
U=200 V/d
t=5ms/d
Product loadability
SOU-2
RHV-1; SOU-3;
TEV-4
PRODUCT
CONTACT
TYPE OF LOAD
cos φ ≥ 0.95
Material of contact AgSnO2 Material of contact AgSnO2
contact 8A
contact 12A
CRM-4; CRM-42; MR-41;
MR-42; SHT-1; SHT-1/2; SHT-3;
SHT-3/2; SHT-4; SMR-B; SOU-1;
RHT-1; TER-3A; TER-3B; TER-3C;
TER-3D; TER-3E; TER-3F; TER-3G;
TER-3H ; VS116K; VS116U;
VS316/24V; VS316/230V
CRM-82TO; CRM-83J;
HRH-6
CRM-93H; PRM-2H;
PRM-92H; TER-7; VS308K;
VS308U; CRM-61; HRH-5;
HRN-54; HRN-54N; HRN-55;
HRN-55N; HRN-56;
HRN-57; HRN-57N;
PRI-32; PRI-51; PRI-52;
PRI-53; HRF-10; TER-9
ATC; ATF; ATR; DTC; DTF; DTR;
COS-1; CRM-2H; CRM-2HE;
CRM-2T; CRM-81J; CRM-91H;
CRM-91HE; HRH-1; HRN-33;
HRN-34; HRN-35; HRN-37;
HRN-41; HRN-42; HRN-43;
HRN-43N; HRN-63; HRN-64;
HRN-67; PDR-2; PRI-41; PRI-42;
PRM-91H; SJR-2; TER-4; TEV-1;
TEV-2; TEV-3
Material of contact AgSnO2
contact 16A
Material of contact AgNi
contact 8A
Material of contact AgNi
contact 10A
Material of contact AgNi
contact 16A
250V / 8A
250V / 12A
250V / 16A
250V / 8A
250V / 10A
250V / 16A
M
250V / 5A
250V / 3.7A
250V / 5A
250V / 3A
250V / 3A
250V / 5A
M
250V /4A
250V /2.2A
250V / 3A
250V /2A
250V /2A
250V / 3A
X
230V / 2.2A (510VA)
230V / 3A (690VA)
230V / 1.5A (345VA)
230V / 2A (460VA)
230V / 3A (690VA)
X
230V / 2.2A (510VA)
till max output C=14UF
230V / 3A (690VA)
till max output C=14UF
X
X
X
250W
1 120W
1000W
300W
500W
800W
250V /4A
X
X
X
X
X
250V /1A
250V / 2.2A
250V / 3A
250V /1A
250V / 2A
250V / 3A
250V /1A
250V / 7.5A
X
250V /1A
250V / 6A
250V / 10A
X
250V / 4.5A
X
X
250V / 3.8A
250V / 6A
250V /4A
250V / 4.5A
250V / 6A
250V /3A
250V / 3.8A
250V / 6A
250V /3A
250V / 4.5A
250V / 6A
250V /3A
250V / 3.8A
250V / 6A
30V / 8A
24V / 12A
24V / 10A
24V / 8A
24V / 10A
24V / 16A
M
30V / 3A
24V / 4.5A
24V / 3A
24V / 3A
24V / 3.8A
24V / 6A
M
30V / 2A
24V / 3A
24V / 2A
24V / 2A
24V / 2.5A
24V / 4A
30V / 8A
24V / 12A
24V / 6A
24V / 8A
24V / 10A
24V / 16A
30V / 2A
24V / 1.5A
24V / 2A
24V / 2A
24V / 1.3A
24V / 2A
X
24V / 1.5A
X
X
24V / 1.3A
24V / 2A
AC1
AC2
AC3
AC5a uncompensated
AC5a compensated
HAL.230V
AC5b
AC6a
AC7b
AC12
AC13
AC14
K
AC15
DC1
DC3
DC5
DC12
DC13
DC14
111
Product loadability
Problematic choice of suitable relay contact for a particular load switched with a product is described below.
Mostly we experience problems with incorrect choice of load (meaning incorrect relay for a particular load) which results in permanent switching of contact (sealing) or damage on relay contact – which
then results in malfunction.
What load can you use?
Detailed types of load according to standard EN 60947 are described in charts below – categories of use.
Category of use
AC current, cosφ = P/S (-)
AC-1
Typical use
Non-inductive or slightly inductive load, resistance furnace
Includes all appliances supplied by AC current with power factor (cos .) 0.95.
Examples of usage: resistance furnace, industrial loads
AC-2
AC-3
EN
Motors with slip-ring armature, switching off
Motors with short-circuit armature, motor switching when in operation
60947-4
60947
This category applies to switching off motors with short-circuit armature while in operation. While switching, contactor switches current which is 5 up to 7 times
rated current of motor.
60947-4
AC-4
AC-5a
AC-5b
Electro-motors with short-circuit armature: start up, braking by backset, changeover
Switching of electrical gas-filled lights, fluorescent lights
El. bulb switching
60947
60947-4
60947-4
AC-6a
AC-6b
AC-7a
AC-7b
AC-8a
Switching of transformers
Switching of capacitors
Switching low inductive loads of home appliances and similar applications
Load of motors for home appliances
Switching of hermetically sealed motors of cooling compressors with manual reset switches against overload
AC-8b
Switching of hermetically sealed motors of cooling compressors with manual reset switches against overload
Enables low contact loading due to resistance of cold fiber is many times smaller that the one of hot fiber.
60947-4
60947-4
60947
60947
60947
Hermetically sealed cooling compressors have to be placed in one box without external shaft or shaft padding and motor must operate with cooling liquid
60947
Hermetically sealed cooling compressors have to be placed in one box without external shaft or shaft padding and motor must operate with cooling liquid
AC-12
AC-13
AC-14
AC-15
Switching of semiconductor loads with separation transformers
Switching of semiconductor loads with separation transformers
Switching of low electro-magnetic loads (max.72 VA)
Management of alternating electro-magnetic loads
This category applies to switching inductive loads with input for closed electro-magnetic circuit higher than 72 VA
Use: switching coils of contactors
AC-20
AC-21
AC-22
AC-23
AC-53a
DC current, t = L/R (s)
DC-1
DC-3
DC-5
DC-6
DC-12
DC-13
DC-14
DC-20a(b)
DC-21a(b)
DC-22a(b)
DC-23
Connecting and disconnecting in unloaded states
Switching resistive loads, including low loading
Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including low overloading
Switching of motor loads or other high inductive loads
Switching of motors with short-circuit armature with semiconductor contactors
Note: Category AC 15 replaces formerly used category AC 11
Non-inductive or low inductive load, resistive furnaces
Shunt motors: start-up, braking by backset, reversion, resistive braking
Series motor: start-up, braking by backset, reversion, resistive braking
Non-inductive or low inductive loads, resistive furnaces – el. bulbs
Management of resistive loads and fixed loads with insulation by opto-electric element
Switching of electromagnets
Switching of electromagnetic loads in circuits with limiting resistor
Switching and breaking without load(a: frequent switching ,b: occasional switching)
Switching ohmic loads including limiting overloading (a: frequent switching ,b: occasional switching)
Switching of compound ohmic and inductive loads including limited overloads ( e.g. shunt motors) (a: frequent switching, b: random switching)
Switching of highly inductive loads (e.g. series motors)
60947-5
60947-5-1
60947-5-1
60947-5
60947-3
60947-3
60947-3
60947-3
60947
60947-4
60947-4-1
60947-4-1
60947-4-1
60947-5-1
60947-5-1
60947-5-1
60947-3
60947-3
60947-3
60947-3
How can you distinguish for which load is our product (relay) designated?
Our company record this information on a products and also in our catalogue, instruction manual and other promotional and technical material (website etc.).
It is important to realize that it is not always possible to point out load because of lack of information about the device (user cannot measure cos) or it is not possible because of inconstancy of parameters
of switched device.
Manufacturer of relays records always guaranteed parameters in ideal conditions which are done by a norm (temperature, pressure, humidity, etc.) and reality can be in a lot of cases different.
Category of use (classification) of a particular relay is done by material of output contacts.
Basic types of materials which are used for production of contacts for high-performance relay are:
a)AgCd – suitable for switching ohmic loads. Before of harmfulness of Cd, this type of contact is remitted.
b)AgNi –designated for switching resistive loads , good quality switching and conducting (contact doesn’t oxidate) small currents/voltages ,it is not designated for surge currents and loads with
inductive component
c)AgSn or AgSnO –suitable for switching loads with inductive component , not suitable for switching small currents/voltages, it is more resistive to surge currents, suitable for DC voltage switching,
less suitable for switching loads of ohmic type
d)Wf (wolfram)-special contact designated for switching surge currents with inductive component
e)with gold (AgNi/Au)- Used for “improving” contacts for low currents/ voltages , prevents oxidation.
112
Electromagnetic compatibility of ELKO EP, s.r.o. products
Electromagnetic compatability (EMC) is a new scientific field which was founded in the 60s last century. It had been
known only to a small number of specialists working in a military and cosmic research.
Electromagnetic compatability EMC is defined as an ability of a device, system or a machine to show the correct operation
even in an environment in which there are other sources of electromagnetic signals (natural or artificial), and also
an ability not to influence negatively the environment by its own “electromagnetic action” and not to radiate signals
that would disturb other devices. It is an indicator of good quality and reliability. Breach of such EMC requirements
may cause several damages with catastrophical consequences.
When testing EMC of a device (technical and biological), basic is represented by so called “ fundamental chain of
EMC” shown in the picture. This chain shows a system problematic of EMC and we inspect all three components.
SOURCE OF
ELECTROMAGNETIC
DISTURBANCES
motors, switches, relays, power
distributions, semi-conducting
alternators, fluorescent tubes,
arc furnances, welding machines, oscillators, PC, digital
systems, electrostatic discharge...
ENVIRONMENT OF DISTRIBUTION,
ELECTROMAGNETIC STRUCTURE
DISTURBED OBJECT,
DISTURBING RECEIVER
air space, energy cables, supply
convection, convection, grounding,
screening, signaling conductors,
data condutors...
digital devices, PC, measuring
devices, automatization device,
telecommunication system, data
transmission system, wireless set,
televisor...
Test SURGE
For guarantee the immunity of our devices against to electromagnetic disturbance we are doing EMC tests and according results we are still innovating our product to be accoding the EMC norms with reserve.
The most important test is immunity against gust of high-energy voltage and current impulse (SURGE), what is made according the norm IEC 61000-4-5.
By this our products are controlled in case of short time pulse, what is apllicated as to input as to output circuits of divices, to switching inputs, sensing inputs, etc. Our produts pass all criterias and are fully
competitive to foreign products.
Test SURGE is used in practice mainly for 1-phase devices with take-off current to 16 A. It makes use of voltage impulse 1,2/50 ms no load and current impulse 8/20 ms for short time. Size of used voltage
impulse is 0.5 kV, 1 kV, 2 kV and 4 kV, size of used current impulse is 2kA on 4kV with choise of changing polarity. For testing by impulses is as coup mode specify capacitive coupling.
Test BURST
Other very important test is test immunity against quick short-lived effect (couple of impulses- BURST), which dissimulated influence if industry disturbance. Test is made according to
the norm IEC 61000-4-4.
Disturbance signal is injected to supply circuits and communication cabling. Coupling is made by 1-phase capacitive circuit or coupling capacitive ribband to supply, signalling or data convection
of tested device. Size of testing impulses is 0.5 kV, 1 kV, 2 kV and 4 kV in possitive and negative polarity. Repeat frequence is 2.5 kHz, or 5 kHz. Period of testing 0 - 6 minut by steps for 0.1s.
Test POWERFAIL
For right function of products in industry is important POWERFAIL test - simulation of decreasing and failure of supply voltage. It is made according to the IEC 61000-4-11.
Short-time supply decreasing are random decreasing of supply voltage, which are more than 10 - 15 % of its nominal size and have short time existing 0.5 - 50 periodes of basic frequency 50 Hz.
Short breaks of voltage are short time decreasing over 100 %. Mentioned changes of supply circuit voltage are made in practise by disturbance in mains (high voltage, low voltage ) and breaks on load
of the main.
Test of EMC EMISSIONS
Electronic devices must be designed not to be a source of oversize electric or electromagnetic disturbances in its surroundings. Test is executed according to standard EN 55022.
Emissions are measured by wires or by air.
Test OF ELECTROMAGNETIC HIGH-FREQUENCY FIELD AND HF SIGNAL COMING FROM THE MAIN
The purpose of this test is to verify immunity of the device against electromagnetic fields that are created by radio transmitters or by any other device which transmits electromagnetic energy by uninterrupted waves
(walkie-talkies, radio and TV transmitters.)
Test is carried out against disturbances in the main and emissions. We apply testing level 3 which for HF field means intensity of field 10 V/m and for HF signal it is voltage level 10 V.
Test OF ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
It is a test of resistance against discharges of electrostatic energy caused by servicing or by surrounding objects. Such discharge can damage a device or its components.
Test is carried out by direct or indirect application of discharges to a tested device. Test is carried out according to a standard EN 61000-4-2. Direct influence of discharges is targeted into such places and surfaces that
are accessible to servicing during common use. Indirect influence of discharge is done by horizontal and vertical coupling board.
The device is treated by at least ten individual discharges for positive and negative polarity. Testing levels are 2kV, 4kV, 6kV, 8kV, 15kV.
Company ELKO EP has its own test laboratory in which it carries out pre-certification for conditions that must be met by each of our products. Thus customers gets not only a product of a high quality,
which is ensured by many years of experience in the field of switching relays, but also a product which can operate in demanding conditions of industrial environment. Product, tested this way, guarantees
reliability and functionality to customer’s full satisfaction.
113
Power supplies
Time relays
CRM-81J/230V
CRM-81J/UNI
CRM-83J/230V
CRM-83J/UNI
CRM-82TO
SJR-2/230V
SJR-2/UNI
CRM-2T/230V
CRM-2T/UNI
CRM-2H/230V
CRM-2H/UNI
CRM-91HE/UNI
CRM-2HE/UNI
CRM-91H/230V
CRM-91H/UNI
CRM-93H/230V
CRM-93H/UNI
CRM-9S
CRM-61
SHT-1
SHT-1/2
SHT-3
SHT-3/2
PDR-2A/230V
PDR-2A/UNI
PDR-2B/230V
PDR-2B/UNI
PRM-91H/8
PRM-91H/11
PRM-92H
PRM-2H
SMR-T
SMR-H
SMR-B
CRM-4
CRM-42
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/B
55022/A
55022/B
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/B
55022/A
55022/B
55022/A
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/B
55022/A
55022/A
61000-6-3
55022/A
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/A
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
3
55022/A
55022/A
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/A
55022/B
DIM-2
DIM-5
DIM-14
DIM-6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
55022/B
55014-1
DIM6-3M-P
DIM-15
SMR-S
SMR-U
DIM-10
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
55014-1
55014-1
55022/A
55022/B
55022/B
Power and auxiliary relays
VS116K
VS116U
VS308K/230V
VS308K/UNI
VS308U
VS316/24V
VS316/230V
Dimmers
114
PRODUCT
PS-10-12; PS-10-24
PS-30-12; PS-30-24
PS-100-12; PS-100-24
PS-30R
ZSR-30
ZNP-10-12V
ZNP-10-24V
3
3
3
3
3
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/A/B
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/B
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
61000-6-3
55022/A
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
55022/A
61000-6-3
61000-6-3
55022/A
55022/A
55022/A
61000-6-3
Other modular devices
SOU-1/230V
SOU-1/UNI
SOU-2
SOU-3
MR-41/230V
MR-41/UNI
MR-42/230V
MR-42/UNI
Monitoring relays
HRN-41
HRN-42
HRN-33
HRN-34
HRN-35
HRN-37
HRN-63
HRN-64
HRN-67
HRN-55
HRN-55N
HRN-57
HRN-57N
HRN-54
HRN-54N
HRN-56/120
HRN-56/208
HRN-56/240
HRN-56/400
HRN-56/480
HRN-56/575
HRN-43
HRN-43N
PRI-32
PRI-51/1
PRI-51/2
PRI-51/5
PRI-51/8
PRI-51/16
PRI-51/0.5
PRI-52
PRI-41
PRI-42
HRH-1/230V
HRH-1/24V
HRH-1/110V
HRH-5
STANDARD
PRODUCT
HRH-4/230V
HRH-4/24V
HRH-6/AC
HRH-6/DC
COS-1
levels according to
ČSN EN 61000-4-4
according to norm
ČSN EN 61000-4-5
EMC; EMISE
according to norm
ČSN EN
PRODUCT
STANDARD
levels according to
ČSN EN 61000-4-4
according to norm
ČSN EN 61000-4-5
EMC; EMISE
according to norm
ČSN EN
STANDARD
levels according to
ČSN EN 61000-4-4
according to norm
ČSN EN 61000-4-5
EMC; EMISE
according to norm
ČSN EN
EMC - parameters
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
55022/B
55022/B
61000-6-3
55022/A
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
55022/B
61000-6-3
55022/B
61000-6-3
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
55022/B
Thermostats
TER-3A
TER-3B
TER-3C
TER-3D
TER-3E
TER-3F
TER-3G
TER-3H
TER-4/230V
TER-4/24V
TER-9/230V
TER-9/24V
TER-7
ATR; ATC; ATF
DTR; DTC; DTF
TEV-1
TEV-2
TEV-3
TEV-4
RHT-1
RHV-1
Overview of tested types of light sources and the loads
As is our good tradition, we have always been seeking for a maximum universality of our products. We have successfully developed a
dimmer DIM-15 and SMR-M, and because the LED lighting dimming - as well as dimming of energy saving lamps - is a relatively new
area and there are not so many manufacturers who produce dimmable energy saving resources, we will gradually test and expand
the chart below. We welcome your feedback and cooperation in addressing us your comments and new types.
Type
Typ
Light sources ELKO Lighting
RFDSC-11
RFDSC-71
RFDEL-71B
Yes
30 pc
16 pc
30 pc
30 pc
16 pc
Yes
50 pc
26 pc
50 pc
50 pc
26 pc
Dimmable
E27
GU-10
ELKO Lighting DLB-E27-806-2K7
ELKO Lighting LED DLSL-GU10-250-3K
DIM 15 SMR-M LIC-1
Socket
The maximum number of units can be connected to dimmers
Socket
Dimmable
Brilum LED line 18led
GU-10D
Yes
Brilum LED line
GU-10P
Yes
E27
Yes
Elim SMD-W12
GU-10
Yes
Elim SDW21
GU-10
Yes
Elim SMD-W20
GU-10
No
Panlux E27L1-81120/T
E27
No
LED LAMPJDRE27
E27
Yes
GU10D
Yes
Type
Light sources from manufacturers
Brilum LED line JCR-27D 48Led
Brilum Led line white 21led
Osram dulux el.dimmable lumilux warm white 1230lm
E27
Yes
Megaman dimmerable 2700K DEC01
E14
Yes
Lumee GU 10-60-CW-120
GU-10
Yes
Lumee GU 10-P-60-CW-120
GU-10
Yes
Lumee JDRE 14-60-CW-120
E14
Yes
Lumee Ball-80-CW
E14
Yes
Philips Master 20W
E27
No
Led Osram Decospot 0,75W
GU-10
No
Led Philips Master 7W
GU-10
No
Philips LEDspot MV 4W GU10 40D
GU-10
Yes
Philips LEDspot MR 16 LV 4W GU5,3 24D
GU-5.3
No
Philips LEDspot MV 3W GU10 25D
GU-10
No
Energetic BULB Warm White 250 Lumen
E27
Yes
Energetic BULB Clear Warm White 250 Lumen
E27
Yes
Energetic Warm White Reflector GU10 600 CD
GU-10
Yes
Energetic Cool White Reflector GU10 550 CD
GU-10
Yes
Energetic Warm White Dimmer 1200 Lumen
E27
Yes
Energetic Wram White 3 Step Dimmer 1300 Lumen
E27
No
Energetic Wram White 3 Step Dimmer 520 Lumen
E27
No
TR-0WGE-05
E27
No
GU-10
No
Osram parathom classic A 40
E27
No
Osram parathom classic B 25
E14
No
GU-10
No
EMOS 48led 2W
E14
Yes
EMOS dimmable saving fluorescent lamps 20W
E27
Yes
Paulmann reflector electrobnic 7W GU 10
Osram parathom PAR16
115
Products packing
Products
116
Packing
COS-1, HRH-1, HRN-41, HRN-42,
HRN-43, PDR-2, PRI-41, PRI-42,
PS-12, PS-24, PS-R, ZSR-30,
ZNP-10, ZTR-10, HRN-56/480,
575
Packing of 3-MODULE relay - 1 pc
SHT-1, SHT-3, SHT-1/2, SHT-4,
SOU-2, TER-9,
Packing of 2-MODULE relay - 1 pc
PRM-91H/11, PRM-92H, PRM-2H
Packing of plug - in relay - 2 pc
SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-S,
SMR-U, SMR-M
Packing of SMR-14 pc
SOU-1, SOU-2, CRM-91HE ,
CRM-2HE
Packing of 1-MODULE relay
with accessories
VS116K, VS116U, VS308K,
VS316/24, VS316/230, USS, VS
Packing of 1-MODULE relay - 12 pc
CRM-81J, CRM-83J, CRM-82TO,
CRM-61, CRM-9S, CRM-2H,
CRM-2T, CRM-4, CRM-42,
SOU-1, DIM-2, DIM-5, DIM-14,
HRH-5, HRN-33, HRN-34,
HRN-35, HRN-51, HRN-52,
HRN-54, MR-41, MR-42, PRI-31,
SJR-2, TER-3, TER-7, HRN-56,
HRN-63, HRN-64, HRN-67
Packing of 1-MODULE relay - 10 pc
Design
Dimensions
17.6
17.6
13.8
5
PRI-32
5
1-MODULE DESIGN
90
67.5
45
27
21
7
90
67.5
45
6.2
15.3
30
6
48
13
64
80
6
35
35
2-MODULE DESIGN
3-MODULE DESIGN
19
65
19
21
21
64
52
90
67.5
45
35.6
90
67.5
45
35
35
SOU-3
RHV-1, TEV-4
62
34
57
2
70
96
26
21
11
117
Dimensions
MINI
SMR-T, SMR-H, SMT-K
MINI
SMR-S, SMR-U
R1
MINI
SMR-B
13.3
R1
3
R2
3
1
13.3
49
49
12.6
49
ATR, ATF, ATC
21
DTR, DTF, DTC
89
89
56.4
54.3
28.6
84
84
28.6
PS-100-12, PS-100-24
48
48
48
48
41
4.6
4
14
10
28.2
42
9
42
42
13
10
8
5.5
4
PANEL ZSR-30, PS-30-R, ZNP-10
HRN-41, HRN-42, HRN-43,HRN-43N,
PRI-41, PRI-42, COS-1, HRH-1, TER-4
PANEL PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B
9
10
10
8
19
PS-30-12, PS-30-24
PS-10-12, PS-10-24
48
17.6
11
33.9
8.5 8.5
6-MODULE DESIGN
105
90
21
19
65
42
29.5
28.2
42
14
15.3
45
7
8.8 8.8
41
118
35
14.1
Dimensions
Socket for PRM-91/8
Socket for PRM-91H/ 11, PRM-92H, PRM-2H, 750
PRM-91H/11. PRM-91H/8 PRM-92H, PRM-2H
37
ES-11
ES-8
5.6
65
65
3.2
5.6
3.2
45
4
4.2
45
4.2
30
38
30
38
27
27
50
35
750L
35
13
54,4
782L
13
22
89
6,5
4,4 4,4 4,4
21,2
23
13
35,6
6,2 6,3 6,3 4,1
27,5
photosensor SKS
21.8
2,2x0,5
110
20
6x
21
HRH-6
66
4
50
14
20.8
M16x1.5
15
30
external potentiometer
for CRM-2HE, CRM-91HE
M16x1.5
M 22x1
28
15
15
15
110
17
27
27
20
15
27
M16x1.5
28
28
B1 B3 B2
15
119
Dimensions
43
28
29
56
46
77
84
68
107
SR051; SR101; SR151
46
SR200; SR250
6
box IP66 for TEV3
box IP66 for TEV1,2
SR300; SR400; SR600
17
25
20
110
110
110
110
M20x1.5 M16x1.5
27
27
M20x1.5 M16x1.5
27
27
50
50
66
120
M20x1.5
66
M20x1.5
Dimensions
VS425
VSM425
VS440
VS463
35
VS420
VSK-20
60
44
45
85
63
35.5
62.5
55
10
45
4.4
49.4
47.5
65.4
45
85
85
53.3
45
17.5
45
85
VS120
VS220
VSM220
4.7
35.5
IKV
ATV-1
45.1
8.9
53.5
Mo
61
Di
21
Mi
Do
8
Fr
4
Sa
So
:
AUTO
MANU
76.5
60.3
02
MENU
OK
+
121
Examples of usage
Multifunction time relay CRM-91H,CRM-93H
- for electric appliances, where is necessary to change the exact timing - controlling of the illumination, heating, motors, machines, ventilators, contactors...
N
N
L
L
A1
S A1
A2
S A2
here
s
lway
i
unct
if
Mult
15
16
ity a
onal
yw
ever
and
15
18
Multifunction time relay with contactless output CRM-9S
- using for warning illuminatin on the road, flashers, cyclers, often switched systems ...
12 V AC
16
18
Multifunction time relay with external potentiometer CRM-91HE
- time adjusting via external operating unit, operating on panel, switchboard doors
N
L
A1
S A1
A2
S A2
B1
B2
B3
external operating unit
CR -9S
B1
18
18
Singlefunction time relay CRM-81J
- time switch, using for run down the pump after switch off the heating,
switching of ventilators ...
N
A1
S 18
Multifunction time relay CRM-61
- for electronic appliances, light control, heating, motors, fans.....
L
N
L
16
15
A2
A1
A2
S
CRM-61
16
15
122
16 18
15
18
Examples of usage
Time relay plug-in type PRM-91H, PRM-92H
- serves to control light signallization, heating, motor and fan control... etc.
Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO
- delayed back-up switch off at current failure (emergency illumination, emergency
respirator)
N
L
A2
A1
26
16
CRM-82TO
FUNC
e
28
18
L
N
25
15
Doublestage delay unit SJR-2
- for sequential load switching, electric furnaces, heaters....
a
Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H
- regular rooms ventilation, cyclic humidity exhaustion, illumination controlling, circulation
pump, flash, warning appliances, regular pump down, regular irrigation via electromagnetic
valve
N
N
L
A1
A2
L
A1
S A2
1
2
25
15
16
26
28
18
3
N
Staircase switch CRM-4
- staircase automatic systems, ventilators switching, for multiplace operating illumination on the staircases and halls...
L
15
16
18
Progammable staircase automat with signalling before switch off CRM-42
- starcaise illumination operation
- on-coming switch off signalling (flash = comfort + safety together)
L
A2
A1
S S
A2
A1
18
15 16 18
N
123
Examples of usage
Digital time switch SHT-1/2
- for controlling of all appliances that depend on real time, appliances could be controlled in regular cycles, or according to adjusted program (blocking of main door out of working hours or night)
- in combination with other devices could be controlling combinated (rooms ventilation, irrigation controlling, bell at school or in church...)
r
you
g in iday
n
i
t
hea n Fr
itch . e.g. o
w
s
o
.
ve .
dt
nee you arri
u
o
n y re
Whe ge befo p.m.
a
cott at 1:13
13th
N
L
A1
18
15
16
7
Auto
0
12
6
SHT-1/2
MAN 2
OK
PRG
RESET
+
MAN
25
26
A2
ESC
Programmable digital relay PDR-2
- illumination, ventilators, contactors controlling, controlling of interlocking plans, system of time abate and blocking (billiards, pin-balls....), away control via external buttons
N
L
tion
rma
and
um
m
i
x
a
..
ed m lay..
u ne a disp
o
y
n
ed
Whe you ne
n
the
26
25
28
18
15
ut
abo
....
time
fo
e in
urat
acc
16
Twilight switch SOU-1
- outdoor illumination switching (garden illumination), flash, shop-window, hall and office illumination (switch off in desired light level, controlling of intensity)
N
230V
L
N
L
A1
A1
S A2
IN
A1
A1
15
124
S VS425
A2
IN
IN
IN
16
18
15
16
18
VS425
Examples of usage
Delay on star/delta CRM-2T
- motor starting more than 3 kW, electronic switchover from mode start to mode
operation with device CRM-2T, what assures exact timing
Mini contactor VS425
- switching of the higher loads, especially in other categories than AC1
N
L
A1
A2
VS425
15
25
26
16
18
VS425
an
lay c
e
r
y
r
xilia ou
n au ll help y
e
h
W 5 wi
VS42
no lo
n
nta
k, co
r
o
ger w
ctor
28
Modular contactor VS120. VS220. VS420. VS425
- to switch circuits for supply and control of heating, lights, air-conditioning and other el. devices.
Switches loads AC-1, AC-3, AC-7a, AC-7b, AC-15
L
N
Modular contactors VS440. VS463
- to switch supply and control circuits for heating, air-conditioning and other el. devices,
switching 3-phase motors
Switches loads A-1, AC-3, AC-7a, AC-7b, and AC-15
L
N
VS220-20
VS440-40
I th = 20A
A1-A2 AC 230V
50/60Hz
A1-A2 DC 220V
( ) A1
( ) A2
Control. voltage
I th = 40A
A1-A2 AC 220-230V
50/60Hz
A1-A2 DC 220-230V
2 4
20A / 1 230V
4kW / 1 230V
AC3 1.3kW / 1 230V
( ) A2
4
2
7
5
3
1
( ) A1
1 3
6
8
AC1
40A / 3 400V
26kW / 3 400V
AC3 11kW / 3 400V
AC1
Auxiliary plug-in relays 750. 782
- to switch bigger output (load)
Digital time switch SHT-1, SHT-1/2
- for controlling of all appliances that depend on real time, in daily or weekly mode
N
L
A1
18
15
16
7
Auto
0
6
12
SHT-1/2
MAN 2
OK
reset
A2 26
PRG
+
25
MAN
ESC
28
replacement of current plug-in relays
when servicing...
125
Examples of usage
Staircase automat with dimming DIM-2
- step by step (fluent) dim up, adjusted time is ON and fluent dim down (e.g. possible to adjust
permanent shine to min. brightness everlasting light)
- block of flats (entry, halls, staircases), garden lighting
Controlled dimmer DIM-5
- short press ON/OFF, long press - brightness regulation, is in memory.
Other presses activate memory
- switch on and dimming of hall, staircase ...
N
N
L
ore
um
e yo
n giv
a
c
b
. bul ink
al el you th
m
r
a no than
Also
V
A1
T2
L
V A1
ergy
el.en es
e
v
a
nd s sourc
ble a ur light
a
t
r
o
fo
com ith y
Feel ether w
tog
-
T
A2
T1
A2
Power relays VS
- switching of higher load than is capacity of switched unit = repeater
- assistant light controlling, signalling, boilers, ...
Memory relay MR-41, MR-42
- because of 2-wire parallel buttons connection save money, place and time during
the installation
- light switching, hall, staircase, big rooms, controlling systems, automation
N
L
L
N
A1 ON/OFF A2
B2
B1
A1
MR-42
A3
A2
1
Un
2
LED
22
21
11
12
24
14
11
Switching power supply PS-R
- power supply of any devices and appliances via safe voltage with full galvanically
separated from mains
- power supply of driving systems, interlocking plants and use in measurement and control
naalter
,
s
e
itch ULE
of sw 1-MOD
e
g
n
o
e ra n int
: Wid e desig
h
s
a
ubl
d fl
e an all in do
n
i
h
at
at s
ts th s and th
h
g
i
l
e
al
ch
Sing ing swit
t
-
A1
A2
21
22
24
A1
A3
A2
PS-30-R
-30-R
LED
A12
11
31
126
32
12
34
14
Controlling and signalling units USS
- compact dimensions, elegant design, wide range of use, configuration for request
- switching and signalling in switchboard, controlling centre, automation...
A3
N
L
12
14
A11
A13
Examples of usage
øíkladpoit
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-33 (35)
- monitoring of mains voltage for appliances inclinable to supply tolerance
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-33 (35)
- protection of appliances against under-/overvoltage
AC 230 V
A1
A2
A2
A1
25
26
28
.
s off
15
ay
nit p
u
g
orin r
onit r highe
m
c
i
e fa
as
to b could b
n
i
t
e
en
stm mag
Inve Da
16 18
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-35
- start of back-up supply in case of failure
N
AC230V
L
16
18
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-34
- load disconnected when voltage declines or battery is discharged
N
A2
A1
15
L
+
A1
A2
4
DC
AC
25
28
26
15
15
16
16
18
18
Monitoring current relay PRI-51, PRI-32
- current-limiting relay (on one branch two appliances, which never work together), controlling systems, motors, heating, current indication, controlling of 1-phase motor run down,
during the installation of main housing switchboard could be controlled via eye, if the cooker is not switched
- in connection with current transformers, it is possible to extend current ranges up to 600A, which makes more things possible
N
AC230V
L
A1
A2
B1
B2
16
15
18
127
Examples of usage
Relay monitoring power factor COS-1
- monitors power-factor in 3-phase mains / unloading of motors, pumps, lift systems
Monitoring voltage relay HRN-43
- regulation of voltage from generator, water el. plants, 3-phase control in the main
- monitors and protects main´s quality
trol
e con
t
a
m
r ulti
unde
y
l
p
up
ase s
3-ph
L3
L2
L1
N
L3
L2
L1
N
f
ost o
ff. C r
o
s
y
t pa highe
t tha be far
n
e
stm can
Inve motor
a
Relay monitoring over-/undervoltage in 3-phase mains HRN-54N
- monitoring voltage in switchboard, protection of appliances
Relay monitoring sequence and failure of phases HRN-55, HRN-55N
- monitoring of proper motor rotation, electric drive, etc.
L3
L2
L1
N
L3
L2
L1
N
L1
N
L1
N
L2
L3
L2
L3
onior m ase
f
n
lutio 3-ph
ct so ices in s.
a
p
com dev lem
and nsitive“ nt prob
y
s
a
E g „se Preve
torin mains.
And
ut? will
o
t
n
bur elay
ever ? Our r
r
o
t
o
hy
ur m know w ou.
o
y
Has idn´t tell y
d
you
16
16
18
15
15
18
Monitoring current relay PRI-41 (PRI-42)
- monitoring over-/-underload (machine, motor ...)
- monitoring consumption, diagnostics of distant appliance (short circuit, increased consump. ...)
Monitoring voltage relay for under/vervoltage for 3-phase mains HRN-54
- confortable monitoring of 3-phase mains
N
L3
L2
L1
AC230V
L
L1
L2
L3
16
15
18
-p
O ne
128
hase
cu
t un
rren
der
ma
yin
gnif
g gl
ass
Examples of usage
Level switch HRH-1
- monitoring level in wells, tanks, pools, etc.
Level switch HRH-5
- monitoring level in well, sump, tanks, pool, silo...
N
N
L
L
HRH-1
u
e yo
Hav ump
?
n
flow ur p
over ving yo s, you
r
e
v
e
e
ha
voir while nk? If y itch.
r
e
s
a
g
e
t
w
r
n
s
i
y
r
you nyth mpt evel
Has burnt e with e t used l
e
o
ever operat have n
to baly
pro
Thermostat TER-3 with external sensor
- control of temperature of floor heating
N
L
A2
A1
ion
ulat
Reg
T1
T1
fort
com
d
n
sa
ving
= sa
have
and ne
y
e
mon s in o
Save device
two
2 stage thermostat TER-4 with 2 external sensors
- control of temperature of e.g. gas/electric boiler
N
L
sensor 1
sensor 2
18
15
N
Thermostat for thermal protection of motors TER-7
- protection of motors against thermal overload
Multifunction digital thermostat TER-9
- complex control of heating and water heating in a house
tor
mo
asic
db
L
re
A1
Befo
A2
25
26
le an
imp
S
.
e
ol
lat
too contr
it is
28
N
L
sensor 1
A1
T1
18
15
16
T1
7
Auto
T1
0
6
0
sensor 2
C
12
built-in
PTC sensor
16
15
Ta
R
A2
18
Tb
VS425
T2
T2
26
25
28
will
hich r the
w
t
osta d fo
erm vice an
h
t
r
de ?
la
simi in one ion one
a
s
ct
ow n
u kn functio gle-fun
o
y
Do you 6 of sin
rs
ce
offe pri
129
Note
130
Enjoy the complete household equipment by ELKO EP
VSM
VS
M -22
M220
0
Contactor with optional manual
switching (e.g. at boiler)
DIM
DI
M -15
MDimming of energy saving
lights and LED lamps
SMR
SM
R-U
SOU
SO
U-3
U-
Dimming of spot lights
TEV
TE
V- 1
V-
Function of light switch for pulling down the shutters at a high
luminous intensity
Two-level thermostat with independent setting of upper and
lower temperature
PRIIPR
I-32
TER
TE
R-9
R-
Central monitoring of the current
“is there a lamp switched on without any reason?”
Water temperature control
according to 2 temperatures
PSB
PS
B -10
B0 -1
12
Ideal for supplying drives, motors,
light sources
SMR
SM
R-B
RVentilation of the room after
turning off the button
SMR
SM
R-M
Dimming of LED bulbs
and dimmable saving light bulbs
CRM
CR
M - 91
M91H
H
SMR
SM
R-T
R-
Multifunctional relay featuring
10 most frequently used functions
Delayed switch-off of room lighting,
exhausting the bathrooms
COS
CO
S -1
S-
HRN
HR
N-33
N-
Monitoring the motor
overloading and balancing
Monitoring the voltage at the
devices “susceptible” to power
supply tolerance
USS
US
S
MR-4
42
Versatile and signalling modules
“Do it yourself”
Control of lighting from multiple
locations, stepping relay.
SHT
SH
T-1
TReal-time-based switching
of electrical equipment and
appliances
CRM
CR
M-4
MStaircase switch to control the
entrance lights
DIM
DI
M-2
MStaircase automatic switch with
adjustable smooth run-up and
run-down of light
LIC
LI
C-1
CAutomatically regulates
the intensity of light in a room
TER
TE
R -3A
CRM
CR
M -2H
M-
Thermostat for temperature
monitoring and regulation
(for thawing the black ice)
Ensures circulation of water at
regular intervals ,
1x per 1 hour for 5 minutes
ZTR
ZT
R-15-1
R12
HRH
HR
H-4
H-
For powering the door bells,
videophones, door locks
The level system consists of HRH-5
and contactors VS425
PS -3
300-12
TEV
TE
V- 4
V-
Power source
intrusion, fire, and
Temperature monitoring in
outdoor and heavy-duty
locations (IP 65)
SOU
SO
U-2
UAutomatic switching-on of the outdoor
lighting at twilight with integrated timer for
blocking the functions
HRH
HR
H-5
HLevel switch - pumping
water from the tank
Industrial use of ELKO EP products
MR-42
Group control of lighting from
multiple locations
HRF-10
SOU-2
Monitors the value of
the alternating voltage frequency
Automatic switching-on of the
outdoor lighting at twilight
CRM-81J
Periodic ventilation
PRI-53
Intended to monitor the current
in 3 phases
PRI-41/42
Monitoring the maximum
permissible weight
CRM-2T
Starting the motor, wye-delta
HRN-55
SOU-1
Phase failure monitoring
Automatic switching-on of the
outdoor lighting at twilight
HRN-41
SHT-4
PRI-51
Monitoring the voltage level
Indication of machine
failure / operation, depending
on the flowing current
Used for controlling the lighting
with no light sensors required
VS425
CRM-2H
3-phase contactor
for triggering the motor
TER-3
Monitoring temperature
in a tank
HRN-37
Lubricant dispensing
CRM-91H
Voltage / low voltage
monitoring
Pulse shift
HRN-64
PRI-51
Observing the standby power
unit battery
TER-9
Checking for conveyor jamming
= current increase
Liquid temperature control of
two independent circuits
COS-1
Power factor monitoring
= overall protection of motors
USS-modul
CRM.91H
PS-R
Dosing material at preset
intervals
Power supply at stabilised
voltage
Lucid switching and signalling,
modular design, wide range
of combinations
HRN-43
HRN-54
Assuring of continuous energy supply.
Back-up supply switching
Checking for overvoltage
at sensitive machinery circuits
HRH-5
Observing the liquid level
SHT-1/2
Pre-heating the devices at
preset times
Support of project design
Our aim is to give a complete care to all electro project designers.
Our activities:
Our products are a part of the following programs:
Project programs
Award programs
VeroX
Obis
DTB ELKO EP XLS
XLS
elektrotechnika
MARKS AND SYMBOLS DWG
TRAINING
In case our products attracted your interest, do not hesitate to contact us at elko@elkoep.com or see our websites www.elkoep.com for more
information.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
In case of any questions regarding use of our products for a particular project, contact us at support@elkoep.com
Note.: logos, names, software, hardware are protected by owner’s rights.
133
Production technology
The base of the production is a modern line disposing of SMD technology. SMD components compose of more than 80 % of all components. In the year 2004 the production line was
modernized distinctly and it was completed by some new machines. Herewith the accurancy improved considerably and the capacity enhanced.
1)
Printed circuit boards are placed into a cartridge and
then automatically delivered to SMD production line.
134
2)
Fully automatic adhesive and flux printer distributes
adhesive or flux through profile form to the place where
the SMD components are then mounted. Part of this
process is also 3D optic inspection of the executed
operation.
3)
4)
SMD components are mounted by pick-up machines.
Three heads with laser alignment can place up to
15,000 components an hour. This machine replaces
approximately 100 workers.
PCBs with mounted SMD components are inspected
and forwarded to reflow.
5)
6)
Hot-air furnace ERSA serves for glue hardening or to activation of soldering
flux by re-melting. The furnace has 3 zones. temperature after curing on
3rd ) output) zone approx. 1400C. For flux re-melting , the starting temperature is 130 0C, middle 180 0C and output is 280 0C.
Fully automatic line is ended by a cartridge which
distributes picked and cured PCBs into holders.
Production technology
7)
After the classic components are manually mounted by experienced
workers.
8)
Manual placing of classical components is followed by soldering in soldering
unit SEHO 8135-PCS which already supports “lead free” soldering
technology. Thanks to IR pre-heating, this soldering unit allows operations
on PCB together with temperature sensitive components on the upper side
of PCB. Soldering unit is equipped by LW soldering jet and Delta jet. These
jets allow a good quality.
9)
10)
After necessary semi-product testing on pin-testers (Pic.9) final assembling into enclosures is executed. The actual state of completion is monitored by
bar codes during the whole production process (Pic.10).
11)
Semi-finished PCBs are tested by this tester. It replaces visual control.
By using weight board, particular pins on bottom part are in contact.
Functionality of SMD components and classical components is checked.
Testing one PCB set takes about 20 s.
12)
In the end the products are fully printed by laser technology. Laser can burn from
upper part) side of the product) and side part (front panel and terminals) printing
one piece takes about 30 s.
135
EL
LKO EP R
Ru
uss
ssia
ia
a
ELKO
EL
KO
O EP Po
ola
land
nd
ELKO
EL
KO
OE
EP
P Ukkra
rain
ine
e
ELKO
EL
KO EP
EL
LKO EP
P Ge
Germ
rman
any
y
EL
LKO
KO EP Sl
Slov
ovak
ov
akia
ak
ia
ELKO
EL
KO EP Hu
H ngary
y
iNEL
iN
ELS
S As
Asia
ia (Ch
hin
na)
a
ELKO EP, s.r.o.
Palackeho 493 / 769 01 Holesov, Vsetuly / Czech Republic
tel.: +420 573 514 221 | fax: +420 573 514 227 | elko@elkoep.com | www.elkoep.com
Published: 09/2013 / Modifications or amendments reserved/ © Copyright ELKO EP, s.r.o. / 1st edition

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project